View
216
Download
0
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
i.
WELCOME ~ BIENVENIDOS
At Western Tech, this word is more than a simple greeting; it represents the
open door to all those who wish to enjoy a real-world experience in a professional
school. It is a belief that is embodied by each and every staff member from the
time a student first contacts us, through graduation and ongoing career assistance.
Family-owned and operated for over three generations and forty-five years,
Western Tech began as a place where students could translate their passions into
careers they loved to pursue. The real-world approach is one of the many reasons
our graduates have found success in their careers.
Education is more than words in a book or information that can be found on a
computer. It is a combination of hands-on experience, traditional classroom work,
and industry-specific career development. Western Tech utilizes high-tech
facilities and equipment, combined with instruction given from our highly
qualified instructors that prepares students with the skills that are applicable the
first day on the job. The school’s owners and administrators pledge to provide
high quality facilities, equipment, and instructors for the specialty areas that are
offered.
Finally, Western Tech stands by its students and is committed to supporting
them from the time of first contact, during their program of study and on through
graduation and employment. In order to ensure our graduates are successful
beyond graduation, Western Tech makes available ongoing career assistance and
provides opportunities for graduates to refresh and update their technical skills.
Western Tech is a total package of expert instruction and student support.
The Staff, Faculty, and Students welcome you to
Western Tech!
OUR MISSION
The Mission of Western Technical College is to: Provide quality training and
education in a caring, professional environment that prepares new students and
working adults with the skills they need to succeed and advance in their chosen
careers.
ii.
Table of Contents
Accreditation & Approvals ............................................................................................................ p. 1
History, Facilities, & College Philosophy .................................................................................... p. 2-3
Admissions .................................................................................................................................. p. 4-5
General Information ........................................................................................................................ p. 5
Consumer Information .................................................................................................................... p. 6
International Students .................................................................................................................. p. 7-8
Student Financial Services ......................................................................................................... p. 9-15
Active Military and Veterans ................................................................................................... p. 16-17
Program/Course Descriptions ................................................................................................ p. 18-163
Advanced Welding Technology ...................................................................................... p. 18-22
Commercial Driver Training ........................................................................................... p. 23-26
Massage Therapy ............................................................................................................ p. 27-38
Medical Billing & Coding ............................................................................................... p. 39-46
Medical/Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology ....................................................... p. 47-54
Automotive Technology .................................................................................................. p. 55-65
Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Light Duty Diesel ................................. p. 66-76
Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Performance Tuning............................. p. 77-86
Diesel Mechanics ............................................................................................................ p. 87-97
Refrigeration & HVAC Technology ............................................................................. p. 98-106
Business Administration and Management ................................................................. p. 107-115
Electronics Engineering Technology........................................................................... p. 116-124
Information Systems and Security ............................................................................... p. 125-132
Physical Therapist Assistant ........................................................................................ p. 133-145
Business Administration ............................................................................................. p. 146-163
Policies & Standards ............................................................................................................ p. 164-172
Support Services ......................................................................................................... p. 166-167
Graduation ........................................................................................................................... p. 173-175
Continuing Education......................................................................................................... p. 175
Career Services ........................................................................................................................... p. 176
Where Are WTC Graduates Working ......................................................................... p. 177-182
Cancellation & Refund Policy.............................................................................................. p. 183-184
Administration ............................................................................. Catalog Addendum p. 1
Faculty ......................................................................................... Catalog Addendum p. 2-8
College Schedules ........................................................................ Catalog Addendum p. 9-13
Tuition, Registration, Book and Tool Costs ................................. Catalog Addendum p. 14-16
Student Class Break Schedule ...................................................... Catalog Addendum p. 17
Membership ................................................................................. Catalog Addendum p. 18
Graduate Employment Summary ................................................. Catalog Addendum p. 19
NOTE: Western Tech maintains a separate Addendum to the School Catalog that includes an updated list of key
administrators, program directors, faculty, class hours and schedules, break schedules, tuition, book & tool costs,
start dates, holidays, and graduate employment summary. Prior to enrolling, all applicants will receive this
information.
Revised: February 2, 2018
Western Tech Catalog | 1
ACCREDITATION/APPROVALS
(The original accreditation and licensure documents are displayed at each campus.)
ACCREDITATION Western Tech is accredited by the Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and Colleges (ACCSC) which is
listed by the U.S. Department of Education (USDOE) as a nationally recognized accrediting agency.
APPROVALS Western Tech is approved and regulated by the Texas Workforce Commission (TWC), Career Schools and
Colleges Section, Austin, Texas. Western Tech’s degree-granting programs are approved and regulated by the Texas
Higher Education Coordinating Board (THECB). Western Tech’s Massage Therapy Program is approved and
regulated by the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR). The College’s programs are approved to
train veterans by the Texas Workforce Commission and foreign students by the U.S. Department of Immigration and
Naturalization (INS).
WESTERN TECH
WEBSITE ADDRESS: www.westerntech.edu
MAIN CAMPUS
9624 PLAZA CIRCLE
EL PASO, TEXAS 79927
(915) 532-3737 • 1(800) 225-5984
FAX (915) 532-6946
BRANCH CAMPUS
9451 DIANA DRIVE
EL PASO, TEXAS 79924
(915) 566-9621 • 1(800) 522-2072
FAX (915) 565-9903
I certify that the information presented in this catalog is correct to the best of my knowledge and belief.
The contents of this catalog are subject to change without notice.
Brad Kuykendall
Brad Kuykendall
CEO
Catalog Volume Number L
Published February 2, 2018
February 2018 through December 2018
Western Tech Catalog | 2
HISTORY, FACILITIES & COLLEGE PHILOSOPHY
HISTORY Western Technical College (WTC) started operation
on January 1, 1970, and since that time has expanded
both in size and enrollment. Currently, Western
Technical College is celebrating its 48th year in
business.
Starting with a basic welding curriculum, new
programs have been added periodically. Refrigeration
and Air Conditioning was added in 1971, Automotive
in 1975, Electronics in 1980, Microcomputer training in
1983, Medical Assisting in 1984, Health
Information Technology in 1994, Pipe Welding, Diesel,
Performance Tuner, and Massage Therapy in 2006.
Upon expert advice from employer advisory boards, the
courses and programs at WTC are constantly updated to
conform to industry needs.
In January of 1979, El Paso Trade School became
accredited by the National Association of Trade and
Technical Schools (NATTS), which is now known as
the Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and
Colleges (ACCSC).
In June of 1986, the school underwent a name
change. Since the previous name, El Paso Trade School,
no longer accurately reflected the “high tech” courses
taught at the school, the name was changed to Western
Technical Institute (WTI).
In March of 2005, the school underwent another
name change. The name Western Technical
College (www.westerntech.edu) is more modern, up-
to-date, and better reflects the careers and degrees
offered by the College.
The branch campus moved to a more modern facility
in 2001. The main campus relocated into a spacious
150,000 square foot facility in late 2005. The main
campus was approved to offer certificate programs in
Performance Tuner and in Diesel Mechanics.
On July 18, 2007, WTC was approved to offer its
first Associate of Applied Science (AAS) degree in
Physical Therapist Assistant.
In 2013, WTC was approved to offer a Certificate of
Completion in Performance Tuner, and in 2014, WTC
also began a program offering of Automotive
Technology with a sub-specialty in Light Duty
Diesel. Furthermore, Diesel Mechanics and
Performance Tuner were also moved to Sub-Specialty
offerings in Automotive Technology.
In July 2015, WTC was approved to offer another
AAS Degree in Business Administration and
Management for both the main and branch
campus. This was the first AAS degree offering for the
main campus.
In December 2014, WTC was approved at the
branch campus to begin offering distance education for
the Medical Billing and Coding Program, and all the
General Education courses in our AAS degree
programs. The education platform is a hybrid of on-
ground and online. The launch occurred on February
09, 2015. In September 2015, WTC’s Branch Campus
was also approved to offer Distance Education in a
hybrid platform training in Information Systems and
Security, Electronics Engineering Technology and
Business Administration and Management.
In September 2015, WTC’s Main Campus was also
approved to begin offering distance education in a
hybrid platform for Business Administration and
Management.
In October 2016, WTC’s Main and Brach Campuses
were approved to begin offering distance education in a
hybrid platform for the Medical/Clinical Assistant with
X-Ray Technology certificate program.
On March 2017, WTC’s Main and Branch
Campuses were approved to begin offering the
Bachelor of Art in Business Administration.
In April 2017, WTC’s Main Campus was approved
to begin offering distance education in a hybrid
platform for the Auto and Heavy Truck Division AOS
degree programs and the Refrigeration and HVAC
Technology AOS degree program.
Lastly, on November 2017, WTC’s Main Campus
was approved to offer a certificate program in
Commercial Driver Training (CDT).
FACILITIES Western Tech occupies two modern campuses
designed to enhance learning and provide students a real
world entry-level experience prior to employment.
Each campus houses different programs and allows
accommodation to a larger number of people across the
city of El Paso. Western Tech offers wireless network
services throughout each campus which allows faculty,
staff and guests of the College to utilize the wireless
network.
The Plaza Circle (main) campus location is housed
in a 150,000 square ft. facility on 13 acres. The facility
comfortably accommodates classrooms and shops for
the following programs: Automotive, Diesel, Light
Duty Diesel, and Performance Tuner Technology, and
Commercial Driver Training; Refrigeration/HVAC
Technology, Advanced Welding, Business
Administration and Management (AAS and BS
programs), and Medical/Clinical Assistant with X-Ray
program. Our main campus also features a Learning
Resource Center (LRC), student computer labs,
restaurant and a Matco Tool store.
The Diana (branch) campus is housed in 48,000
square feet on five acres with an additional 2,000 square
feet of outside student break area. This campus features
an administrative office area, student Learning
Resource Center, and student lounge.
The branch campus houses the following programs:
Information Systems and Security, Electronics
Engineering Technology, Medical Billing & Coding,
Physical Therapist Assistant, Massage Therapy,
Business Administration and Management (AAS and
BS programs), and Medical/Clinical Assistant with X-
Ray Technology program.
COLLEGE PHILOSOPHY Western Tech programs are designed to train the
inexperienced person for entry-level employment and
to help experienced workers upgrade their skills in their
respective fields.
All programs are designed so that the students spend
a good portion of their time working in the labs. By
Western Tech Catalog | 3
providing a proper balance between theory and practical
shop work, the school has consistently graduated
students who are accepted in industry and are
recognized as potential leaders in their field.
Western Tech Catalog | 4
ADMISSIONS
Admissions Procedures
Individuals who seek admission to Western Tech are interviewed either in person or by telephone by an
Admissions Representative. The pre-admission interview is designed to assist in assessing whether the student has a
reasonable chance of successfully completing the appropriate program of study. The purpose of the interview is to:
1. Explore the prospective student’s background interest as it relates to the programs offered at Western Tech.
2. Assist prospective students in identifying the appropriate area of study consistent with their background
and interest.
3. Provide information concerning curriculum offerings and support services available at Western Tech.
Prospective students will tour the campus as part of the enrollment process and fill out the necessary forms and
documents prescribed by the college and its regulating and accrediting bodies. Arrangements for an interview and
tour of Western Tech may be made by contacting the Admissions Department.
Admissions Requirements
To be eligible for any program offered by Western Tech, a prospective student must have at least a high school
diploma, homeschool diploma equivalent to high school, or equivalency certificate (GED) recognized by the United
States Department of Education. Classes are taught in English; therefore, an adequate level of proficiency in reading,
writing, and speaking the English Language is required. Prospective international students are required to take the
Test of Adult Basic Education (TABE). Program specific admissions requirements can be found in each program of
study section (page numbers found below).
Program of Study Page Number
Commercial Driver Training 23-24
Massage Therapy 28
Medical Billing & Coding 40
Medical/Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology 48
A.O.S. in Automotive Technology 57
A.O.S. in Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Light Duty Diesel 67
A.O.S. in Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Performance Tuning 78
A.O.S. in Diesel Mechanics 88-89
A.O.S. in Refrigeration & HVAC Technology 99
A.A.S. in Business Administration and Management 108
A.A.S. in Electronics Engineering Technology 116-117
A.A.S. in Information Systems and Security 126
A.A.S. in Physical Therapist Assistant 134-135
Bachelor in Business Administration 147
Additionally, Western Tech has compiled a list of “Technical Standards and Essential Functions” for each of its
programs. The ability to meet these standards and functions is required to complete the program. The prospective
student should refer to the catalog section that discusses his/her program of interest or visit www.westerntech.edu
for the detailed list of “Technical Standards and Essential Functions.”
For Prospects with Foreign Transcripts
Official copies of secondary education, presented to Western Tech in a foreign language must be evaluated by an
independent third party recognized by the United States Department of Education for equivalency status as a high
school diploma in the United States. Western Tech offers this service to prospective students. The process takes
five to seven working days. If the transcript returns as a “Non-Equivalency” status, the prospect would be required
to obtain a GED in order to attend any class offered at Western Tech. The prospective student is referred to Western
Tech’s GED coordinator.
The cost for the evaluation is the responsibility of the prospective student.
NOTE: Transcripts from Puerto Rico are accepted.
For Prospects Unable to Produce a High School Diploma or GED
In the event the prospective student experiences a problem acquiring the high school diploma or GED, Western
Tech will make allowances provided that one of the following criteria is met:
1. The prospective student can produce a degree from a recognized post-secondary accredited institution. The
student is required to produce an official transcript from the institution attended.
2. The prospective student attended college or received vocational training from a U.S. Department of
Education recognized accredited institution, but did not complete school. The prospective student would
be required to possess a minimum of (24) semester credit hours or equivalent, of post-secondary training
at a national or regionally accredited institution. The individual is required to submit official transcripts
Western Tech Catalog | 5
with a minimum (2.0) cumulative grade point average. This does not apply to military Joint Services
Transcripts (JST) from any military branch.
3. The prospective student can produce an official military service DD214, which denotes the prospective
student does possess a high school diploma or GED.
4. High school seniors can submit their most current partial transcript that indicates their expected graduation
date.
Prospective students that are unable to meet the requirement above will be referred to the GED coordinator.
GENERAL INFORMATION
General Education Diploma (GED) Preparatory Program
Western Tech offers a GED prep program. For more information see Student Services.
Alumni/Transfer Credit
Western Tech offers Alumni/Transfer Credit. For more information see Student Financial Services.
Scholarships
Western Tech offers Scholarships. For more information see Student Financial Services.
Student Insurance
Western Tech provides insurance coverage for injuries to students while attending class or school functions on
Western Tech premises and during internship and group activities sponsored by the College. The Policy does not
cover students after school. See your registrar for more information. Western Tech also provides Medical
Malpractice insurance for those students in the following programs: Massage Therapy, Medical/Clinical Assistant,
Medical Billing & Coding, and Physical Therapist Assistant.
Note: Massage Therapy students acquire student membership insurance with Associated Bodywork and
Massage Professionals for coverage during internship, outside of school hours and while students utilize and
practice skills on their spare time.
Section 504/ADA Policy
Western Tech does not discriminate on the basis of age, race, color, sex, disability, religion, sexual orientation,
national origin, or any other characteristic protected by state, local or federal law in the administration of any of its
educational programs or activities, or with respect to admission or employment. If you would like to request academic
or auxiliary aids, please contact the Campus Director. You may request academic or auxiliary aids at any time. Each
Campus Director is responsible for coordinating compliance with Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and
Title III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990.
Western Tech is committed to making reasonable, appropriate, and effective accommodations and modifications
in policies, procedures, and practices where necessary to qualified prospective students in accordance with Section
504 of the Rehabilitation Act, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and applicable state, local laws, and
regulations. Contact the director of admissions with any inquiries regarding Western Tech’s nondiscrimination
policies. Students requesting reasonable accommodations will need to be able to complete competencies, as set forth
in each program.
Any qualified individual with a disability requesting an accommodation, auxiliary aid or service should follow
the procedure below:
1. Notify the Campus Director in writing of the type of accommodation needed, date needed, and
documentation of the nature and extent of the disability. International documentation of disabilities will
not be accepted. The request should be made at least four weeks in advance of the date needed.
2. The Campus Director will respond within two weeks of receiving the request.
If you would like to request reconsideration of the decision regarding your request, please contact the Campus
Director within one week of the date of the response. Please provide a written statement of why and how you think
the response should be modified.
Western Tech Catalog | 6
CONSUMER INFORMATION
The Western Tech website contains consumer information mandated by numerous governmental agencies. The
consumer information webpage can be accessed at http://www.westerntech.edu/student-financial-
services/consumer-information/. The information available includes:
Privacy and Information Security
Western Tech carefully protects all personal information in its possession regarding students and their families.
The college employs office procedures and password-protected computer systems to ensure the security of paper and
electronic records. The college does not disclose its security procedures to students or the general public to protect
the effectiveness of those procedures. Access to social security numbers and other personally identifiable information
(PII) is strictly limited to those School Officials with a need-to-know.
The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (FERPA) also provides current and former students with
the right to inspect and review educational records, the right to seek to amend those records, the right to limit
disclosure of information from the records and the right to file a complaint with the U.S. Department of Education.
For more information and details of this policy, please refer to the Western Tech website at
http://www.westerntech.edu/student-financial-services/consumer-information/privacy-policy-for-student-records/.
Campus Security Report and Policy
This report contains an itemized listing of crimes and certain other offenses committed on the College’s campuses
and the adjacent public areas during the past three calendar years. The policy highlights Western Tech’s methods
for protecting student security, and for informing the students and the campus community of any crimes or patterns
of crimes that may pose a threat to safety. The Report and Policy can be found at
http://www.westerntech.edu/student-financial-services/consumer-information/campus-security-policies-
procedures-disclosures/. Interested parties who are unable to access the report on-line, or would prefer a paper copy,
may contact any member of Western Tech staff.
Drug Awareness and Drug Abuse Prevention Policy
Western Tech maintains a drug abuse prevention policy which prohibits the illegal possession, sale, or distribution
of controlled substances on the Western Tech campuses or at College events. The Policy and significant information
about the hazards drug abuse, the effects of specific substances, and links to local rehabilitation service organizations
can be found at http://www.westerntech.edu/student-financial-services/consumer-information/drug-and-alcohol-
policies/. Interested parties who are unable to access the policy on-line, or would prefer a paper copy, may contact
any member of Western Tech staff.
Other Consumer Information Available on the Western Tech Website
http://www.westerntech.edu/student-financial-services/consumer-information/
College Information
Financial Assistance Information
Student Body Diversity
GED Resources
Career Services
Privacy Policy for Student Records
Drug and Alcohol Policies
Campus Security and Crime Awareness Policies/Annual Security Report
Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP)
Facilities and Services Available to Students with Disabilities
Transfer of Credit Policies and Articulation Agreements
Withdrawal, Leave of Absence, Refund, and Return to Title IV Policies
Copyright Infringement
Completion and Placement Disclosures
Voter Registration/Constitution Day
Gainful Employment
Cost of Attendance and Net Price Calculator
Financial Aid Code of Ethics
Immunization Policy
PRINTED COPIES OF ANY OF THE CONSUMER INFORMATION CONTAINED ON WESTERN
TECH’S WEBSITE CAN BE OBTAINED BY CONTACTING THE CAMPUS DIRECTOR’S OFFICE.
Western Tech Catalog | 7
INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS
Western Tech is dedicated to serving the needs of the international student from the admission application process
through transfer or graduation. The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) regulations can be difficult to
understand, but we are here to help the international student stay in compliance with DHS requirements while
attending Western Tech. For the convenience of students, Western Tech has designated international student advisers
at each campus.
How to Obtain A SEVIS I-20 Form
International students wishing to live in the United States while attending college must be admitted as full-time
international students and maintain a full-time course load to stay in compliance with F-1/F-3 Visa requirements.
Applicants seeking to enroll in valid student nonimmigrant status must submit each of the following items:
1. A completed Application for Admissions.
2. A completed and signed Enrollment Agreement.
3. Original or official copies of educational transcripts (secondary school and, if applicable, university- level
academic records) and diplomas. These educational transcripts and diplomas must be prepared in English
or include a complete and official English translation. Western Tech will perform this function on behalf
of the student in which the student will assume cost for the translation. The translation is generally
completed within five to seven school days.
*NOTE: Transcripts from Puerto Rico are accepted.
4. Official evaluation of non-American educational credentials; the official transcript is translated by an
independent 3rd party recognized by the U.S. Department of Education for equivalency status in the United
States.
5. Proof of English language proficiency (see below for proficiency policy).
6. A completed and signed Sponsor’s Statement of Financial Support (This statement is not required if the
student is self-sponsored.).
7. Official Financial Statements. Financial statements (typically provided by a bank) must verify sufficient
funds to cover the cost of the educational program as well as living expenses.
8. Students must submit prior to the start date, a registration fee of $100 collected along with the signed
enrollment agreement.
9. A photocopy of the student’s passport to provide proof of birth date and citizenship (Students outside the
United States who have not yet acquired a passport will need to submit a copy of their birth certificate.).
10. Nonimmigrant applicants residing in the United States at the time of application: a photocopy of the visa
page contained within the student’s passport as well as a photocopy of the student’s I/94 arrival departure
record (both sides).
11. For all nonimmigrant applicants residing in the United States at the time of application in F, M, or J
nonimmigrant classification: written confirmation of nonimmigrant status at previous school attended
before transferring to Western Tech.
12. Proof of health insurance. Students who do not possess health insurance upon applying to the college must
be prepared to purchase health insurance through an approved provider upon commencement of studies.
Proof of proficiency in the English language is required for enrollment into academic programs. The following
may be used as proof of proficiency:
1. Official transcripts from an accredited United States college or university showing completion of 12
semester credit hours with a cumulative GPA of at least 2.0 on a 4.0 scale.
2. Official report on the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) with a minimum score of 450 (paper-
based), or 133 (computerized), or 45 (Internet) on the international version.
3. Complete Test of Adult Basic Education (TABE) and upon approval from the program director.
Issuance of the I-20 Form General Information
The I-20 form is issued in compliance with The Department of Homeland Security rules, and the General
Issuance Guidelines:
1. I-20 will be issued no earlier than 60 calendar days prior to first day of the program start for which the
prospective student applied.
2. I-20 will generally be issued no later than 30 days prior to the first day of the program start for which the
prospective student applied.
SEVIS I-20/F-1 Visa Requirements
After receiving the SEVIS I-20 form and F-1/F-3 Visa, you must comply with the following requirements. You
must report to Western Tech International Students Office within 10 days of entering the United States for the first
time on your F-1/F-3 Visa.
1. You must report changes to your address and phone number to the International Students Office within
(10) days.
2. You must report to the International Students Office any changes in your schedule that causes you to be
out of status, e.g., withdrawing from a class causing less than full-time attendance.
Western Tech Catalog | 8
3. To extend your I-20 Form, you must report to the International Students Office for an extension, four weeks
prior to the expiration date. If the I-20 is not extended or renewed prior to the expiration date, it will be
terminated, and the student will not be allowed to continue to study after the expiration date. The student
will have to leave the United States and re-apply for a new I-20 and get a new F-1/F-3 Visa.
Contact the International Students Office immediately if you plan to transfer to another college or university.
Another school will not be able to issue an I-20 to you unless Western Tech first releases your SEVIS record.
Western Tech Catalog | 9
STUDENT FINANCIAL SERVICES
Western Tech employs a full-time staff of dedicated student financial services professionals to help each student
to understand the financial aid programs, understand their rights and responsibilities, navigate the application
processes, and manage all of the paperwork associated with financial aid eligibility. Student Financial Services is
open during normal business hours at both campuses, including evenings (Monday through Thursday). We encourage
students to stop by any time they have questions or concerns about financial aid or any aspect of college financing.
Western Tech participates in Federal Title IV Student Aid programs authorized under Title IV of the Higher
Education Act of 1965 (as amended), and is approved for the training of veterans and other eligible persons in
accordance with the provisions of Section 3675, Title 38, U.S. code. Financial assistance is made available to
qualified students according to the rules of each individual student aid program.
The Western Tech website contains detailed information about the types and amounts of student aid available,
application procedures, eligibility rules, and the rights and responsibilities of students receiving federal student aid
at www.westerntech.edu.
SCHOLARSHIPS AND AWARDS A Grant or a Scholarship is money that is used to help a student pay for school-related expenses. These items
are awards that do not need to be re-paid.
A Work-Study award must be earned through work at an hourly wage. Wages earned through this program do
not need to be re-paid.
A Loan must be re-paid at a future date through monthly payments. Any loan/financing offered at Western Tech
will be fully explained and provided with written terms and conditions, including terms of repayment. Be sure to
read and understand the terms and conditions prior to agreeing to any loan or financing agreement.
Transfer Credit is credit awarded to a student for a similar course(s) taken at another institution of higher
education, with the same or parallel objectives. Transfer credit may also be given based on an individual’s work
experience in the field of study. Also, updated industry certifications may be applied for transfer credit, depending
on the program of study.
Course Exemption refers to course(s) of study that have been taken by the prospect at the same institution or
different institution of higher education, with the same course objectives that allow the student to forgo having to
take the same class, and not be charged for said course(s) in the new program.
An Award is external monetary value that is provided through Service Member Awards and HS Articulation, or
scholarship, and applied to tuition only.
TRANSFER CREDIT FOR PREVIOUS EDUCATION, TRAINING, MILITARY, OR
WORK EXPERIENCE
Academic Credit
Those who believe they may qualify for academic credit, or course exemption based on previous education,
training, or work experience, may apply by informing their admissions representative during the enrollment process.
The evaluation of credit granted may be done by transcript evaluation, interview, testing or performance, or a
combination thereof. Course exemption(s) granted is documented and cost of the program is reduced proportionately.
Decisions on course exemption(s) must be made prior to a student starting school.
For Applicants who want to Transfer Credits to Western Tech
1. Applicants who wish to have their previous education and experience reviewed and considered for
credit must do so prior to being accepted and starting class. For all degree programs, students that have
taken general education coursework over the last five (5) years, may be entitled to course exemption
provided that the grade(s) earned are a “B” or higher.
2. All course exemptions are determined by the Campus Director at each location.
3. The acceptance of transfer credit for technical courses is primarily based on the competencies achieved
by the applicant in previously completed coursework, training or employment and whether the
competencies reasonably align with the Western Tech coursework and program into which the credit is
to be transferred. In addition to transcripts, applicants may be required to provide course descriptions
from the school where the coursework was performed, to enable Western Tech to perform a course-by-
course evaluation.
4. Additionally, Western Tech may require applicants requesting transfer credit to take oral, written or
performance exams or a combination thereof. Applicants must achieve a minimum score of 75% on the
exam(s) in order to receive credit.
5. Western Tech does not accept credits listed as “transfer” credits on transcripts from other institutions.
Actual transcripts are required for coursework from all institutions previously attended.
6. Western Tech will only consider granting credit for coursework, certifications earned, military or work
experience which has occurred within the last five years.
7. If the institution which the applicant previously attended is located within the United States, it must be
accredited by an accrediting agency recognized by the United States Department of Education.
Transcripts in Spanish from Puerto Rico or other United States territories are acceptable. If the
Western Tech Catalog | 10
institution is outside the United States, it must be accredited or similarly acknowledged by an agency
deemed acceptable at Western Tech’s discretion. Western Tech may also require evaluation of foreign
transcripts to determine high school equivalency of credentials by an independent third party at the
applicant’s expense.
8. High school graduates may be eligible for an award from high school level coursework based on the
articulation agreement between Western Tech and the independent school district from which the
student graduated. Western Tech has articulation agreements with most of the school districts in the
surrounding area. In order to qualify for the award, a high school course grade must be at least an 80% /
B / 3.0.
9. Students receiving credit are not eligible to receive Title IV student financial assistance or Veterans
Administration (VA) funding for any coursework for which credit was granted. They may receive
student financial assistance or VA funding for all other coursework at Western Tech contingent upon
their eligibility.
10. At a minimum, 50% of the credits required for graduation from Western Tech must be earned at
Western Tech.
11. Final decisions on transfer credit are made by the campus director.
High School Articulation
A high school graduate may be eligible for credit from previous training in high school. WTC has articulation
agreements with most of the El Paso school districts, and surrounding areas. The student must receive an 80% or
higher on the articulated course(s) for credit purposes.
Alumni Credit
Graduates who wish to take an entire program different than the one they graduated from may do so at up to 50%
off tuition. Alumni that enroll in a subsequent program must be in good standing with WTC, to include zero conduct
issues with his/her previous program and is also in good standing with his/her student loans. Students will also be
held accountable to maintain the minimum requirements for attendance (85% per course) and at least a 2.0 grade
point average per course to qualify for the alumni discount benefit. Students who do not meet this benchmark during
the billing cycles (as described below) will not qualify for the alumni discount for that cycle.
• Graduated Scale with a 50% Max
o 1st period 10% of tuition billed for period
o 2nd period 20% of tuition billed for period
o 3rd period 30% of tuition billed for period
o 4th period 40% of tuition billed for period
o 5th period 50% of tuition billed for period
o 6th period 50% of tuition billed for period
• Credit posted at the beginning of the next period
• Attendance & GPA Requirements
o No probation for the applicable period
o Business Office will send an inquiry to Registrar before posting credit
Note: In order for the alumnus to receive the full benefit of the tuition discount, it is imperative that the alumnus
entering the new program, maintain minimum academic and attendance requirements.
The following are brief descriptions of the aid
programs in which Western Tech participates. More
detailed information is available on the College’s
website at www.westerntech.edu.
FEDERAL STUDENT AID Federal Pell Grant
Federal Pell is a grant that does not need to be repaid.
Eligible students who have not received a Bachelor's
Degree may receive this grant based upon their
Expected Family Contribution (EFC) as determined
through the FAFSA application process.
Federal Supplemental Education Opportunity
Grant (SEOG)
Pell-eligible students (see above) may also be
eligible for an additional grant under this program.
SEOG awards are limited to those eligible students
with the lowest EFC’s (generally zero EFC’s only).
Federal Work Study Program
This program enables students who demonstrate
financial need to earn a portion of their education
expenses. Students earn at least the current hourly
minimum wage by working at the College, non-
profit organizations or other community employers.
Federal Stafford Loan Program
Eligible students at Western Tech are able to borrow
a traditional “student loan” from the Federal Direct
Student Loan Program. These loans are called
Federal Stafford Loans, and the interest on these
loans may be subsidized and/or unsubsidized.
For maximum loan amounts, explanations of the
differences between the Subsidized and
Unsubsidized Loan Programs, and other important
information, please visit the College’s website at:
www.westerntech.edu.
Western Tech Catalog | 11
Federal PLUS Loan (Parents)
The parents of dependent students at Western Tech
are generally able to borrow a Federal Parent PLUS
Loan based upon credit-worthiness. Parents can
borrow up to the full cost of education minus any
other aid received.
INSTITUTIONAL FINANCING In the event that a student is unable to completely
pay for his/her education with Federal Student Aid
funds, Western Tech offers students two options:
1. In-School Payment Plan- The Western Tech
Payment Plan allows students to make equal
monthly payments across the school year for any
remaining balance after other forms of financial
assistance are considered.
2. Long-Term Financing- Western Tech also offers
institutional financing (through a third-party
servicer) which allows for a maximum term of
thirty-six months. Interest rates are determined by
credit analysis.
Western Tech complies with all applicable state,
federal and equal credit opportunity laws; however,
Western Tech does not guarantee financial
assistance to any student.
PERSONAL FINANCING In the event that a student and/or parent would like
to obtain personal financing through their own lender,
please consult with the Financial Aid Office to discuss
a personalized payment schedule.
Scholarships
The primary purpose of this scholarship program is
to encourage high school seniors to enter high-tech
career training. The secondary purpose is to assist
economically disadvantaged students who, although
academically capable, may not otherwise be able to
fully afford specialized career training.
The following are brief descriptions of the
scholarships that Western Tech offers for qualified
students:
High School Senior Scholarships
The Western Tech High School Senior Scholarship
awards five (5) total scholarships from each of our (13)
eligible programs to all school districts throughout the
Southwest Region. The criteria’s to complete the High
School Senior Scholarship application are as follows:
1. Turn in (2) letters of recommendation from
an appropriate source (teachers, employers,
counselors).
2. Turn in a minimum of a (300) word essay
"Why you want a career in the field you are
applying for" (list your activities in school,
work experience, previous training and
goals).
3. Provide an official copy of your current high
school transcripts, (after the first H.S. Senior
semester).
4. Schedule a Wonderlic Basic Skills Test
(WBST) to be administered at Western Tech.
The awarded scholarships will be applied towards
current tuition using the following formula:
• 1st. place will receive 25% off tuition
• 2nd. place will receive 20% off tuition
• 3rd. place will receive 15% off tuition
• 4th. place will receive 10% off tuition
• 5th. place will receive 5% off tuition
All seniors who will be graduating High School in
the spring are eligible to apply for the High School
Senior Scholarships. Students who wish to apply should
see their high school career center or school counselor
for a scholarship application, or visit the
Westerntech.edu website. The selection process is
completed by a committee of local high school
personnel. The application and review process will be
completed in mid-April.
Note: Prospective students who are enrolling cannot
be granted more than 50% off tuition in total
scholarship awards.
WTC High School Senior scholarships and awards
are valid for one year after the date and are not a cash
award. They are applied towards tuition fees only. Non-
transferable and redeemable only at Western Tech.
Scholarship and awards are only to be deducted from
tuition upon successfully completing the career
program of prospect student’s choice.
Skills USA Scholarships
Western Tech offers scholarships to the winners of
the Skills USA competition (El Paso regional area).
The High School Senior participants who place 1st
through 3rd in each category will receive a scholarship
using the following formula:
• 1st. place will receive 20% off tuition
• 2nd. place will receive 15% off tuition
• 3rd. place will receive 10% off tuition
The High School Junior participants who place 1st
through 3rd in each category will receive a scholarship
using the following formula:
• 1st. place will receive 10% off tuition
• 2nd. place will receive 7.5% off tuition
• 3rd. place will receive 5% off tuition
Note: Prospective students who are enrolling cannot
be granted more than 50% off tuition in total
scholarship awards.
WTC Skills USA Scholarships for HS Seniors and
HS Juniors are valid for one year after the date and are
not a cash award. They are applied towards tuition fees
only. Non-transferable and redeemable only at Western
Tech. Scholarships are only to be deducted from tuition
upon successfully completing the career program of
prospect student’s choice.
Military Appreciation Award
Active duty and reserve service members, honorably
discharged veterans or National Guard members, and
their dependents qualify for 10% reduction to current
tuition. Supporting documentation to be considered for
the award is as follows:
Western Tech Catalog | 12
1. Veteran -A copy of the prospective
student DD214 along with a picture ID
2. Military Dependent Spouse – A copy of
military spouse DD214 and/or proof of
active duty(active orders), picture ID, and
marriage certificate.
3. Military Dependent Child – Marriage
certificate of parents, child birth
certificate identifying either parent,
picture ID (parent, child) along with
DD214 and/or proof of active duty,
reserve and/or National Guard.
The 10% reduction does not apply to books, tools, or
any other charges.
Career Colleges and Schools of Texas (CCST)
Scholarships
Western Tech participates in the Career Colleges
and Schools of Texas (CCST) scholarship program,
which is available for high school seniors in both public
and private high schools in Texas. The scholarship
award is valued at $1,000.00, and each school receives
10 scholarship certificates per calendar year. The
scholarship can be redeemed at participating colleges
and universities throughout the state. The selection
process is done at each high school and only high school
counselor(s) may award a scholarship. The career
school and high school counselor are both notified when
a scholarship is issued. Scholarship recipients must
graduate high school in the same school year
(September-June) as the issue date of the scholarship,
and the deadline for awarding scholarships is August 31
of the year that the student graduates from high school.
Prospects that submit a CCST scholarship that falls
outside of the accepted dates will not be eligible for
acceptance at WTC. Please see your Texas high school
career center or school counselor for CCST scholarship
information.
Academic Requirements for Scholarships and
Awards
Each scholarship/award may have academic
requirements for a student to remain eligible for
continued payments. Recipients of each scholarship
will be notified in writing of any such requirements.
This will be administered by the College Education
Liaison staff.
Limit on Awards
Prospective students who are enrolling cannot be
granted more than 50% off tuition in total scholarship
and course exemption awards.
Scholarships from Other Institutions
Prospective students who are enrolling will have the
option to use institutional specific scholarship awards
granted to high school students, made out to other
colleges and universities, not to exceed the total amount
of $5,000.00 towards tuition. Scholarships and
awards are valid for one year after the date and are
not a cash award. They are applied towards tuition
fees only. Scholarships are non-transferable and
redeemable only at Western Tech.
ACADEMIC PROGRESS FOR FINANCIAL AID
ELIGIBILITY
All Western Tech students must maintain satisfactory progress toward completion of their academic program.
Students who fail to meet the academic progress standards of the College are subject to both academic penalties and
the potential loss of eligibility for federal aid. The standards below apply exclusively to eligibility for federal student
financial aid.
Revisions Effective January 1, 2013
Certain sections of this policy have been revised effective January 1, 2013. The revisions are in italics. The revised
sections apply only to students who begin their program at Western Tech after the effective date and/or who transfer
or re-enroll into a cohort of students who began their studies after the effective date. Sections of this policy which
do not contain any italics remain unchanged from the previous catalog and are identical for both new and continuing
students.
Definitions – Effective 2018
Degree Programs: are defined as programs which lead to an Associate Degree or Baccalaureate Degree.
Certificate Programs: are defined as certificate programs that do not have an affiliated Associate Degree or
Baccalaureate Degree program.
Degree Programs are measured in traditional Semester Credit Hours, while Certificate Programs are measured in
Clock-to-Credit Conversion Credit Hours.
Payment Periods
The measurement of Academic Progress for Financial Aid shall occur in increments which correspond to the
“payment periods” for Federal Title IV Financial Aid. Academic Progress shall be measured at the end of each
payment period. A “payment period” is defined as one-half (as measured in both weeks and clock hours (instructional
hours)) of the student’s scheduled academic year or the remaining scheduled period of instruction until program
completion (whichever is less). If the remaining period of instruction is less than one-half of the standard academic
year, (less than 450 clock hours) it shall be considered a single payment period.
Western Tech Catalog | 13
Payment Periods – Effective 2013
The measurement of Academic Progress for Financial Aid shall occur in increments which correspond to the
“payment periods” for Federal Title IV Financial Aid. Academic Progress shall be measured at the end of each
payment period. For Degree Programs, the payment period is the Semester. For Certificate programs, the payment
period is defined as one-half (as measured in both weeks and credit hours (instructional hours)) of the student’s
scheduled academic year or the remaining scheduled period of instruction until program completion (whichever is
less). If the remaining period of instruction is less than one-half of the standard academic year, (less than twelve
credit hours) it shall be considered a single payment period.
Additional “Maximum Timeframe” Standard
Eligibility is also limited to students completing their programs within one and one-half times the normal program
length. The maximum timeframe is reached when the student has attempted more than one and one-half times the
number of clock or credit hours required to graduate from his/her program. The maximum timeframe standard
evaluation for transfer students will consider all credits attempted at Western Tech, or accepted for transfer or
proficiency credit. Students who change programs may request that their maximum timeframe be re-calculated based
solely on those hours that are applicable to the current program of study. A determination of ineligibility based upon
the maximum timeframe standard may be reversed based upon a mitigating circumstance. Please refer to the
“Regaining Academic Eligibility” section (below).
GPA and Grading Policy
All issues of grading policy, Grade Point Average (GPA) calculation, attendance, etc. are calculated in accordance
with the regular academic policies of Western Tech.
Completed/Attempted Clock Hours
“Attempted Hours” means the number of scheduled clock hours (clock hours) in the program as listed in the Western
Tech calendar. “Completed Hours” means the number of “attempted” clock hours a student actually attended.
Completed/Attempted Credit Hours – Effective 2013:
For Degree Programs, “Attempted Hours” means any credit hours for which the student was charged or received
financial aid. “Completed Hours” means the number of “attempted” credit hours for which a student received a
passing grade. For Certificate programs, “Attempted Hours” means the number of scheduled credit hours in the
program as listed in the academic calendar to the measurement point. “Completed Hours” means the number of
“attempted” credit hours a student actually attended.
Transfer Students
Accepted transfer credit shall be considered as completed coursework for purposes of this policy. However, since
no grades are assigned to transfer courses, they will not impact the student’s GPA. Academic years and payment
periods for transfer students shall be defined individually based upon the remaining period of instruction.
Return after an Absence
A student who returns after a leave of absence, withdrawal, dismissal, or other extended absence of 120 calendar
days or less, shall not have the period of absence considered in the calculation of academic progress. In all other
aspects, the student’s progress will be evaluated in the same manner as if the absence had not occurred, with the
exception of any necessary changes to the start and end dates of planned payment periods. A student, who returns
after a withdrawal, dismissal, or other absence of more than 120 days, shall be measured in a manner consistent with
a transfer student (see above). Students who do not return on their scheduled return date from their LOA, will be
dropped.
In the rare occasion where a student is required to extend his/her LOA beyond 120 days, authorization has to be
granted by the Financial Aid Director, Program Director and Campus Director. For students enrolled in a certificate
program, a student who returns after a leave of absence, withdrawal, dismissal, or other extended absence of 180
calendar days or less, shall not have the period of absence considered in the calculation of academic progress. In all
other aspects, the student’s progress will be evaluated in the same manner as if the absence had not occurred, with
the exception of any necessary changes to the start and end dates of planned payment periods. A certificate program
student, who returns after a withdrawal or dismissal, shall be measured in a manner consistent with a transfer student
(see above). Students who do not return on their scheduled return date from their LOA, will be dropped.
Academic Progress Standards for Financial Aid Minimum Cumulative
Grade Point Average
Cumulative Hours
Completed/ Attempted
End of 1st payment period 1.50 67 percent
End of 2nd payment period 1.75 67 percent
End of 3rd or subsequent payment period 2.00 67 percent
Western Tech Catalog | 14
Financial Aid Warning Status
Students who fail to meet the standards defined above will be placed on Financial Aid Warning Status for their
subsequent payment period. Students in Warning Status remain eligible for federal student aid.
If a student has not returned to “good” academic standing (according to the chart) by the end of the Financial Aid
Warning Status payment period, the student will lose eligibility for federal student aid from that point forward. Such
dismissal/loss of eligibility may be subject to appeal (see below).
Data Corrections
If a student’s academic record is corrected subsequent to the evaluation date, a student may submit a written request
to the Student Financial Services Director for re-evaluation of the student’s financial aid eligibility.
Regaining Academic Eligibility for Financial Aid
1. Mitigating Circumstances Appeal: A determination of loss of eligibility for federal financial aid may be appealed
based on mitigating circumstance(s). A mitigating circumstance is defined as an exceptional or unusual event(s)
beyond the student’s direct control, which contributed to or caused the academic difficulty. Examples include: the
death of a relative, an injury or illness of the student, or other special circumstances. Appeal letters should be
addressed to the Financial Services Director and must include a complete description of the circumstances that led
to the academic difficulty, how those circumstances have changed, and a plan for future academic success. Copies
of supporting documentation should be included. All appeals are reviewed by a committee of academic and
administrative staff whose determination is final. A mitigating circumstance appeal may also be used to override the
Maximum Timeframe Standard.
A student for whom a mitigating circumstance appeal is approved will be placed in Financial Aid Probation Status
for one payment period. If the student has not returned to good academic standing (according to the chart) by the end
of a probationary payment period, the student will lose eligibility for future financial aid.
2. Regaining Eligibility Other Than Through Appeal: Students who have lost federal financial aid eligibility may
potentially regain academic eligibility by one or more of the following methods: 1) be accepted into a different
academic program at Western Tech, if the re-evaluated student’s record (based upon the courses applicable to the
new program) will be in compliance with all academic standards; and/or make up the academic deficiencies at
Western Tech without benefit of federal financial aid. In each of these circumstances, approval is at the discretion
of the Campus Director.
Return to Good Standing
Once a student has returned to good academic standing, any previous academic difficulty, warning, or probation shall
have no future bearing on the student’s status. Hence, such students will have benefit of all provisions of this policy,
including a warning payment period.
RETURN OF TITLE IV FUNDS
Return to Title IV/ Refund Repayments Policy
This policy applies to recipients of Federal Title IV Financial Aid funds who cease enrollment for any reason
prior to graduation. Students that are no longer attending may owe funds to the College to cover unpaid tuition, fees,
and other charges. Also, the College will attempt to collect from the student any funds that the College was required
to return to the financial aid programs under this policy.
The College will calculate how much federal aid may be retained or disbursed for a student who withdraws prior
to the end of a payment period. The calculation is referred to as “Return of Title IV Funds” (R2T4). The calculation
of Title IV funds earned by the student has no relationship to the student’s tuition and fees that may be owed to the
College. All students subject to this policy will have their eligibility calculated according to the following definitions
and procedures, as prescribed by regulation.
Withdrawal Before 60%:
The College must perform a R2T4 to determine the amount of earned aid up through the 60% point in each
payment period and use the Department of Education’s proration formula to determine the amount of financial aid
funds the student has earned at the time of withdrawal.
Withdrawal After 60%:
After the 60% point in the payment period or period of enrollment, a student has earned 100% of the Title IV
funds he or she was scheduled to receive during the period. For a student who withdraws after the 60% point-in-time,
there are no unearned funds. However, the College will still calculate the student’s eligibility for a post-withdrawal
disbursement.
Western Tech Catalog | 15
Calculating R2T4
Title IV funds are earned in a prorated manner up to the 60% point in the payment period. The proration is based
upon scheduled classroom/instructional hours (clock hours) for clock-hour programs, and calendar days for credit
hour programs. The College will determine the earned and unearned Title IV aid as of the student’s last date of
attendance (LDA) and the College’s academic calendar.
In accordance with federal regulations, when Title IV financial aid is involved, the calculated amount of the R2T4
funds is allocated in the following order: Unsubsidized Direct Loans, Subsidized Direct Loans, Direct PLUS loans
followed by Federal Pell Grants and Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants (FSEOG). The
calculation steps are outlined as follows:
1. Calculate the percentage of Title IV aid earned by the student. Days or clock hours scheduled through LDA
/ days or clock hours in the payment period. ) = 15.3% (% of completed calendar days within the payment
period) 118 (scheduled days).
2. Calculate the dollar amount of Title IV aid earned by the student. Percentage as calculated in step one
above X Amount of aid which was disbursed to the student or could have been disbursed to the student.
3. If the earned amount is greater than the total Title IV aid disbursed for the payment period, a Post-
Withdrawal Disbursement will be calculated; if the amount is less than the amount of Title IV aid disbursed,
the difference will be returned to the federal student aid programs.
The College will notify the student in writing of the amount and type of any financial aid funds that must be returned.
Return to Title IV Funds Timeframe
Western Technical College adheres to the maximum timeframes prescribed regulation to return unearned funds.
The date of the determination of the student’ withdrawal remains 14 days from the student’s last day of attendance;
with exception of students determined to be on an approved leave of absence. The institution will return any unearned
funds with 45 days after the date the institution determined that the students withdrew.
Post-Withdrawal Disbursement
If a student earned more aid than was disbursed to him/her, the student may be eligible for a post-withdrawal
disbursement. The College will notify the student in writing if he/she is eligible for a post-withdrawal disbursement
of Title IV loan funds. A student or parent borrower must first confirm in writing whether he/she accepts/declines
all or some of any loan funds offered as a post-withdrawal disbursement. A post-withdrawal disbursement of Federal
Pell Grant funds does not require student acceptance or approval. The College will seek the student’s authorization
to use a post-withdrawal disbursement for all other educationally-related charges in addition to tuition and fees.
Overpayments
Any amount of unearned grant funds that a student must return directly is called an overpayment. The maximum
amount of a grant overpayment that you must repay is half of the Pell Grant funds you received or were scheduled
to receive. Students in this circumstance must make arrangements with the College and/or the U.S. Department of
Education to return the unearned grant funds. Failure to do so will result in ineligibility for future federal financial
aid.
Western Tech Catalog | 16
ACTIVE MILITARY AND VETERANS
Veteran Affairs
Western Tech is designated by GI Jobs magazine and Best for Vets, as a Military Friendly School for seven (7)
consecutive years. Western Tech will help you complete required forms and submit documentation for
veterans’ educational benefits under chapters 1606, 1607, 30, 31, 33, 35, MyCAA, and Tuition Assistance.
Western Tech provides ongoing services to veterans and their dependents in every step of the college experience
and is responsible for creating and maintaining records used to certify a student’s status for the VA.
Flexibility of programs and procedures particularly in admissions, advising, credit transfer, course articulations,
recognition of nontraditional learning experiences, scheduling, course format and residency requirements are
provided to enhance access of service members, veterans, and their family members to Western Tech’s education
programs.
For immediate information call:
• Main Campus- (915) 532-3737 or 1-800-225-5984
• Branch Campus- (915) 566-9621 or 1-800-225-5984
• Military Liaison- (915) 780-3660
Active duty and reserve service members, honorably discharged veterans or National Guard members, and their
dependents qualify for 10% reduction to current tuition after any other discounts (Effective May 1st, 2017).
Supporting documentation to be considered for the award is as follows:
1. Veteran -A copy of the prospective student DD214 along with a picture ID.
2. Military Dependent Spouse – A copy of military spouse DD214 and/or proof of active duty (active
orders), picture ID, and marriage certificate.
3. Military Dependent Child – Marriage certificate of parents, child birth certificate identifying either
parent, picture ID (parent, child) along with DD214 and/or proof of active duty, reserve and/or
National Guard.
The 10% reduction ONLY applies to tuition.
*Evaluation of military training record must apply to the student’s declared degree or certificate program for
consideration of course exemption. For more detailed information, please refer to the second bullet point
under Veteran Affairs below.
All new and returning students who intend to receive VA Educational Benefits while enrolled at Western Tech
need to be aware of the following:
• Be sure you are certified. Registration for Western Tech classes does not automatically certify you for VA
benefits. To be certified, you will need to come by the Veterans Affairs Office and complete the required
forms.
• Students are required to submit copies of each transcript from all institutions previously or currently
attending, to the Veterans Affairs Office. Students are responsible for requesting transcripts and making
sure they are received at the correct office. Transcripts are required by the VA even if you have never
received benefits before since VA regulations stipulate that all prior training must be evaluated by the
campus director and program director to receive educational benefits. Any consideration for course
exemption based on previous training and/or education, will need to be processed before the student begins
school. This includes military Joint Services Transcripts (JST) from any military branch.
• It is your responsibility to promptly report and submit supporting documentation of any changes in your
Degree Plan or Preliminary Program of Study, degree objective, course(s) substitution(s), enrollment (part
of terms), or address to the Veterans Affairs Office
• If you receive a non-punitive grade, our office will notify the VA. VA educational benefits will not be paid
if you withdraw from a course or for a course that will not be used in computing requirements for
graduation. The VA may reduce or terminate your benefits if you can't show mitigating circumstances.
“Mitigating circumstances” – unanticipated or unavoidable events which interfere with a student’s pursuit of a
course. A student may submit evidence to substantiate mitigating circumstances; however, the VA will determine
eligibility for resumption of benefit payments.
“Non-punitive grades”:
o A “W” grade for withdrawing from a course.
o An “I” grade for an incomplete course, which is not made up during the time period required
by the school.
You must maintain satisfactory attendance and progress toward completion of your educational objective. If you
do not meet the school standards, our office will notify the Veterans Administration Office. Upon receipt of the
notice, VA will terminate your benefits.
Western Tech Catalog | 17
Be aware that VA regulations are subject to change without notice. For current information, check with the
Western Tech Veterans Affairs Office or you may contact the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA), Muskogee, OK
at 1-888-442-4551.
Veterans Information Sources:
Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) www.va.gov or www.gibill.va.gov
Department of Veterans Affairs
Muskogee Regional Processing Office (Education)
PO Box 8888
Muskogee, OK 74402-8888
Educational Benefits Inquiries: 1-888-442-4551 (1-888-GIBILL-1)
Website: www.vba.va.gov/Muskogee.htm
E-mail: muskrpo@vba.va.gov
MILITARY TRANSCRIPT REQUEST VA regulations stipulate that for any student that has previously qualified for VA educational benefits, transcripts
from all previously attended institutions must be requested and submitted by the student to the VA office for
evaluation prior to being certified for any additional VA benefits.
Veteran Leave of Absence Policy
All LOAs requested by Veterans must be approved by the Program Director, a financial aid officer, and the VA
Certifying Official at both campuses. All Chapter 31 students are required to receive authorization for a Leave of
Absence from their designated Vocation Rehabilitation Counselor before they are granted an LOA. Any student
requesting a Leave of Absence (LOA) will be notified that their veteran benefits may be suspended until they have
returned which at that time; the veteran will be reinstated and recertified. Veterans are encouraged NOT to take an
LOA in the middle of the course but rather at the end of the course. If a veteran requests an LOA in the middle of
the course, the veteran will be responsible to pay back the money received for that course if the grade results in an
incomplete. Furthermore, upon recertification, it can take up to two (2) months for the Veterans Affairs office to get
the student back into the system resulting in a delay of the first payment.
Military Obligations, Attendance, and Make-up Work
Many students choose to serve while pursuing their education. Standing by its reputation as a military friendly
school, it is the policy of Western Tech to accommodate a student’s continuing service.
For members of the National Guard and Reserves, there may be times when students might miss a class or two
due to a weekday drill or similar military training. If orders are not issued, the student must contact the registrar and
bring a signed letter (usually from the unit CO) that specifically outlines the date(s) on which the student was in a
military status. The registrar, upon verifying the letter, will send a clearance notification via email directly to the
student. The student will then submit the letter to the instructor, either in person or through email.
It cannot be emphasized enough that students are responsible to keep their course instructor(s), program
director, registrar, and VA certifying official informed of all military absences in order to agree upon and
document make-up work or a leave of absence.
AIR FORCE:
Community College of the Air Force
ARMY, COAST GUARD,
MARINE CORPS, AND NAVY:
Joint Services Transcript (JST)
CCAF/DFRS
100SouthTurner Blvd
Gunter Annex AL 36114-3011
http://www.au.af.mil/au/ccaf/
NETPDTC
ATTN: JST Operations Center N615
6490 Saufley Field Road
Pensacola, FL 32509
Email: jst@doded.mil
https://jst.doded.mil/
Western Tech Catalog | 18
ADVANCED WELDING TECHNOLOGY Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN ADVANCED WELDING TECHNOLOGY Employment of welders, cutters, solderers, and brazers is projected to grow 4 percent from 2014 to 2024.
Employment growth reflects the need for welders in manufacturing because of the importance and versatility of
welding as a manufacturing process. Employment growth reflects the need for welders in manufacturing because of
the importance and versatility of welding as a manufacturing process. Welders work in a wide variety of industries,
from car racing to manufacturing. The work that welders do and the equipment they use vary with the industry. There
are more than 100 different processes that a welder can use. The type of weld normally is determined by the types of
metals being joined and the conditions under which the welding is to take place. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational
Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 47,830 National Employment 2012: 357,400
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 57,610 Projected National Employment 2022: 378,200
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 9,780 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 20,800
Percent Change 2012-2022: 20.40% Percent Change 2012-2022: 5.80%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $19.66 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $19.25
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
1,175 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
980 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Welding program has established technical standards and essential functions for the program as
more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and essential functions, with or without reasonable
accommodation, is required in order to complete the program satisfactorily. Please review the following technical
standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
Western Tech Catalog | 19
4. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
5. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
6. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of
one or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
7. Sufficient manual dexterity and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together with your
armor your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
8. The ability to coordinate two or more limbs while sitting, standing, or lying down.
9. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs.
10. The ability to work in confined spaces for extended periods of time without a break.
11. The ability to tolerate standing for extended periods of time without a break.
12. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic
protected by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can
carry out classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet
all of the requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without
reasonable accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and
students who require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for
accommodation.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION IN
ADVANCED WELDING TECHNOLOGY
COURSES 1-14
1370 CLOCK HOURS
49.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
49.5 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The objective of the Advanced Welding Technology
program is to train the student as a qualified welder.
The qualified welder is capable of interpreting welding
blueprints, cutting and welding with oxyacetylene, and
plate welding with Shielded Metal Arc Welding
(SMAW), Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW), Gas
Metal Arc Welding (GMAW), Innershield (IS), and
Flux Core Arc Welding (FCAW). In addition, students
will learn skills for pipe lay-out & fit-up, flange
applications, rolling offset & pipe blueprint reading.
Those who complete the program successfully will
be prepared to work at an entry-level position as
structural or pipe welders in various welding
environments such as construction companies,
shipyards, factories, fabrication companies, welding
shops and other enterprises.
CERTIFICATIONS
(6) STRUCTURAL CERTS.- 2G,3G,4G
(POSITIONS) SMAW (STICK) 3/8” PLATE ‘OPEN
V GROOVE’
(2) PIPE CERTS. - 6G (45*POSITION) SMAW
(STICK) - 4” SCH. 40 PIPE & 6G
(45*POSITION)
COMBINATION: SMAW (STICK) / GTAW (TIG)-
4” SCH. 40 PIPE
NOTE: The Advanced Welding program requires that
all “Structural” certification tests be passed as a
prerequisite for the “Pipe” welding portion of the
program. WTC Welding certifications will only be
awarded upon completion of the program in its entirety.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may differ from that
included in the program outline below.
Western Tech Catalog | 20
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ADVANCED WELDING TECHNOLOGY
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
TWC/THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU 101 Foundations 50 20/30 2.0 2.0
2 OR 101 Orientation 60 12/48 2.0 2.0
3 BP 102 Blueprint Reading Fundamentals 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
4 BP 103 Blueprint Structural Shapes &
Symbols 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
5 BP 104 Blueprint General Abbreviations 40 8/32 1.5 1.5
6 BP 105 Blueprint Pipe Welding Symbols 80 16/64 3.0 3.0
7 ME 106 Metallurgy & Fundamentals of
GTAW, GMAW & FCAW/IS 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
8 PI 107 Pipe Layout & Fit-up 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
9 CW 108 Code Welding 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
10 PW 201 Pipe Orientation and Safety 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
11 PW 202 Pipe Fitting Layout Formulas 80 16/64 3.0 3.0
12 PW 203 Metallurgy Fundamentals, GTAW,
GMAW & FCAW Pipe Procedures 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
13 PW 204 Code Pipe Welding 120 24/96 4.5 4.5
14 IN 108 Internship 100 0/0/100 2.0 2.0
Total Hours – Certificate of Completion in Advanced
Welding Technology 1370
264/1006/
100 49.5 49.5
** As a safety precaution, Advanced Welding students
will be required to furnish and wear leather boots as a
part of their WTC uniform.
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an
introduction to their field of study with particular
emphasis on providing an overview of important post-
secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-
management, academic integrity, effective use of
Western Technical College’s resources, and
comprehensive understanding of critical thinking skills.
Students will learn how to research industries, gain
better understand of employer expectations and begin
working on a chronological resume. Students will
complete the course with a better understanding of their
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion
of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to:
1. Navigate the library, and conduct basic
research functions.
2. Complete an effective resume.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry
requirements for his/her chosen field of
study.
4. Conduct a self-directed job search.
5. Apply critical thinking skills throughout
the program.
6. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
OR 101
ORIENTATION
12/48/2.0/2.0 In this course students are introduced to Welding
history, Shop Safety, Shop Math and Measuring,
Oxy/Acetylene Welding/Cutting, and GMAW (MIG)
Welding. This course is also designed to assist students
in developing positive safety and work habits for their
entry into the Workforce.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Comprehend and apply shop math skills
2. Measure in 1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 scales
3. Work safely in a Welding shop
environment
4. Cut/Weld using the Oxy-Acetylene
process
5. Perform basic welding using the GMAW
process
COURSE 3
BP 102
BLUEPRINT READING
FUNDAMENTALS
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course students will become familiar with the
basic fundamentals of blueprint reading, understand the
Western Tech Catalog | 21
use of different engineering drawings and drawing
terms, and identify the parts of a drawing. Each student
will fabricate and weld an object from a Blueprint and
begin using the SMAW welding process.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Identify all lines used on a blueprint
2. Fabricate from a basic drawing
3. Properly fit - up and tack T joints
4. Weld basic T joints with using SMAW
process
COURSE 4
BP 103
BLUEPRINT-STRUCTURAL SHAPES
AND SYMBOLS
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the student will have the opportunity
to learn, identify, and apply the various shapes and
welding symbols used in structural blueprints. Students
will also learn how to fuse metal in different positions
with SMAW and use a Track Torch to bevel plates.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Recognize various welding symbols
2. Interpret welding symbol meanings
3. Operate an Oxy – Acetylene track torch
proficiently
4. Weld in the 1F, 2F and 3F welding
positions using the SMAW process
COURSE 5
BP 104
BLUEPRINT GENERAL
ABBREVIATIONS
8/32/1.5/1.5 In this course student will use and implement the
knowledge gained in BP103 with even more in depth
blueprint training. General Welding abbreviations will
be covered with SMAW Structural welding in 2G & 3G
positions.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Identify welding abbreviation meanings
2. Comprehend mid-level blueprints
3. Properly prep and bevel material for V
groove welding
4. Weld in the 2G position using the SMAW
process
COURSE 6
BP 105
BLUEPRINT PIPE WELDING SYMBOLS
16/64/3.0/3.0 In This course the student will learn additional Pipe
welding symbols providing the knowledge necessary to
fabricate and execute welds from Blueprints and Shop
Drawings. Continued Structural SMAW welding in the
2G, 3G, and 4G positions is the Lab focus. The student
will be required to fabricate from Shop Drawings as a
part of their grade.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Comprehend pipe welding symbols
2. Fabricate from basic shop drawings and
blueprints
3. Accurately execute welds using a
blueprint
4. Weld in the 3G position using the SMAW
process
COURSE 7
ME 106
METALLURGY & FUNDAMENTALS OF
GTAW, GMAW & FCAW/IS
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the students will learn the basics of
Metallurgy, i.e. the physical properties of metals,
crystalline metal structure and learn the effects of
annealing, normalizing and stress relieving. Also, the
fundamentals of Gas Metal Arc welding (GMAW), Gas
Tungsten Arc welding (GTAW) and Flux Cored/ Inner
shield arc welding (FCAW/IS) will be introduced.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Comprehend basic Metallurgy concepts
2. Execute midlevel welds using the GMAW
process
3. Execute basic welds using the GTAW
process
4. Execute basic welds using the FCAW/IS
processes
COURSE 8
PI 107
PIPE LAYOUT & FIT-UP
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the student will learn basic Pipe layout
and fit up, fabricate and weld 2” & 4” pipe and be able
to navigate and use the prescribed formulas in the “Pipe
Fitters and Pipe Welder’s Handbook”. The student will
also continue welding with the SMAW process in
preparation for the AWS Structural certification tests.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Perform basic pipe fit-up techniques
2. Use pipe fitting formulas
3. Execute welds on 2” pipe using the
SMAW process
4. Execute welds on 4” pipe using the
SMAW process
COURSE 9
CW 108
CODE WELDING
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the student will learn the use of Code
Welding, understand the principles of weld testing and
take the prescribed Structural AWS certification tests
using the SMAW welding process. Also, a Midcourse
review of all previous phases will be administered.
Western Tech Catalog | 22
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Comprehend the principles of Code
Welding
2. Understand AWS Certification testing
techniques
3. Fit-up, tack and weld structural test plates
4. Pass AWS structural welding tests using
the SMAW process
COURSE 10
PW 201
PIPE ORIENTATION & SAFETY
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the student will learn the
requirements of Field Welding operations and the safety
procedures for Excavation/Trench, Fall Protection and
Confined Space safety. This phase will introduce the
techniques required for “American Welding Society”
(AWS) Certification pipe welding and SMAW welding
will be introduced on pipe.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Follow OSHA Trench, Fall Protection,
and Confined Space Entry procedures
2. Accurately prep and fit-up 4” pipe
3. Tack weld 4” pipe
4. Weld 4” pipe in the 1G position using the
SMAW process
COURSE 11
PW 202
PIPE FITTING LAYOUT FORMULAS
16/64/3.0/3.0 In this course the student will learn the application
of formulas, layout procedures, trade math, and
continue with more advanced pipe fit-up techniques.
The 6G pipe position using SMAW will be introduced
for Certification practice.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Demonstrate advanced pipe layout
formulas
2. Execute advanced pipe fit-up procedures
3. Weld 4” pipe in the 2G position using the
SMAW process
4. Pass a 1G position pipe certification test
using the SMAW process
COURSE 12
PW 203
METALLURGY FUNDAMENTALS,
GTAW, GMAW & FCAW PIPE
PROCEDURES
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the student will learn Metallurgy of
Exotic metals, how to apply Interpass heat and use
advanced fit-up techniques including flange
applications. The phase will also cover advanced
GTAW pipe welding and the GMAW / FCAW pipe
processes will be introduced.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Understand the crystalline structure of
metal
2. Comprehend the importance of Interpass
welding temperatures
3. Select proper filler material for exotic
metals
4. Fit-up and weld pipe flanges accurately
5. Weld pipe using the GTAW, GMAW &
FCAW processes
COURSE 13
PW 204
CODE PIPE WELDING
24/96/4.5/4.5 In this course the student will be introduced to Pipe
Code welding procedures and begin the AWS pipe
certification process with SMAW and SMAW/GTAW
(6G) on 4” schedule 40 pipe. This phase will also have
a review of all previous phases and a comprehensive
Final Exam will be administered.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Pass a comprehensive course Final Exam
2. Understand “PI 1104 Code” pipe
certification procedures
3. Pass a 6G position pipe certification test
using the SMAW process
4. Pass a 6G position pipe certification test
using the SMAW/GTAW processes
COURSE 14
IN 108
INTERNSHIP
0/0/100/2.0/2.0 In this course students will experience the daily
routines of a Welding/Fabrication shop or ‘On site’
work situations. The student will have the opportunity
to apply the skills and knowledge acquired in the
Advanced Welding program and gain real world work
experience in the Welding Industry.
Upon completion of these courses, students will be
able to:
1. Perform welding and related tasks in a
professional manner
2. Demonstrate communication skills and
teamwork in the work place
3. Maintain accurate work records and time
sheets
4. Follow directions, policies and employee
guidelines as mandated
Western Tech Catalog | 23
COMMERCIAL DRIVER TRAINING Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN PROFESSIONAL COMMERCIAL DRIVER TRAINING Employment of heavy and tractor-trailer truck drivers is projected to grow 5 percent from 2014 to 2024, about as
fast as the average of all occupations. The economy depends on truck drivers to transport freight and keep supply
chains moving. As the demand for goods increases, more truck drivers will be needed. Trucks transport most of the
freight in the United States, so, as households and businesses increase their spending, the trucking industry will grow.
The number of heavy trucks on the road has not reached prerecession levels, despite the increasing demand for freight
transportation. To meet the demand, companies are starting to invest in new trucks that are more fuel efficient and
easier to drive. For example, some new heavy trucks are equipped with automatic transmissions, blind-spot
monitoring, and variable cruise control. Demand for truck drivers is expected to remain strong in the oil and gas
industries as more drivers are needed to transport materials to and from extraction sites. (Source D.O.L. Occupational
Outlook Handbook. 2016-2017 Edition)
The median annual wage for heavy and tractor-trailer truck drivers was $41,340 in May 2016. The median wage
is the wage at which half the workers in an occupation earned more than that amount, and half earned less. The
lowest 10 percent earned less than $26,920, and the highest 10 percent earned more than $63,140. In May 2016, the
median annual wages for heavy and tractor-trailer truck drivers in the top industries in which they worked were as
follows:
General Freight Trucking: $43,520
Specialized Freight Trucking: $41,650
Wholesale Trade: $40,330
Drivers of heavy trucks and tractor-trailers usually are paid by how many miles they have driven, plus bonuses.
The per-mile rate varies from employer to employer and may depend on the type of cargo and the experience of the
driver. Some long-distance drivers, especially owner–operators, are paid a share of the revenue from shipping.
Labor Market Information (2014 thru 2024 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2014: 187,610 National Employment 2014: 1,797,700
Projected Texas Employment 2024: 226,580 Projected National Employment 2024: 131,600
Absolute Change 2014-2024: 38,970 Absolute Change 2012-2024: 12,300
Percent Change 2014-2024: 20.8% Percent Change 2012-2022: 5%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $20.59 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $20.32
Average Openings per year due to Growth: 7085 Average Openings per year for Replacement: N/A
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE COMMERCIAL
DRIVER TRAINING PROGRAM The Texas Department of Motor Vehicles has published requirements for Applicants interested in obtaining
a Commercial Driver’s License (CDL):
1. Applicants for Intra-State Licensing must be a minimum of 18 years of age
2. Applicants must be a minimum of 21 years of age for Interstate Licensing. (Note: New Mexico
Residents must be 21 years of age in order to obtain a CDL license from New Mexico)
3. Applicants must be a Texas resident for at least 6 months and have vehicle registration
Western Tech Catalog | 24
4. Applicants must possess a valid driver’s license from the USA for at least six (6) months prior to their
admissions. Students enrolling from a foreign country, in addition, must have obtained a valid USA
driver’s license prior to admission of the program. The applicant cannot possess more than one (1)
license, cannot have their driving privilege suspended in any state, nor any unpaid traffic tickets in any
state. Applicants testing in Texas from out of state, must surrender their auto driver’s license
and accept a Texas CDL
5. Applicants must possess a clear driving record with the following
a. No DWI or DUI in the past three (3) years)
b. No careless or reckless driving in the past three (3) years
c. No more than three (3) moving violations in the last two (2) years
d. No drug or alcohol related misdemeanors during the previous three (3) years
e. No felony convictions in the last five (5) years
f. No drug or alcohol related felonies within the past ten (10) years
g. No felony parole or probation within the past two (2) years
h. No felony charges pending. Students may reapply after their case has been adjudicated
6. Applicants must undergo a background check. Serious felony charges will prevent the DMV from
issuing a CDL. Please check with your admissions representative for the list of those items before
choosing to take this program
7. Applicants must meet the requirements of the Motor Carrier Federal Safety Regulations, Part
391.11(b)(2) which states, drivers “…can read and speak the English language sufficiently to converse
with the general public, to understand traffic signs and signals in English
8. Applicants must possess and present a social security identification card
9. Applicants must produce vehicle insurance and registration on his/her vehicle(s) that are all registered
in his/her name
10. Applicants must undergo and pass a Department of Transportation (DOT) physical
11. DOT Drug Test (must return clean). A “positive” drug test will, if deemed valid after review by a
designated medical officer, will result in the student being ineligible for training
12. Applicants must pass a vision exam
13. Applicants must be fingerprinted and have a photo taken
14. Applicants must release permission to the school to obtain a verifiable Motor Vehicle Report (MVR).
For Non-Residents, or in cases where the school cannot accept MVR’s, the applicant must obtain one
(1) pre-hire prior to enrollment
15. Applicants must meet the requirements for licensure as a Commercial Driver established by the Texas
Department of Transportation Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations (FMCSR) and TX DOT
NOTE: Individuals that have gone through the training for the CDL, but were unable to obtain a CDL for
failure to not produce or pass any of the items listed above, will still be charged for the program in its entirety,
or if they fail their driver’s test. Graduates from this program may transfer their credential towards the Diesel
Mechanics AOS Degree program for full credit
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Diesel Professional Commercial Driver Training program has established technical standards and
essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and essential
functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program satisfactorily.
Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and
sentences in English.
5. The ability to detect or tell the differences between sounds that vary in pitch and loudness.
6. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
7. The ability to sit for long periods of time.
8. The ability to drive at night.
9. The ability to drive long distances and stay alert at all times.
10. The ability to climb steps.
11. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
12. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
13. The ability to quickly and repeatedly adjust the controls of a vehicle to exact positions.
14. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs.
Western Tech Catalog | 25
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION IN COMMERCIAL DRIVER TRAINING
COURSES 1-3
200 CLOCK HOURS
8.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC & THECB)
200 CLOCK HOURS (ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The Professional Commercial Driver Training offered at Western Technical College is a 200 hour program,
conducted in five weeks. The program is designed to prepare individuals with the knowledge base, procedures, and
basic skills and abilities so that they will meet the Commercial Driver’s License Standards and industry job
qualifications as a trainee driver.
Upon completion of the training program, graduates will be qualified to obtain their CDL, and as entry-level
commercial driver trainees with both short and long-haul trucking companies.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class or lab
per course and the subsequent number of credit hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /44
Lab hours per course /48
Semester Credit Hours/TWC/THECB/4.0
Semester Credit Hours/ACCSC/4.0
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may NOT differ from that included in the program outline below.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENT Students graduating from this program must obtain their Commercial Driver’s License in order to successfully
complete the program.
Western Tech Catalog | 26
PROGRAM OUTLINE: COMMERCIAL DRIVER TRAINING
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
TWC/THECB
SCU
*ACCSC
SCH
1 PCDT 101 Practical Application to Truck
Driving 80 75/5 5.0 N/A
2 PCDT 102 Basic Vehicle Operations/Range
Training 40 13/27 1.0 N/A
3 PCDT 103 Advanced Vehicle
Operations/Road Training 80 5/75 2.5 N/A
Total Hours – Certificate of Completion in
Commercial Driver Training 200 93/107 8.5 N/A
*Program is measured in clock hours for ACCSC.
COURSE 1
PCDT 101
PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS TO TRUCK DRIVING
75/5/5.0/N/A This course introduces students to the rules, regulations and procedures that govern and regulate the trucking
industry. During the first week of training, students will study and prepare for the required knowledge tests, which
will be taken at the Department of Transportation. Students will receive their driving permit once all endorsement
tests have been successfully completed. During the Second week training, students will demonstrate the correct use
and inspection of each vehicle control, instrument and component. Students will describe and/or demonstrate the
methods and procedures for correct cargo handling and documentation, accident reporting, logbook entries, and trip
planning. They will also learn about the culture of the trucking industry in order to prepare themselves and their
families for life on the road. The student can expect 20 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Inspect a vehicle, complete industry forms
2. Prepare for a trip
3. Become certified under the National Safety Council Professional Truck Driver Defensive Driving
Course
COURSE 2
PCDT 102
BASIC VEHICLE OPERATIONS RANGE TRAINING
13/27/1.0/N/A
Range training provides a secure environment for students to learn and become proficient in the basic maneuvers
and skills needed to safely and effectively control a tractor-trailer. Range instruction will include hands-on training
in vehicle inspection procedures, which will prepare the student for the CDL Pre-trip Inspection Skills Test. They
will practice maneuvering skills and vehicle controls necessary to pass the CDL Basic Control Skills Test and be
successful trainee drivers. (Range 13 hours/Observation 27 hrs.) Prerequisite is PCDT 101:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Students will demonstrate the correct procedures for coupling and uncoupling
2. Backing and hooking up a tractor-trailer unit in order to safely dock
3. Pickup and deliver freight as a working driver
COURSE 3
PCDT 103
ADVANCED VEHICLE OPERATIONS ROAD TRAINING
5/75/2.5/N/A During this course of the program, students will be given the opportunity to operate a tractor-trailer in the real-
world street and highway environment amongst regular traffic. Road instruction will allow students to develop the
skills necessary to prepare for the CDL Road Test conducted by a state examiner, and to safely operate a tractor-
trailer on public roadways.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Drive on public roads
2. Develop the skills necessary to operate to safely operate the tractor trailer
3. Develop skills needed to challenge and pass the CDL road test
Western Tech Catalog | 27
MASSAGE THERAPY Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN MASSAGE THERAPY Massage therapists held about 168,800 jobs in 2014. About half of massage therapists were self-employed in
2014. As an increasing number of states adopt licensing requirements and standards for therapists, the practice of
massage is likely to be respected and accepted by more people as a way to treat pain and to improve overall wellness.
Employment of massage therapists is projected to grow 22 percent from 2014 to 2024, must faster than the average
for all occupations. Massage also offers specific benefits to particular groups of people whose continued demand for
massage services will lead to overall growth for the occupation. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook,
2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 8,890 National Employment 2012: 132,800
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 10,960 Projected National Employment 2022: 162,800
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 2,070 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 30,000
Percent Change 2012-2022: 23.30% Percent Change 2012-2022: 22.60%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $17.90 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $20.09
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
95 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
205 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Because many therapists work part time, yearly earnings can vary considerably, depending on the therapist’s
schedule. Generally, massage therapists earn some portion of their income as gratuities. For those that work in a
hospital or other clinical setting, however, tipping is not common.
Western Tech Catalog | 28
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE MASSAGE
THERAPY PROGRAM 1. All students starting the massage therapy program are highly recommended to attend the 1-day
orientation prior to starting the Massage Therapy program. Dates are provided by admissions
representatives.
2. Admission into the Massage Therapy program requires proof of negative current Tuberculosis test (less
than 1 year). Immunizations are not a requirement for admission into this program. All other general
requirements apply.
POLICIES & STANDARDS SPECIFIC TO THE MASSAGE THERAPY PROGRAM Student/Teacher Ratio
The pupil-teacher ratio; is not to exceed 24 students to 1 instructor. No more than 3 students can work from 1 station
for lab courses.
Leave of Absence (LOA)
Students requesting a leave of absence must do so in writing. LOAs’ must be approved by program director and/or
campus director. A leave of absence for reasonable purposes acceptable to the massage therapy educational program
shall not exceed the lesser of 30 school days or 60 calendar days. A student shall be granted only one leave of absence
for each 12-month period. If the LOA was in excess of 20% of a course(s) (not necessarily the progress report period),
the student may be required to retake the course(s) missed. There may be an additional cost to retake the course.
LOA’s or absences equaling less than 15% of a single course, require the student to make up each and every hour
(where applicable) in order to meet the prescribed minimum state requirements from the program’s regulatory body,
the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR). LOAs’, retaking courses or change of schedules may
affect the student’s graduation date. This may also require the student to change class schedules for the remainder of
the training until completion of the program if courses are available within a reasonable amount of time.
Absences and Make up Time
All absences, regardless of the reason, must be made up. Make up time is completed under the supervision of an
instructor during an already scheduled class and the subject must be related to the subject matter missed. A “Make
up Time Form” will be used to track and log make up any hours missed. Hands on courses require the student making
up time to provide massage by securing help from a fellow massage therapy student to serve as a model for learning
purposes.
Saturdays may be available for make-up time only during scheduled internships that are in progress and must be
approved by attending faculty. Saturday make up time must be approved by a supervising instructor.
*Student is responsible for scheduling and completing all make up hours. All standard make up time
policies to WTC apply. The following policies are specific to massage therapy.
The following grade make up policies are specific to massage therapy:
1. Tests, midterms and finals missed due to absence may be made up on the date a student returns to class
for a maximum grade of 70%.
2. Oral presentation assignment(s) missed due to an absence may be made up on the date a student returns
to class for a maximum score of 70. Instructor’s approval is required.
3. Quizzes, group activity participation/presentations or homework assessments missed will receive a
grade of “0” and cannot be made up.
4. Homework not turned in due to an absence or a tardy may be turned in for a maximum score of 50% on
the date of student’s return to class with instructor’s approval.
5. Students who miss a test, assigned oral presentations or homework assignments due to military duty,
jury duty or a death in the immediate family, will be allowed to make-up a test, oral presentation or turn
in a homework assignment for full credit. Documentation justifying absence is required to receive full
credit. All previous policies apply.
Conduct Policy
All massage therapy students are required to use professional conduct as described in the Western Tech Student
Handbook. Due to the nature of the Massage Therapy program, all massage therapy students must also adhere by the
following conduct standards which include, but are not limited to following:
• The student shall not make comments or jokes of a deviant and/or sexual nature. There is a zero-tolerance
policy. Students violating this policy will be dropped from the program without exception.
• Because Massage Therapy is a health care career, and students train using the human body, the student
shall refer to the human body in a professional manner using proper terminology. The student shall also
refrain from making comments of any kind in reference to the physical status and or appearance whether
complimentary or derogatory about any other student, faculty, staff member, any other employee of
Western Tech, internship clients or guests of the College.
• Students shall use confidentiality standards in accordance to professional health care environments
regarding other students and/or internship clients.
Western Tech Catalog | 29
• Students shall display professional demeanor, language, student to student/instructor interaction and
conduct that that fosters a safe, productive and ethical learning environment for themselves and all
students, employees and guests of Western Tech. other students enrolled in the program.
• Students shall not violate professional, ethical and safety standards of the massage therapy field
to include ethical standards as set by Western Tech and Texas Department of Licensing and
Regulation (TDLR).
Students who violate these program specific conduct policies are subject to disciplinary action which can result
in suspension up to termination.
Health and Hygiene
In addition to standard WTC Health and Hygiene policies, massage therapy students must maintain fingernails
trimmed at active length no longer than the finger tips. Acrylic nails, nail polish or clear coating of any kind are
NOT allowed in the program.
Students visiting WTC outside regularly scheduled class hours for tutoring, seminars, exam reviews, make-up
time, workshops, or other functions, are required to maintain professional attire/uniforms and clean personal
hygiene.
Internship
During new student orientation, as well as at least 2 weeks prior to internship, students are informed of internship
available schedules. All students must attend a mandatory internship orientation where they will provide appointment
availability. Appointment availability encompasses both scheduled appointments and availability for walk-in
appointments. Students’ schedules are created utilizing electronic scheduling software. Each student will be assigned
a personal account which will allow them to log in see availability, appointments as well as internship productivity.
Due to the nature of the internship portion of the program and for purposes of creating a “real world” training
setting, students who accumulate more than one late arrival or absence to a scheduled appointment or availability
start time will face disciplinary action resulting in a suspension, up to termination. This will be handled on a case by
case basis. Student availability schedules are prepared and implemented with reasonable notice to students. It is the
student’s responsibility to stay informed and compliant of scheduled internship dates, times, appointments, changes
and meet the agreed on scheduled availability requirements. All student internship schedule changes must be
approved by the internship coordinator, instructor and/or program director.
Internship 101 and Internship 102 are scheduled courses within the program. Clinical appointment times are
scheduled during these courses and are also available outside of regularly scheduled class times to include Saturdays
as directed by the internship coordinator, instructor or program director. This ensures that students have ample time
to complete their internship training requirements prior to graduation. It is the student’s responsibility to complete
their internship training using all options available. Internship must be completed prior to the completion of the
program and is a requirement for graduation. Student competency and internship grades will include a minimum of
2 instructor hands-on evaluations throughout internship as well as professionalism, performance and other grades as
assigned by instructors. If students do not complete internship during the scheduled internship courses, the student
will receive an “I” (Incomplete) as a grade until such time that the student completes all internship requirements
during available schedules. Attendance and completion of internship is measured in “hands-on hours completed”,
not merely “present on campus”.
Off Campus Events
Western Technical College does not invite or utilize unlicensed massage therapists to endorse or promote any
event sponsored or promoted by WTC.
Massage Therapy Program Graduation and Licensing Examination Requirements
1. The Massage Therapy Internship is a requirement for completion of the program for all students enrolled
in the program, unless exempt by the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) due to
previous completion at another approved school or institution. All transcripts are reviewed by the
campus director for monetary purposes only. Please see Transfer Credit Section.
2. After having completed no less than 500 hrs. of training, students are required to take the MBLEx
(Massage and Bodywork Licensing Examination) prior to graduation. If the student is not successful in
passing the examination, but has taken the exam prior to the last date of class of the program the student
has met this requirement. If a student was awarded credit by TDLR for previous education and has met
the state’s minimal educational requirements, the student is eligible to take the licensing examination.
3. Students must complete 4 mock exams as prescribed by the department with a minimum passing score
of 90% prior to being registered to take the MBLEx.
Transfer Credit
Individuals wishing to enroll in the Massage Therapy program who have prior training or education credits
applicable to the State’s educational requirements for licensure must submit official transcripts from previous-
approved massage therapy program(s), colleges or universities directly to the Texas Department of Licensing and
Regulation (TDLR). Notification of credit transfer eligibility will be sent directly to the person applying by the Texas
Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR). Individuals must then present credit eligibility results to Western
Tech prior to enrollment for evaluation. It is the applicant’s responsibility to submit an application of previous
Western Tech Catalog | 30
education to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) Massage Therapy Licensing Program prior
to enrolling at Western Tech.
CONTACT INFORMATION FOR THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND
REGULATION (TDLR) For more information about Massage Therapy, email TDLR at CS.MassageTherapy@tdlr.texas.gov or contact us at:
Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation
Massage Therapy
PO Box 12057
Austin, TX 78711
Telephone: (512) 463-6599
Toll-Free (in Texas): (800) 803-9202
Fax: (512) 463-9468
Relay Texas-TDD: (800) 735-2989
Website: https://www.license.state.tx.us/mas/mas.htm
TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATION (TDLR) GRIEVANCE
POLICY 117.110. Complaints
(New Section adopted effective November 1, 2017, 42 TexReg 4991)
• (a) Any person may file a complaint with the department alleging that a massage therapist, massage
school, massage therapy instructor, massage establishment, continuing education provider, or another
person or business has violated the Act or this chapter.
• (b) A person wishing to file a complaint against a massage therapist, massage school, massage therapy
instructor, massage establishment, continuing education provider, or another person or business shall
notify the department at Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation, Massage Therapy Program,
P.O. Box 12157, Austin, Texas 78711, (512) 539-5600, or www.tdlr.texas.gov.
117.65. Massage School Conduct and Grievance Policy
(New Section adopted effective November 1, 2017, 42 TexReg 4991)
• (a) A massage school shall develop and implement a written policy pertaining to the conduct of students.
The policy shall include:
o (1) conditions for dismissal; and
o (2) conditions for re-entrance of those students dismissed for violating the conduct policy.
• (b) Each massage school shall establish a written grievance policy and procedure that is disclosed to all
students at the time of enrollment.
• (c) The grievance policy and procedure shall:
o (1) attempt to resolve disputes between students, including drops and graduates, and the
school or instructor;
o (2) require that adequate records be maintained of grievances and resolutions;
o (3) require that every effort to resolve grievances and complaints is made; and
o (4) prohibit a massage school from discipling or retaliating against a student for filing a
complaint with the department
CANCELLATION & REFUND POLICY A. A full refund of all monies paid by a student will be made if:
1. The student cancels the enrollment agreement within 72 hours (until midnight of the third day
excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays) after the enrollment contract is signed by the
prospective student;
2. The enrollment of the student was procured as the result of any misrepresentation in advertising,
in promotional materials of the massage therapy educational program or by the owner, the
massage school, or massage therapy instructor; or
3. The student was not provided ample opportunity to read the information provided in §140.341
(a) of The Texas 25 Administrative Code.
B. After expiration of the 72-hour cancellation privilege, or if the student fails to enter, withdraws from, or
is terminated from the program at any time prior to completion the refund policy is:
1. Refunds for each program will be based on the program time expressed in clock hours;
2. Refunds must be consummated within 30 days after the earliest of:
a. The effective date of termination if the student is terminated;
b. The date of receipt of written notice from the student of withdrawal; or
c. 10 instructional days following the first day of the program if the student fails to
enter;
Western Tech Catalog | 31
3. If tuition is collected in advance of the first day of the program, and if, after expiration of the 72-
hour cancellation privilege, the student does not enter the program, not more than $200 shall be
retained;
4. If a student enters a massage therapy educational program and is terminated or withdraws, the
minimum refund of the tuition will be:
a. During the first week or one-tenth of the program, whichever is less, 90% of the remaining
tuition;
b. After the first week or one-tenth of the program, whichever is less, but within the first three
weeks of the program, 80% of the remaining tuition;
c. After the first three weeks of the program, but within the first quarter of the program, 75%
of the remaining tuition;
d. During the second quarter of the program, 50% of the remaining tuition; e.
e. During the third quarter of the program, 10% of the remaining tuition;
f. During the last quarter of the program, the student may be considered obligated for the full
tuition:
5. Refunds of items of extra expense to the student, such as instructional supplies, books, student
activities, laboratory fees, service charges, rentals, deposits, and all other such ancillary
miscellaneous charges, where these items are separately stated and shown in the pre-enrollment
information, will be made in a reasonable manner;
6. If a program is discontinued by the school and this prevents the student from completing the
program:
a. All tuition and fees paid shall be refunded if the student is not provided with a transcript of
all successfully completed hours within 30 days of discontinuance of the program; or
b. In the event, an additional or changed location is 10 miles or more from the previously
approved location of instruction and an enrolled student is unable to complete the program
at the additional or changed location as determined by the department:
i. All tuition and fees paid shall be refunded if the student is not provided with a
transcript of all successfully completed hours within 30 days of the change of
location; or
ii. All unearned tuition and fees shall be refunded if a transcript of all successfully
completed hours is provided within 30 days of the change of location.
7. If a student did not meet the requirements of a program and the student does not complete the
program for any reason, all tuition and fees shall be refunded
*In all refund computations, leaves of absence, suspensions, school holidays, days when classes are not offered, and
summer vacations shall not be counted as part of the elapsed time for purposes of calculating of a student’s refund.
Addition to the Massage Therapy Program’s Cancellation and Refund Policy
Students who decide to leave their program within the first 14 school days of starting their program will be entitled
to a full tuition refund, less administrative fees not to exceed $100, and will be eligible for a full refund of tools, and
supplies (including uniforms) if returned to Western Tech in good condition. Any balances that remain for non-
returned items will be billed to the student, and any balance owed needs to be paid within 3 months to avoid the
account from being sent to collections.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s program of Massage Therapy has established technical standards and essential functions for
the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and essential functions, with or
without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program satisfactorily. Please review
the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that
meets the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with
fellow students, internship clients, college administration, faculty and staff.
3. The ability to listen, understand and communicate ideas presented through spoken words
and sentences.
4. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
5. The ability to lift a minimum of 50lbs.
6. The ability to carry, move and adjust a massage table and massage chair.
7. The ability to assist clients and patients in clinical settings in getting on and off tables, transfer to
and off from wheel chairs and or other assistive medical equipment without limitation.
8. The ability to stand, use both upper limbs to perform body work for a minimum of one hour
and a maximum of 6 hours with minimal breaks.
9. Satisfactory visual acuity for reading and documentation of patient treatment, reading the Massage
Western Tech Catalog | 32
Therapist’s plan of care, and measuring patient range of motion using a variety of measuring devices.
10. Sufficient manual dexterity to perform fine motor tasks such as; palpation, assessments, massage
and related techniques for all portions of the program.
11. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
12. For Internship 101, Internship 102 & clinical practicum, the ability to stand and perform manual
massage techniques for a sustained duration of time of no less than 4 hours and no more than 8
hours per day. Students should be able to apply sustained industry-standard levels of pressure
using thumbs, fingers, wrists, forearms and hands for up to 2 hours at a time with no breaks.
13. The ability to provide and receive light therapeutic and deep tissue massage, massage that affects
circulatory and lymphatic systems, sports massage and all modalities included in the training on
all parts of the body involved in the training without obstacles to include facial hair.
14. Working or laying on a therapeutic table in both prone and supine position, for a period no less than
1 hour, and up to 2 hours.
15. The ability to provide and receive hydro therapy treatments (i.e. hot packs, ice packs, thermo-wraps,
steam, contrast baths, therapeutic body wraps).
16. The ability to perform light to medium low impact cardiac and strength building exercise.
17. Because massage therapy is a health care service and learning is done using the human body, the
student must be able to participate in all areas of training, including but not limited to receiving
massage therapy services in clinical settings. Please be advised, this involves disrobing and
receiving massage services from fellow students and licensed program instructors while covered
with professional massage therapy draping. Students will be required to work on clients of both
genders without discrimination or limitations.
18. The ability to record client histories, to provide routine safety instructions, and conduct a safe
and professional massage session with little or no supervision.
19. The ability to implement sanitation standards along with universal precautions in health care
to include finger nail length acceptable to the program faculty and program director.
20. The ability to remove all body piercings located in areas where therapeutic massage is applied
i.e. facial & body piercings etc.
MASSAGE THERAPY PROGRAM
COURSES 1-14
750 CLOCK HOURS
26.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES This program provides the student with the
necessary entry level and advanced skills for
competency, confidence and achievement in the field of
massage therapy. By introducing foundations in
business, ethics, professionalism and entrepreneurial
paradigms, students also gain understanding of both
technical and business strategies required in the field. In
addition students are also trained and can received
certification in first aid & cardio pulmonary
resuscitation (BLS/CPR) for healthcare providers.
The student will also develop an extensive
knowledge base of critical hands on skills and will gain
real world experience through a comprehensive clinical
internship. Students will also get extensive training in
advanced clinical techniques and practices, which are
essential for working in areas of pain management,
rehab as well as manual soft tissue therapies related to
Sports and Athletics. Nutritional and Wellness
paradigms will also be explored. Advanced Spa and
hydrotherapy skills will also be presented which can
help graduates surpass entry level knowledge and skills,
making the student better prepared to become
commercially viable for employment and
entrepreneurship as a self-employed Licensed Massage
Therapist. It is also the objective of the school to instill
within each student a sincere and practical commitment
to practice with utmost professional and ethical
standards.
Upon successful completion of this program, and
successful passing of the Massage and Bodywork
Licensing Examination, the student will be able to apply
for licensure with the Texas Department of Licensing
and Regulation (TDLR). Licensed graduates are able to
work as an entry-level Massage Therapist in various
environments such as massage clinics, wellness centers,
spas, fitness centers, chiropractic clinics and can also
strive to become self-employed as an independent
therapist or a business owner.
EXPECTED STUDENT OUTCOMES Western Technical College’s expected student
outcomes for the massage therapy graduate will be as
follows. The graduate will:
1. Be prepared to practice in a variety of healthcare
and wellness settings.
2. Be able to practice within the laws and
regulations of the state of Texas.
3. Be eligible to take an approved state licensure
exam.
4. Be able to apply knowledge and skills to assist in
treatment of clients and patients independently
and/or under the direct supervision of a health
care provider or employer.
5. Be able to apply business practices required for
daily operations of self-employment, contract or
employer relationships.
6. Be prepared to communicate (oral, written and
non-verbal communication skills) to clients,
patients, colleagues, and other members of the
healthcare community.
Western Tech Catalog | 33
7. Adhere to professional, legal and ethical
standards as set forth by the Texas Massage
Therapy Act.
8. Be able to educate others (clients, patients,
caregivers, staff and healthcare professionals)
using effective client education and professional
education methods.
9. Be able to participate in activities that address
quality of service
10. Be able to practice in a safe manner to minimize
risk to clients, clients, self and others.
11. Be able to deliver client and patient care that
reflects respect for individual and cultural
differences.
12. Be able to demonstrate a commitment to
professional and personal growth and advocate
the profession through involvement.
13. Be able to document client treatment in a timely
and effective manner.
14. Be able to perform assessment techniques within
the knowledge and limits of practice. Monitoring
and modifying the plan of care.
15. Be able to communicate with primary care
providers (where applicable) in a timely manner
by reporting patient/client progress or concerns.
16. Be able to participate in client follow up, in
person, by telephone, email and print.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0/3.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)/
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
This program is not regulated or approved by the
Texas Workforce Commission, Career School and
Colleges. The Massage Therapy Program is
approved and regulated by the Texas Department of
Licensing and Regulation (TDLR).
Western Tech Catalog | 34
PROGRAM OUTLINE: MASSAGE THERAPY
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
ACCSC
SCH
1 MT AP101 Anatomy & Physiology (50 Hrs. Anatomy & 25 Hrs. Physiology)
75 65/10 3.0
2 HH102 Health & Hygiene 20 10/10 0.5
3 TM103 Therapeutic Massage I 100 30/70 3.5
4 PATH104 Pathology 40 40/00 1.5
5 HYDRO105 Hydrotherapy 20 10/10 0.5
6 TM203 Therapeutic Massage II 100 30/70 3.5
7 KN106 Kinesiology 50 35/15 2.0
8 BE107 Business & Ethics 45 35/10 2.0
9 INT101 Internship 50 0/0/50 1.0
10 INT102 Advanced Internship 50 0/0/50 1.0
11 AP102 Advanced Anatomy & Physiology 60 50/10 2.5
12 ATCP202 Advanced Techniques & Clinical
Practices 70 20/50 2.5
13 SPA205 Spa Techniques & Industry
Practices 55 15/40 2.0
14 EP101 Employment Preparation 15 15/0 0.5
Total Hours – Certificate of Completion in 750 Hour
Advanced Massage Therapy 750 355/295/100 26.0
COURSE 1
MT AP 101
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY
75 HRS (50HRS ANATOMY/25HRS PHYSIOLOGY)
65/10/3.0 During the first several days of class, the students will receive a general school and program orientation, to include
training on how to utilize the Learning Resource Center. This course will introduce the student to the Anatomy and
the Physiology of the human body’s internal and external systems. Beginning with cell and tissue development, the
student will begin to understand how body systems relate to, and rely on one another. Anatomical and medical
terminology will also be studied throughout the course to strengthen the student’s ability identify body landmarks,
positions, locations, and structures as well as communicate with other healthcare providers. This intensive course
will help prepare students to piece together how massage therapy is interlaced with the fundamentals of anatomy and
physiology.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the basic function of the body systems.
2. Locate the basic landmarks on bony prominences.
3. Locate superficial muscles.
COURSE 2
HH 102
HEALTH AND HYGIENE
20 HRS
10/10/0.5 In Health and Hygiene, the student will learn safe and sanitary practices as applied in healthcare settings by using
universal precautions. Topics include hand washing techniques, infections, sterilization, virus and bacteria. The
student will be introduced to health and wellness strategies beneficial to Massage Therapists. CPR/BLS for
Healthcare Providers and First Aid using the American Heart Association model are also part of this course. In
addition, the student will explore the dynamics of human relationships critical to working with clients of diverse
backgrounds.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Use universal precautions as needed.
Western Tech Catalog | 35
2. Explain the basics of contamination and cross-contamination.
3. Have completed a course in CPR and First Aid
4. List the different agents used to disinfect massage equipment.
5. Implement wellness and exercise models.
6. Utilize skills important to positive human interactions.
COURSE 3
TM 103
THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE I
100 HRS
30/70/3.5 In this course, the student will be introduced to the fundamental theory and practice of Swedish massage. Students
will also learn to identify indications, contraindications, benefits and effects of massage along with identifying and
applying therapeutic massage techniques such as effleurage (stroking), petrissage (kneading), tapotement
(percussion), compression, vibration, friction, nerve stroke, and Swedish gymnastics. Students will gain perspectives
of health care and explore the diverse population of clients that can be encountered including geriatric, pre-natal,
pediatric and clients with special needs. Competence will be measured by hands on skills, professional conduct and
communication along with knowledge in theory and practice of massage therapy. Proper draping technique, body
mechanics, range of motion and therapeutic exercise will be carried throughout the program to develop good sound
practices habits. This course requires the student’s full participation in serving as a model and receiving therapeutic
massage, as well as serving as a student therapist by applying and providing massage therapy techniques. Learning
and working with the human anatomy requires all students to completely disrobe (with proper draping) while serving
as models to allow for a real-world learning experience. Safe and proper draping is utilized at all times during hands
on practical application.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Apply proper draping techniques.
2. List and define the 6 major strokes (techniques) used in Swedish Massage.
3. Apply fundamental therapeutic massage techniques.
4. Perform range of motion exercises.
5. List the indications and contraindications for massage.
6. Identify diverse populations and variety of massage therapy throughout the world.
COURSE 4
PATH 104
PATHOLOGY
40 HRS
40/0/1.5 During this course, students will explore the causes and nature of disease and its effects on the human body. By
gaining solid fundamental knowledge in this area, the student will be able to identify situations where massage
therapy may be indicated and contraindicated. This is a critical skill all massage therapists must develop to ensure
proper and safe applications of massage therapy protocols amongst diverse populations of clients.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify and explain how pathological processes affect the practice of massage therapy.
2. Explain pathologies of the different systems of the anatomy.
3. Make informed decisions on massage therapy protocols.
4. Communicate with other health care provides.
COURSE 5
HYDRO105
HYDROTHERAPY
20 HRS
10/10/0.5 Hydrotherapy is the use of water in three forms; liquid, solid and vapor. The student will gain theoretical
understanding as well as hands on skill by applying a variety of modalities such as ice massage, hot packs, and other
water-based treatments and protocols. Students will also learn contraindications of hydrotherapy and different areas
of its use. In addition, basic spa therapies will be explored.
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Define cryotherapy and thermotherapy.
2. Understand the indication and contraindication of hot and cold applications.
3. Identify basic spa therapies.
Western Tech Catalog | 36
COURSE 6
TM203
THERAPUTIC MASSAGE II
100 HRS
30/70/3.5 By continuing to build on Swedish massage skills, during this course the student will begin use a more superior
level of massage therapy. By applying techniques, body mechanics and table mechanics used in therapeutic deep
pressure/deep tissue applications, the student will gain a higher level of skill and knowledge. Students will also
explore the fundamentals of pain patterns, deep tissue muscle constrictions and myofascial dysfunction. Students
will also be introduced to chair massage. Competence will be measured by hands on skills, professional conduct and
communication along with knowledge in theory and practice of massage therapy. This course requires the student’s
full participation in serving as a model and receiving therapeutic massage, as well as serving as a student therapist
Learning and working with the human anatomy requires all students to completely disrobe (with proper draping)
while serving as a model to allow for a real-world learning experience. Safe and proper draping is utilized at all times
during hands on practical application.
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Identify and use proper body mechanics for deep pressure massage.
2. Use elevated massage skills for a more therapeutic approach.
3. Explain the fundamentals of pain patterns and myofascial dysfunction.
4. Perform basic chair massage techniques and explain settings where chair massage is utilized.
COURSE 7
KN106
KINESIOLOGY
50 HRS
35/15/2.0 Kinesiology is the study of the mechanics of motion with respect to human anatomy. During this course the
student will take a closer look at joints and muscles, along with examining how muscles contract and levers function.
The student will also be introduced to musculoskeletal assessment, the role of the nervous system, posture, and the
gait cycle. Muscle contraction, movement, and correct terminology are at the core of this course.
Upon completing this course, the student will be able to:
1. Describe physiology and category of joints.
2. List the joints of the axial body.
3. Describe structure and function of skeletal muscle tissue.
4. Explain the different contractions of muscles.
5. List and define the major roles of muscles.
6. Describe movement using anatomical terms.
COURSE 8
BE 107
BUSINESS AND ETHICS
45 HRS
35/10/2.0 In this course, the fundamentals of starting and operating a massage therapy business will be explored. The student
will also gain understanding of the laws that govern the practice of massage therapy as a profession. In addition, a
fundamental business plan will be developed by each student. Marketing strategies and business ethics are also
discussed. In addition, ethical dilemmas will be explored to help the student better develop sound and ethical
professional practices. Because Texas Department of State Health Services requires successful completion of a
Jurisprudence exam for licensure as a Massage Therapist, Title 25, Texas Administrative Code, Chapter 140
Subchapter H, will be thoroughly examined. This is the administrative section that regulates the Massage Therapy
profession.
Upon completing this course, the student will be able to:
1. Develop a basic business plan.
2. Identify fundamentals of effective business startup, marketing, and massage business management.
3. Define ethics and professionalism as they relate to the field.
4. Explain the administrative rules that regulate massage therapy in Texas and others states requiring
licenses.
Western Tech Catalog | 37
COURSE 9
INT 101
CLINICAL INTERNSHIP
50 HRS
0/0/50/1.0 Internship will place the student in a real world (on campus) clinical experience designed to implement and further
develop all of the technical and academic skills learned thus far. Each student will be required to complete a total of
forty (40) hands on hours and ten (10) hours of office practices. Hands on skills involve providing therapeutic
massage services to the general public and diverse clients in a supervised environment. Office duties include, but are
not limited to scheduling and confirming appointments, answering and returning phone calls, maintaining lab areas,
lab equipment and linens/towels clean, sanitized and stocked. Because this course requires the student to provide
massage services to the general public, exceptional levels of attendance, safety, professionalism and technical skills
are required to successfully complete this course. An instructor(s) is available on campus at all times during clinical
internship.
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Confidently provide a variety of therapeutic massage services.
2. Work with a diverse population of clients.
3. Better develop hands on and office/business skills needed to successfully practice massage therapy
competitively and effectively.
COURSE 10
INT102
ADVANCED INTERNSHIP
50 HRS
0/0/50/1.0 Advanced Internship is a continuation of INT101, which will help to further develop the student’s skills in a
real-world setting (on campus). With an additional forty (40) hours of hands on experience, as well as an additional
ten (10) hours of office practices, students develop a much more engaging experience in working with a diverse
client base. This course helps students further understand and apply all previously addressed topics and skills.
Office duties include, but are not limited to scheduling and confirming appointments, answering and returning
phone calls, maintaining lab areas, lab equipment and linens/towels clean, sanitized and stocked. Because this
course requires the student to provide massage services to the general public, exceptional levels of attendance,
safety, professionalism and technical skills are required to successfully complete this course. An instructor(s) is
available on campus at all times during clinical internship.
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Confidently provide a variety of therapeutic massage services.
2. Work with a diverse population of clients.
3. Better develop hands on and office/business skills needed to successfully practice massage therapy
competitively and effectively.
4. Utilize their experience to elevate their knowledge and skills.
COURSE 11
AP102
ADV ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY
60 HRS
50/10/2.5 This course (composed of 40 hours of anatomy and 20 hours of physiology) will further explore human anatomy
and physiology with emphasis on the central and peripheral nervous systems, and its relationship to internal organs
and the musculoskeletal system. This course prepares students to safely and accurately apply advanced therapeutic
massage techniques used in pain management. Students will closely examine innervations which encompass this
complex body system. Students will also reexamine basic anatomy and physiology in preparation for the MBLEx
(Massage Therapy Licensing Examination).
Upon completing this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify innervations and responses that correspond to the internal organs of the human body.
2. Identify innervations and responses that correspond to the musculoskeletal systems of the human body.
3. Examine the relationship of neuromuscular structures and trigger point therapy.
Western Tech Catalog | 38
COURSE 12
ATCP 202
ADV TECHNIQUES & CLINICAL PRACTICES
70 HRS
20/50/2.5 This course will focus on advanced clinical massage techniques and practices as they are applied in a professional
clinical/therapeutic setting such as pain management massage clinics, chiropractic clinics and other medical settings.
By identifying and implementing muscle assessment techniques and targeting trigger points and myofacial pain, the
student will examine techniques and protocols related to common areas of pain, including, but not limited to, low
back, neck and shoulder pain, tension headaches, upper and lower extremities. Basic sports massage will also be
explored along with the very basic foundation of insurance, treatment codes and protocols related to soft tissue
therapies. This course requires the student’s full participation in serving as a model and receiving therapeutic
massage, a s w e l l a s s e r v i n g a s a student therapist by applying and providing massage therapy techniques.
Learning and working with the human anatomy requires all students to completely disrobe (with proper draping)
while serving as a model to allow for a “real world” learning experience. Safe and proper draping is utilized at all
times during hands on practical application.
Upon completing this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify myofascial patterns adversely affecting proper muscle function.
2. Use soft tissue therapies to address and reduce chronic pain syndrome caused by myofascial dysfunction.
3. Develop and implement massage therapy session plans to address myofascial dysfunction.
4. Implement clinical practices within the basic administrative aspect of therapeutic settings.
COURSE 13
SPA205
SPA TECHNIQUES AND INDUSTRY PRACTICES
55 HRS
15/40/2.0 This course will introduce the student to massage therapy and hydrotherapy treatments as they are used in a
professional spa setting. Students will explore and develop skills in spa modalities and techniques along with proper
and safe applications. The fundamentals of aroma therapy along with proper and safe applications will be also be
explored. The use of steam, body-wraps, massage therapy facials and variations of these and other techniques will
be the core focus of this course. Students will identify different types of spa and resort settings where spa techniques
are applicable. In addition, students will be introduced to the business and marketing norms of this specialized field.
This course requires the student’s full participation in serving as a model and receiving therapeutic massage, as well
as serving as a student therapist by applying and providing massage therapy techniques. Learning and working with
the human anatomy requires all students to completely disrobe (with proper draping) while serving as a model to
allow for a real-world learning experience. Safe and proper draping is utilized at all times during hands on practical
application.
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Safely perform various spa treatments.
2. Identify contraindications.
3. Safely demonstrate and apply the fundamentals of stone massage.
4. Develop an awareness of various types of business practices and employment options within the spa
industry.
COURSE 14
EP 101
EMPLOYMENT PREPARATION
15 HRS
15/0/0.5 This course is designed to prepare students for the job seeking process. Students will be required to demonstrate
personal and job related behavioral skills both orally and in written format. Resume' completion and a review of the
proper completion of the employment application will be covered. Appropriate attire, persuasive interviewing
techniques and mannerisms will be covered. Students will be required to undergo a mock interview with an employer
from their field of study. This interview may be videotaped and later critiqued with the student. Students must receive
a passing grade in EP 101 in order to qualify for graduation.
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Appropriately complete an application for employment.
2. Create an effective resume’.
3. Interview in a professional manner.
4. Demonstrate their knowledge in responding to interview questions appropriately.
5. Conduct a self-directed job search.
6. Understand employer expectations.
Western Tech Catalog | 39
MEDICAL BILLING AND CODING Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN MEDICAL BILLING & CODING Medical records and health information technicians held about 188,600 jobs in 2014. Medical records and health
information technicians, commonly referred to as health information technicians, organize and manage health
information data by ensuring that it maintains its quality, accuracy, accessibility, and security in both paper files and
electronic systems. They use various classification systems to code and categorize patient information for insurance
reimbursement purposes, for databases and registries, and to maintain patients’ medical and treatment histories.
Employment of health information technicians is projected to grow 15 percent from 2014 to 2024, much faster than
the average for all occupations. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 16,460 National Employment 2012: 186,300
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 21,330 Projected National Employment 2022: 227,500
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 4,870 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 41,100
Percent Change 2012-2022: 29.60% Percent Change 2012-2022: 22.10%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $18.06 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $18.68
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
435 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
485 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 40
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR
APPLICANTS PURSUING THE MEDICAL
BILLING & CODING PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Medical Billing and
Coding program will receive training through a hybrid
delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is
provided in a combination of classes being offered both
on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will
provide 50% of the training and education on-ground
and 50% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the
Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both
synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line
delivery. The on-line content of the course is covered
by using a variety of on-line educational activities such
as discussion boards, chat sessions, conference
sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In
a hybrid program, the face to face schedule is set on
specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line
portion of the class is organized for the student to have
the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom
activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students
entering this program can expect the same level of
support as on-ground students to include tutoring
services, technical support, employment preparation
and assistance with job leads, and access to the school’s
library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful
program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid
program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill
course requirements and succeed in their classes. In
addition, students must have a minimum level of
comfort with technology, as they may find
themselves needing to access course work online for
as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering
enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required
to take a short “Suitability for Distance Education”
survey before they enroll in school. The survey is
designed to identify the prospective student’s level of
proficiency in the use of technology. Students can
expect support in the form of training tailored to their
identified needs so that they can handle the demands of
the Learning Management System that houses much of
their work.
Immunization
In accordance with state law, the following
immunizations are required for students enrolled in
health-related courses that will involve direct patient
contact in medical or dental care facilities or who come
in contact with human biological fluids or tissue:
1. Measles: proof of two doses of measles
vaccine administered on or after the first
birthday and at least 30 days apart or proof of
immunity.
2. Mumps: proof of one dose of mumps vaccine
administered on or after the first birthday or
proof of immunity.
3. Rubella: proof of one dose administered on
or after the first birthday or proof of
immunity.
4. Tetanus/diphtheria: proof of one “booster”
dose of tetanus/diphtheria (within 10 years).
5. Hepatitis B virus (HBV): proof of serologic
immunity to HBV or certification of
immunization with a complete series of
Hepatitis B vaccine. Students will be required
to present a letter or other suitable written
certification.
6. Proof of negative current Tuberculosis test
(less than 1year).
For more information regarding the consequences
of outdated immunizations visit:
www.dshs.state.tx.us/immunize/
Typing Test
Applicants entering into the school’s Medical
Billing & Coding program must exhibit a typing
proficiency of 25 words per minute and 98% accuracy.
POLICIES & STANDARDS SPECIFIC TO
THE MEDICAL BILLING & CODING
PROGRAM
Health and Hygiene
Medical Billing and Coding students are required,
for health and hygiene reasons, to have clean, trimmed
fingernails, active length (no longer than ¼”).
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND
ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Medical Billing & Coding program
is a hybrid program. It has established technical
standards and essential functions for the program as
more fully listed below. The ability to meet these
standards and essential functions, with or without
reasonable accommodation, is required in order to
complete the program satisfactorily. Please review the
following technical standards and essential functions
carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials
and maintain a certain grade/performance
level that meets the set academic
requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional
demeanor at all times and interact
professionally with fellow students,
internship site employees and clientele,
administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional
dress code acceptable to the profession and
as set by Western Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and
communicate ideas presented through
spoken words and sentences.
5. Satisfactory visual acuity for reading and
documenting patient charts and creating
patient accounts.
Western Tech Catalog | 41
6. The ability to tolerate sitting and/or
standing for extended periods of time
without a break.
7. Students shall use confidentiality
standards in accordance to professional
health care environments about other
students and/or internship patients.
8. Students shall display professional
demeanor, language, student to
student/instructor/ or Western Tech
personal interaction and conduct that
fosters a safe, productive and ethical
learning environment for themselves and
other students enrolled in the program
other employees of Western Tech.
9. Students shall not violate professional,
ethical and safety standards.
10. The ability to utilize computers and
perform basic computer functions with
programs such as Word, Outlook, and
Excel.
11. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or
access to programs on the basis of any characteristic
protected by law, including disability. Persons with
disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they
can carry out classroom, laboratory and internship
assignments; pass written, oral and practical
examinations; and meet all of the requirements of the
program and generally accepted requirements of the
profession, with or without reasonable accommodation.
Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations
for disabilities. Applicants and students who require
accommodation should contact the Campus Director
and submit a written request for accommodation.
Western Tech Catalog | 42
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION IN MEDICAL BILLING AND CODING
COURSES 1-11
1060 CLOCK HOURS
44.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC & THECB)
39.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS (ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The Medical Billing & Coding Program is designed to prepare the individual for entry-level employment as a
records coder, claims examiner, medical biller or related occupation in private health care practices, clinics, hospitals,
government agencies, skilled nursing facilities, insurance companies, consulting firms and other health care facilities.
Our Medical Billing & Coding Program teaches students how to evaluate coding and billing practices, and
provides tools for developing compliance programs that will help minimize the risk of investigation.
The program balances knowledge of medical science, technical skills and coding experience with assessment
evaluation by professional coding specialists who care about your success. Our practical approach takes students
through a careful step-by-step study of what medical coders and billers need to get the job done right.
CERTIFICATION AND EXAMINATION The student will sit for the following certification examinations through the National Healthcare Association
(NHA)
• NHA – CEHRS – Certified Electronic Health Records Specialist
• NHA – CBCS – Certified Billing and Coding Specialist
The student will be able to sit for either the American Academy of Professional Coders (AAPC), American Health
Information Management Association (AHIMA).
• AAPC – CPC-A – Professional Coder Apprentice
• AHIMA – CCS-P – Certified Coding Specialist Physician
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class or lab
per course and the subsequent number of credit hours awarded.
44/48/4.0/3.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)/
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
Western Tech Catalog | 43
PROGRAM OUTLINE: MEDICAL BILLING AND CODING
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE ON
CAMPUS/ONLINE TWC/THECB
SCU ACCSC
SCH
1 MTAP
100
Medical
Terminology /
Anatomy &
Physiology
100 62/38 50%/50% 5.0 4.0
2 MOA 100 Medical Office
Administration 100 55/45 50%/50% 5.0 4.0
3 ICPT 100
Introduction to
Coding Principles
& Theory
100 54/46 50%/50% 5.0 4.0
4 HC 100 Health Claims 100 65/35 50%/50% 5.0 4.0
5 HC 200 Health Claims 100 35/65 50%/50% 4.0 4.0
6 ACPT
200
Advanced Coding
Principles &
Theory
100 20/80 50%/50% 3.5 3.5
7 DC 100 Diagnostic
Coding 100 63/37 50%/50% 5.0 4.0
8 AACPT
300
Advanced Coding
Principles &
Theory
100 45/55 50%/50% 4.5 4.0
9 EP101 Employment
Preparation 15 15/0 50%/50% 1.0 0.5
10 MRC 100 Medical Record
Coder 85 15/70 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
11 IN108 Internship 160 0/0/160 00/00 3.5 4.0
Total Hours – Certificate of
Completion in Medical Billing &
Coding
1060 429/471/
160
44.5 39.0
COURSE 1
MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY / ANATOMY
& PHYSIOLOGY
62/38/5.0/4.0 During the first several days of class, the students
will receive a general school and program orientation,
to include training on how to utilize the Learning
Resource Center. This course will acquaint the students
with the meaning and pronunciation of medical terms,
including prefixes, root words, and suffixes. The
students learn provider and medical abbreviations as
well as disease, physiology and treatment methodology.
The students will also learn the names, pronunciation
and locations of all body systems and their principal
parts.
The major instructional units will stress the
following body systems: cardiovascular,
integumentary, urinary, musculoskeletal, respiratory,
nervous, digestive, reproductive, endocrine, eyes, ears,
nose and throat.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Define, interpret, and use the medical
terminology in a variety of allied health fields.
2. Develop a critical understanding of the
structure of the Digestive, Urinary, Nervous,
Cardiovascular, Blood, Respiratory,
Lymphatic, Musculoskeletal, Endocrine,
Female and Male organs as a prerequisite to
comprehending its function.
3. Define and know the possible causes of
disease.
COURSE 2
MEDICAL OFFICE ADMINISTRATION
55/45/5.0/4.0 The course is designed to meet the needs of the
beginning student by introducing him/her to the basic
principles of insurance terminology, health insurance
and medical billing. In addition, the student will
continue to learn A&P and begin medical coding.
Students will be taught fundamentals of Medical
Billing & Coding to provide them with the importance
of written communication skills, accounts receivable,
management, supportive documentation, and customer
service. Introduction into the use of different types of
medical billing forms will be covered. Students will
also learn cost containment programs, traditional
insurance carriers and private plans to include managed
care, and fraud guidelines.
Students will work with Word 2010 for basic
business letters, editing documents, and applying font
styles, sizes and emphasis on text in a document.
A requirement to create a proper APA formatted
research paper will be covered during these projects.
The students will also start grammar exercises to
improve the ability to correspond in the medical
business world.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
Western Tech Catalog | 44
1. Research and apply knowledge of insurance
rules and regulations for major insurance
programs in the local or regional area.
2. Claims submission using CMS-1500 for
private insurance plans.
3. Understand and comply with managed care
plan coverage and the benefits and eligibility
requirements of each.
COURSE 3
INTRODUCTION TO CODING
PRINCIPLES & THEORY
54/46/5.0/4.0 The major theme of this course is the theoretical
aspect of medical record coding. Introduction to ICD-
10-CM (International Classification of Diseases, 10th
Revision, Clinical Modification), basic coding rules and
conventions, sequencing codes and other coding
principles. Introduction to CPT (Current Procedural
Terminology) Coding System Structure of the two
levels of CPT, general guidelines for using CPT and
HCPCS (Health Care Procedural Coding System), basic
steps to assign CPT and HCPCS and understanding the
sequencing and linking requirements.
During this course the students will become familiar
with the terminology in the procedure and diagnostic
coding systems to use them efficiently and provide
accurate descriptions of services rendered and
maximize payment from insurance companies. The
practical application is designed to provide the student
the practical experience necessary to understand and
code CPT.
Students will continue their education in basic
principles of insurance as well as in Anatomy and
Physiology during this phase.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Apply coding conventions when assigning
ICD-10-CM volume 1and 2
2. Apply coding conventions when assigning
Medicare, Medicaid, Military Carriers,
Workers Comp and Disability Insurance.
3. Assign CPT Level I Codes and Modifiers
4. Assign Level II, National Codes and
Modifiers.
COURSE 4
HEALTH CLAIMS
65/35/5.0/4.0 This course is designed to provide the student with
the understanding and practical skills necessary to
abstract from the medical record relevant information
for completing the CMS-1500 claim form. Students
will recognize general guidelines for completing forms
for different carriers to include: Medicare, Medicaid,
and Workers’ Compensation for physician services,
DXL, surgery, anesthesia and coordination of benefits.
Students will have the opportunity to simulate the entire
claims examination process in a group and individual
setting. This course will provide the student with the
skills needed to understand and process the insurance
claims for physician services, x-ray and laboratory
services. This course also provides the student with the
skills necessary to understand COB (Coordination of
Benefits) in organizing the difference between primary
and secondary payers, organize the order of benefit
rules and rights. The student will also learn to determine
coordination of benefits as they apply to managed care,
Preferred Provider Organizations, and Health
Maintenance Organizations. This course will
teach the student the knowledge necessary to optimize
payment in a timely and cost efficient manner. The
students will also be taught the difference between
clean, pending, rejected, incomplete and invalid claims
and recognize and describe the reasons why claims are
rejected. They will also record proper information in
financial records or on the patient’s ledger card after
claim submission. This course will also provide the
student with the skills necessary to understand and
complete the UB-04 (Uniformed Bill Inpatient and
Outpatient) claim form and to know when it may or may
not be used to minimize their chances of rejection by
insurance companies.
This course will give the students the opportunity to
understand medical reports and how they relate to
billing forms. Also, they will learn to recognize triage,
operative, diagnostic and medical history report.
Students will continue their education in Anatomy
and Physiology during this phase.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Translate medical reports and their relation to
billing forms.
2. Abstract from the patient record relevant
information for completing the CMS-1500
claim form.
3. Recognize and apply proper guidelines for
completing the CMS-1500 forms.
4. Edit and complete insurance claims in both
hospital inpatient and outpatient settings to
minimize the chance of rejection by insurance
carriers.
5. Comply with National Correct Coding
Initiative.
COURSE 5
HEALTH CLAIMS
35/65/4.0/4.0 Students will have the opportunity to manipulate
industry related practice management software
familiarize themselves with today’s computerized work
environment which must be completed during the
course, through a structured self-paced program.
Students will be training for Electronic Health
Records. Students will also continue their education in
Anatomy and Physiology during this phase.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Possess a working knowledge of the
computerized electronic health record.
2. Train on Electronic Health Records
3. Process and Post payments
4. Eligible to sit for the Certified Electronic
Health Records Specialist exam.
Western Tech Catalog | 45
COURSE 6
ADVANCED CODING PRINCIPLES &
THEORY
20/80/3.5/3.5 Students will learn the importance of capturing all
aspects of Inpatient and Outpatient billing, which will
give the students an understanding of procedures
performed, services rendered, additional supplies,
drugs, etc. that may be used in the medical practice.
Students will continue their education in Anatomy
and Physiology during this phase.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. The student will understand the procedures
and services offered in an Inpatient and
Outpatient setting.
2. The student will be able to review and code
from the operative, laboratory, and radiology
reports.
3. The student will understand how to abstract
relevant information from the physician’s
progress notes in a medical chart.
4. The student will be applying all coding
guidelines and regulations set forth by CMS.
COURSE 7
DIAGNOSTIC CODING
63/37/5.0/4.0 In this course he/she will also have the practical
application of diagnostic coding from various medical
records. The student will apply advanced anatomy and
physiology with pathophysiology as it applies to the
appropriate diagnostic codes.
Students will continue their education in Anatomy
and Physiology during this phase.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. The student will understand the procedures
and services offered with Ambulance and
DME.
2. Interpret medical documentation to extract all
appropriate diagnostic code.
COURSE 8
ADVANCED CODING PRINCIPLES &
THEORY
45/55/4.5/4.0 In this course the student will learn the coding of
more complex diagnostic and procedural statements.
Clinical information regarding specific disease
processes will be covered, as well as diagnostic and
procedural terminology which builds upon previous
knowledge of the basic principles and conventions of
the ICD-10-CM, CPT and HCPCS.
Students will understand how to use the medical
record to provide necessary information essential to the
assignment of accurate codes. They will recognize
when multiple coding is required, when it is not
recommended, and when it should not be used.
At the conclusion of this course, the student will
understand the theory, function, and application of
multiple coding and sequencing of codes.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Apply instructional notations and conventions
of the ICD-10-CM (two volumes), CPT and
HCPCS classification systems, ability to
follow the detail guidelines related to their use
in assigning single and sequence multiple
diagnosis and procedure codes for appropriate
reimbursement and data collection.
2. Assign ICD-10-CM codes to the highest level
of specificity.
3. Review the medical record and abstract
information to identify diseases and
procedures.
COURSE 9
EMPLOYMENT PREPARATION
15/0/1.0/0.5 This course is designed to prepare students for the
job-seeking process. Students will be required to
demonstrate personal and job related behavioral skills
both orally and in written format. Résumé construction
will be covered. Appropriate dress, persuasive
interviewing techniques and mannerisms will be
covered. Students will be required to undergo a “mock”
interview with an employer from their field of study.
Students must receive a passing grade in EP 101 to
qualify for graduation. A total of 15 clock hours of
instruction is committed to EP 101 and can be delivered
at any time during the student’s training. The course
may include employers/alumni visiting the school and
addressing students about relevant issues in their chosen
fields of study.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Appropriately complete an application for
employment.
2. Create an effective résumé.
3. Interview in a professional manner.
4. Demonstrate his/her knowledge in responding
to interview questions appropriately.
5. Conduct a self-directed job search.
6. Understand employer expectations.
COURSE 10
MEDICAL RECORD CODER
15/70/3.0/3.0 This course will provide the student with the
understanding and practical skills necessary to process
claims.
Practical work experience will consist of coding and
billing compliance for Medical Practices. Review
current practices with respect to the ICD-10-CM
diagnosis and CPT procedure coding and modifier
knowledge for the generation of medical visit APC’s.
This will include review of the charge capture process
within the organizations.
Students will explore the Medicare Rebates PQRS
(Physician Quality Reporting System), the measures,
and how to apply and what information is needed.
In addition, the student will learn detailed
instructions in test taking strategies, as well as timed
practical experience needed to sit for any billing and
coding national certification exam. Students will also
learn how to correctly abstract claims, which is finding
errors on claims that have been processed and denied.
Western Tech Catalog | 46
Students will learn how to effectively audit medical
charts.
COURSE 11
IN108
INTERNSHIP PROGRAM
0/0/160/3.5/4.0 Students must satisfactorily complete all 9 courses
and EP101 before being placed in an internship
participating site. The internship participation enables
the student to apply the knowledge and skills learned
throughout the theoretical and clinical setting in the
work environment. The student, with no financial
remuneration, is placed in a doctor’s office, clinic or
hospital and is closely supervised to ensure that the
school’s objectives are being met. Internship Program
is 160 hours in length.
Furthermore, the student will sit for the following
certification examinations through the National
Healthcare Association (NHA): CBCS Certified Billing
and Coding Specialist. The student will also be able to
sit for the American Academy of Professional Coders
(AAPC) CPC-A – Professional Coder Apprentice
and/or the American Health Information Management
Association (AHIMA) CCS-P – Certified Coding
Specialist Physician.
Western Tech Catalog | 47
MEDICAL CLINICAL ASSISTANT WITH X-RAY
TECHNOLOGY
Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus & 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN MEDICAL CLINICAL ASSISTANT Employment of medical assistants is projected to grow 23 percent from 2014 to 2024. Employment of
medical/clinical assistants held about 591,300 jobs in 2014. Most of these assistants work in physicians’ offices,
hospitals, outpatient clinics, and other healthcare facilities. In 2014, more than half of all medical assistants worked
in physicians’ offices. Medical assistants typically do the following record patient history and personal information,
measure vital signs, such as blood pressure, help the physician with patient examinations, give patients injections or
medications as directed by the physician and as permitted by state law, schedule patient appointments, prepare blood
samples for laboratory tests, enter patient information into medical records and preparing patients for x-rays,
Electronic health records (EHRs) are changing some medical assistants’ jobs. More and more physicians are adopting
EHRs, moving all their patient information from paper to electronic records. Assistants need to learn the EHR
software that their office uses. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 51,560 National Employment 2012: 560,800
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 67,960 Projected National Employment 2022: 723,700
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 16,400 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 162,900
Percent Change 2012-2022: 31.80% Percent Change 2012-2022: 29.00%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $13.53 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $14.80
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
985 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
1,640 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 48
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE
MEDICAL/CLINICAL ASSISTANT WITH X-RAY TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Medical / Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology program will receive training
through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination of classes being
offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 80% of the training and education on-
ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
Immunization
In accordance with state law, the following immunizations are required for all students enrolled in health-related
courses which will involve them in direct patient contact in medical or dental care facilities or that will require them
to come into contact with human biological fluids or tissue.
• Measles: proof of two doses of measles vaccine administered on or after the first birthday and at
least 30 days apart or proof of immunity.
• Mumps: proof of one dose of mumps vaccine administered on or after the first birthday or proof of
immunity.
• Rubella: proof of one dose administered on or after the first birthday or proof of immunity.
• Tetanus/diphtheria: proof of one “booster” dose of tetanus/diphtheria (within 10 years).
• Hepatitis B virus (HBV): proof of serologic immunity to HBV or certification of immunization
with a complete series of Hepatitis B vaccine. Students will be required to present a letter or other
suitable written certification.
• Proof of a current negative TB result (less than one year).
For more information regarding the consequences of outdated immunizations visit:
www.dshs.state.tx.us/immunize/
Typing Test
Applicants requesting entry into the Medical Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology (MCA) program must
exhibit a typing proficiency of 20 words per minute (WPM) and 95% accuracy. Applicants, who achieve less than
20 WPM and 95% accuracy, but not less than 15 WPM and 90% accuracy, are allowed entrance into the MCA
program provided they are able to elevate their typing speed to 20 WPM and 95% accuracy before they enter
internship. Applicants must adhere to the typing remediation requirements of the program.
POLICIES & STANDARDS SPECIFIC TO THE MEDICAL/CLINICAL ASSISTANT WITH
X-RAY TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM
Code of Conduct
It is imperative that when students are working with syringes and/or needle sticks, they dispose of them correctly.
Students found to discard syringes or other sharp items in an inappropriate manner and/or inappropriate location such
as bathroom trash bins, or any other undesignated bin, will be subject to disciplinary action by Western Tech up to
and including suspension and/or expulsion from the program. Students who use syringes for health conditions such
as insulin injections are subject to the same disposal requirements.
Western Tech Catalog | 49
Health and Hygiene
Medical Clinical Assistant w/X-Ray Technology students are required, for health and hygiene reasons, to have
clean, trimmed fingernails, active length (no longer than ¼”). Acrylic nails are NOT allowed in the Medical Clinical
Assistant w/X-Ray Technology program.
X-Ray Technology Course Only
The X-Ray Technology course is a non-certified course approved by the Texas Department of State and Health
Services/TDSHS. A student must have the following to be eligible to register with the Texas Medical Board (TMB):
• 100% Attendance
• 3.0 GPA
• Satisfactory back ground check (administered by the TMB)
• Undergo Fingerprinting
• Show proof of Identity (copy of birth certificate or passport)
Make-up hours are only available to students that have a documented emergency situation, and must be approved
by the instructor or program director. Students missing 30% in an entire course will be required to take the course in
its entirety. The course may be taken in a different class schedule and/or upon availability. Student not achieving
75% in academics but have at least 70% will pass the course but are not eligible to register with the TMB.
Scheduling Make up Time
Make up time is completed under the supervision of the X-Ray instructor only during an already scheduled class.
Available Make up Time schedules:
“A” Schedule: 8:30am-2:30pm Mon-Fri
“C” Schedule: 6pm-10pm Mon-Thurs
A “Make Up Form” will be used to track and log make up time.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Medical/Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology program is a hybrid program with the
exception of the following three courses: Fundamentals of X-Ray, Employment Preparation, and Internship. Western
Tech’s Medical Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology program has established technical standards and essential
functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and essential functions, with
or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program satisfactorily. Please review the
following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
5. The ability to transfer patients safely from a variety of surfaces, i.e.: wheelchairs, beds, etc. and to lift
equipment needed for patient care.
6. Sufficient manual dexterity to perform fine motor tasks such as; palpation, measurements, and
demonstration of patient activities.
7. Satisfactory visual acuity for reading and documenting in patient charts and administering treatment.
8. The ability to tolerate sitting and/or standing for extended periods of time without a break.
9. The ability to provide and receive needle stick, to include injections, and blood draws without any
restriction.
10. Students shall practice confidentiality standards in accordance to professional health care environment
about other students and/or internship patients.
11. Students shall display professional demeanor, language, student to student/instructor interaction/
Western Tech personnel and conduct that foster a safe, productive, and ethical learning environment
for them and other students enrolled in the program.
12. Sufficient manual dexterity and steadiness to quickly move your hand, or both your hands together
with your arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble needle syringe units, administer
safe injections and blood draws.
13. Students shall not violate professional, ethical and safety standards.
14. The ability to implement sanitation standards along with Universal Precautions in health care.
Western Tech Catalog | 50
15. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
16. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION IN MEDICAL CLINICAL
ASSISTANT WITH X-RAY TECHNOLOGY
COURSES 1-10
1020 CLOCK HOURS
44.0 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC & THECB)
36.5 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS (ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES This program will cross train students for multiple skills areas so they can become more employable. Students
will receive 1020 hours of comprehensive training in anatomy and physiology, medical terminology, medical law
and ethics, billing and bookkeeping, electronic charting, and patient data collection. Clinical duties with special focus
on phlebotomy, EKG, and hemodialysis and basic X-ray are incorporated into the training as well the completion of
162 hours of internship. Our goal is to train students to be able to have the qualifications and training that allows
them the option of what type of clinical setting they would like to work primarily in: hospitals, clinics and/or
physician offices. They will gain expertise to provide effective clinical and administrative skills.
Upon satisfactory completion of the training, students will be qualified to assume entry-level positions as a
Medical Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology performing the medical procedures, lab techniques and front
office duties described above.
CERTIFICATION EXAMINATION Upon successful completion of the Medical Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology Program, students will
receive a Certificate of Completion. Students will be eligible to take the following certification examinations through
the National Healthcareer Association (NHA):
• Certified Phlebotomy Technician
• Certified Electrocardiograph Technician
• Certified Clinical Medical Assistant
• Certified Medical Administrative Assistant
• Certified Electronic Health Records Specialist
Additionally, students may be eligible, after completion of the of the Non-certified X-Ray Technology course to
register with the Texas Medical Board (TMB). NCT’s are defined as individuals performing X-Rays for medical
reasons who are not certified medical radiologic technologist or limited medical radiologic technologist.
TIME CODE The following time code is used on all courses to illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class or lab
per course and the subsequent number of credit hours awarded.
44/48/4.0/3.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)/
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
Western Tech Catalog | 51
PROGRAM OUTLINE: MEDICAL CLINICAL ASSISTANT WITH X-RAY
TECHNOLOGY
# COURSE TITLE HRS THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE ON
CAMPUS/ONLINE
TWC/THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU101 Foundations 30 15/15 80%/20% 1.5 1.0
2 AP101 Anatomy & Physiology /
Medical Terminology 96 50/46 80%/20% 4.5 4.0
3 MF102
Medical / Clinical
Assistant Fundamentals &
HIPAA
96 46/50 80%/20% 4.5 3.5
4 IB103 Medical Insurance /
Bookkeeping & Billing 96 46/50 80%/20% 4.5 3.5
5 CL101 Clinical I 96 46/50 80%/20% 4.5 3.5
6 CL103 ECG/CPR 96 46/50 80%/20% 4.5 3.5
7 HM104 Fundamentals of
Hemodialysis 96 50/46 80%/20% 4.5 4.0
8 CL102 Phlebotomy 126 60/66 80%/20% 6.0 5.0
9 XR 105 Fundamentals of X-Ray 126 60/66 100%/00 6.0 5.0
10 INT 105 Internship 162 0/0/162 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours- Certificate of Completion in
Medical Clinical Assistant with X-Ray
Technology
1020 419/439/
162
44.0 36.5
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
15/15/1.5/1.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an introduction to their field of study with particular emphasis
on providing an overview of important post-secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-management, academic
integrity, effective use of Western Technical College’s resources, and comprehensive understanding of critical
thinking skills. Students will learn how to research industries, gain better understand of employer expectations and
begin working on a chronological resume. Students will complete the course with a better understanding of their
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:
7. Navigate the library and conduct basic research functions.
8. Complete an effective resume.
9. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry requirements for his/her chosen field of study.
10. Conduct a self-directed job search.
11. Apply critical thinking skills throughout the program.
12. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
AP 101
ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY / MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY
50/46/4.5/4.0 During the first several days of class, the students will receive a general school and program orientation, to include
training on how to utilize the Learning Resource Center. The student will develop a critical understanding of
anatomical structures and functions of the digestive, urinary, female & male reproductive, cardiovascular,
respiratory, blood, lymphatic & immune, nervous, integumentary, and the endocrine systems.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Become acquainted with terms that describe positions, directions, planes, and cavities of the body.
2. Name the organs of each system and describe their locations and functions.
3. Describe various pathological conditions affecting each system.
4. Detail the meanings of combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes of the system’s terminology.
5. List and explain some clinical procedures, lab tests, and abbreviations that pertain to the systems.
6. Appropriately complete a resume worksheet.
Western Tech Catalog | 52
COURSE 3
MF 102
MEDICAL / CLINICAL ASSISTANT FUNDAMENTALS & HIPPA
46/50/4.5/3.5 This course will acquaint the student with basic concepts of working in a medical office to include professional
and career responsibilities. The student will develop interpersonal communication through telephone procedures,
appointment setting and learning receptionist duties. The student will learn to maintain and file drug and prescription
records. The student will also gain first-hand knowledge of written communication consisting of written
correspondence, processing mail and telecommunication and professional reports. The student will gain skills with
professionalism in the allied health professions. The student will become acquainted with the appropriate usage of
the Physicians Desk References and drug and dosage calculations. Topics related to maintaining health such as
nutrition, exercise, and self-examination techniques are discussed. Students will complete online HIPAA training
and may receive certificate of completion. Résumé construction and a review of the proper completion of the
employment application will be covered. Prepare students for the job-seeking process.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand interpersonal communication
2. Perform appointment scheduling.
3. Create a patient file including SOAP notes.
4. Maintain and file medical records.
5. Perform oral and written communication.
6. Demonstrate proper telephone etiquette.
7. Use the Physician’s Desk Reference to obtain information about medication.
8. Perform drug and dosage calculations.
9. Implement HIPAA.
10. Demonstrate Job readiness for health professionals.
11. Résumé construction.
12. Understand employer expectations.
COURSE 4
IB 103
MEDICAL INSURANCE / BOOKKEEPING & BILLING
46/50/4.5/3.5 This course will acquaint the student with the skills and knowledge of financial management and health insurance
as they relate to daily functions in a medical office. The student will learn the basic aspects of filing accurate claim
forms for insurance reimbursement. ICD-10, CPT and HCPCS coding systems will be introduced. Records
management to include: patients’ medical records through manual and electronic charting.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Obtain reimbursement through accurate claim submission using the CMS-1500 claim form.
2. Perform basic procedural and diagnostic coding.
3. Demonstrate accounts receivable and accounts payable procedures.
4. Use a physician’s fee schedule.
5. Understand legal guidelines/requirements for healthcare and principles of medical ethics decision
making.
6. Demonstrate knowledge in Electronic Health Records.
7. Demonstrate Job readiness for health professionals
8. Update résumé.
9. Understand employer expectations.
COURSE 5
CL 101
CLINICAL I
46/50/4.5/3.5 During this course, the importance of laboratory safety is introduced. Medical asepsis and sterilization methods
will be practiced. The student will take measurements and vital signs. The student will learn how to prepare patients
for examinations and how to assist a physician with those examinations. The principles of pharmacology and how to
dispense medication under the direct supervision of a physician will be discussed. Hands-on clinical training will be
incorporated.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Describe and comply with requirements of OSHA and CLIA88.
2. Apply principles of aseptic technique and infection control; use of the autoclave.
3. Obtain vital signs and measurements.
4. Provide instructions and teaching for health maintenance and disease prevention.
5. Prepare medications and administer using the following injection methods: intramuscular, Z-track,
subcutaneous, and intradermal.
6. Assist with physical examinations and minor surgery.
Western Tech Catalog | 53
7. Identify and care for instruments used in surgery.
8. Demonstrate professionalism in Allied Health.
9. Update résumé.
10. Understand employer expectations.
COURSE 6
CL 103
ECG/CPR
46/50/4.5/3.5 This course will introduce the student to Electrocardiography (ECG). The basic principles of the cardiovascular
system will be taught in this course. Students will learn how to set up and operate ECG equipment. Patient instruction
and procedural considerations will be addressed. The student will also be instructed on the lead systems and
placement, and identifying rhythms. The student will learn the importance of quality assurance and continual quality
improvement. CPR and First Aid Training are given during this course. Spirometry, peak-flow, nebulizer treatment
will be taught during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Perform an ECG.
2. Identify normal and abnormal heart rhythms.
3. Detect and distinguish arrhythmias.
4. Receive CPR and First Aid training following the American Heart Association guidelines.
5. Perform spirometry and peak flow.
6. Demonstrate Job readiness for health professionals
7. Update résumé.
8. Understand employer expectations.
COURSE 7
HM 104
FUNDAMENTALS OF HEMODIALYSIS
50/46/4.5/4.0 This course is designed to provide the student with the principles of renal dialysis, the normal operation of dialysis
equipment and the procedure for performance of renal dialysis. This course includes the study of the anatomy and
physiology of the kidney and hands-on dissection of an actual kidney. The course will introduce the student to the
technical aspects of preparing, operating, monitoring, and maintaining dialysis equipment. Attention is given to
medications routinely used in renal dialysis and the role of the dialysis technician. Patient needs and safety issues are
addressed. End-stage renal disease, methods for patient assessment and documentation, patient comfort and transfer
are also discussed during this course. Students are introduced to the standards and regulations pertinent to water
treatment and other quality control issues. Theoretical information is supplemented with clinical observation and
practice. Students will be required to demonstrate personal and job related behavioral skills both orally and in written
format. Appropriate dress, persuasive interviewing techniques and mannerisms will be covered.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand infection control in the dialysis setting.
2. Understand the anatomy and function of the kidney.
3. Understand the fluid dynamics, osmosis, diffusion, and ultra-filtration.
4. Set up an arterial-venous blood line.
5. Understand nutrition and renal diet.
6. Prepare the dialysate.
7. Understand pre-assessment and post-patient assessment.
8. Understand complications during the dialysis application.
9. Appropriately complete an application for employment.
10. Demonstrate Job readiness for health professionals.
11. Update résumé.
12. Interview in a professional manner.
COURSE 8
CL 102
PHLEBOTOMY
60/66/6.0/5.0 This course will introduce the student to phlebotomy including basic human anatomy and physiology, anatomy
and physiology of the circulatory system, phlebotomy equipment, and phlebotomy techniques and safety. The student
will learn customer service and patient compliance. Specimen considerations and preparation and handling, as well
as special procedures, will also be taught in this course. The student will learn the process of urinalysis including
collection and handling, patient instruction, and testing.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Review and understand anatomy and physiology.
Western Tech Catalog | 54
2. Perform capillary puncture & serology & hematology testing, screen and follow-up test results.
3. Use methods of quality control in the lab and demonstrate proper documentation.
4. Perform medical asepsis. Perform venipuncture using the evacuated tube, syringe, and butterfly
methods.
5. Collect and process blood, urine, and other specimen for testing.
6. Perform Microscopic urinalysis.
7. Perform pediatric urine collection.
8. Perform male and female catheterization.
9. Understand and implement CLIA and OSHA.
10. Obtain throat specimen for microbiological testing, rapid strep test.
11. Demonstrate Job readiness for health professionals.
12. Update résumé.
13. Understand employer expectations.
COURSE 9
XR 105
FUNDAMENTALS OF X-RAY
60/66/6.0/5.0 This NCT course is designed to provide the student with the fundamental principles of X-ray technology in
addition to generating quality X-ray films. Students will upon completion be eligible to register with the Texas
Medical Board (TMB). The training involves the use of various types of operational non-ionized x-ray equipment.
The student will learn about the auxiliary medical staff, competency in technique selection, radiation protection for
minimal exposure to patients and staff, radiographic anatomy and physiology, in addition to positioning patients all
are to aid in delivering quality radiographic films to the physician.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to: 1. Understand radiation safety and protection.
2. Recognize and handle radiographic equipment.
3. Complete image production and evaluation.
4. Practice and perform skull, spine, lower and upper extremities, abdomen and chest X-rays.
5. Register with the Texas Medical Board (TMB) as Non-Certified Radiologic Technician / NCT
COURSE 10
INT 105
INTERNSHIP
0/0/162/3.5/3.5 Students must satisfactorily complete all 9 core courses, which are administered throughout the program before
being placed in an internship participating site. The internship enables the student to apply the knowledge and skills
learned throughout the theoretical and clinical setting in the work environment. The student, with no financial
remuneration, is placed in a medical office or clinic and is closely supervised to ensure that the school’s objectives
are being met. Internship is 162 hours in length.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Demonstrate effective customer service skills.
2. Recognize improvement in performance and knowledge.
3. Understand that there is more than one way of acceptable performance.
4. Apply technical skills learned in the classroom in both the administrative and clinical areas.
5. Obtain a satisfactory grade on their final evaluation.
6. Learn how to properly interact with patients.
7. Establish a network of support through colleagues.
8. Understand legal guidelines/ requirements for healthcare and principles of medical ethics and decision
making.
9. Understand concepts of mental health and applied psychology.
10. Recognize and respond to verbal and nonverbal communication.
11. Demonstrate proper telephone etiquette to include triaging and responding appropriately to emergency
calls.
12. Check patients in for office visits; establish, maintain and file patient medical records; and schedule
appointments.
13. Understand and demonstrate the concept of Electronic Health Records.
14. Update resume, final copy turned in to Program Director and Career services.
Western Tech Catalog | 55
ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or
employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY Automotive service technicians and mechanics held about 739,900 jobs in 2014. Numerous openings will be in
automobile dealerships and independent repair shops, and about 1 in 10 automotive service technicians and
mechanics were self-employed in 2014. Employment of automotive service technicians and mechanics is projected
to grow 5 percent from 2014 to 2024, about as fast as the average for all occupations. The number of vehicles in
use continues to rise, and more entry-level service technicians will be needed to perform basic maintenance and
repair, such as replacing brake pads and changing oil. New technologies, however, such as electric vehicles, may
limit future demand for automotive service technicians and mechanics because they will be more reliable and thus
require less maintenance and repair. Of these workers, those who have completed formal postsecondary training
programs or achieved ASE certification should enjoy the best job prospects. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook
Handbook, 2016 - 2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 51,540 National Employment 2012: 701,100
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 60,680 Projected National Employment 2022: 761,500
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 9,140 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 60,400
Percent Change 2012-2022: 17.70% Percent Change 2012-2022: 8.60%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $18.85 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $19.22
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
1,305 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
915 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
CUSTOM TRAINING GROUP A tremendous opportunity awaits Western Tech Automotive Graduates!
With today’s shortage of skilled automobile and diesel technicians, some manufacturers are willing to provide
outstanding benefits to attract new employees. Manufacturers are promoting FREE training, education and
placement with five luxury automotive and diesel manufacturers.
If minimum qualifications are met, students who complete Western Tech’s Automotive Technology program
may be accepted for one of the following manufacturer’s training programs: AUDI TTC, VOLKSWAGEN
VSTT, BMW STEP, MERCEDES-BENZ ELITE, VOLVO.
Western Tech Catalog | 56
HOW TO PARTICIPATE IN MANUFACTURER TRAINING PROGRAMS Participation in these programs is available to graduates of Western Tech’s Automotive Technology Program.
Graduates must pass a written test and an interview with the Custom Training Group (CTG). Only students with
outstanding attendance records, grades, and attitudes are allowed to take the test. If selected, the student’s tuition is
paid by the manufacturer. After completing the training, CTG assists the graduates by sending out blanket résumés
to all of its participating dealerships. It’s really a great opportunity for the students, and we at Western Tech are
proud to be involved with CTG.
NATEF MASTER LEVEL ACCREDITED PROGRAM IN
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY
WHAT DOES ASE MASTER LEVEL ACCREDITED IN
AUTOMOTIVE MEAN? NATEF Master Level Accredited in Automotive means that Western Tech’s
Automotive Technology program has been accredited by the National Automotive
Technicians Education Foundation (NATEF), a division of the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence in the following nine subject areas:
A1. Engine Repair
A2. Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
A3. Manual Drive Train and Axles
A4. Suspension and Steering
A5. Brakes
A6. Electrical/Electronic Systems
A7. Heating and Air Conditioning
A8. Engine Performance
G1. Auto Maintenance and Light Repair
HOW DID WESTERN TECH’S AUTOMOTIVE PROGRAM BECOME NATEF
ACCREDITED? Western Tech completed an extensive evaluation and application process. Upon NATEF’s review, an evaluation
team conducted an on-site inspection of our campus to review the curriculum, teaching techniques, equipment and
training aids, task sheets, tools, budget, and safety measures. Western Tech remains one of the few private career
schools in the nation to be NATEF Master LEVEL ACCREDITED in Automotive.
HOW DOES A WESTERN TECH GRADUATE BENEFIT FROM AN NATEF MASTER
LEVEL ACCREDITED PROGRAM? To become ASE Certified, a person must have two years’ work experience and pass ASE certification
examinations. A graduate of the school’s ASE Master Level Accredited program is able to substitute the training for
one year of work experience toward ASE’s two-year work requirement. In addition, information covered in the
curriculum helps to prepare students to take the ASE examinations.
EXPERIENCED INSTRUCTIONAL STAFF Our instructors are required to have recent and sufficient field experience and training before joining the Western
Tech team. They share insights with our students that might otherwise take years to learn. We continually update our
instructors with seminars and workshops to keep them abreast of new technology. In turn, they pass this knowledge
on to our students. All of Western Tech’s automotive instructors are required to be ASE Certified. A large percentage
of the instructional staff is Master Certified in all areas of the automobile.
NATEF MASTER LEVEL ACCREDITED Western Tech is one of the few private career schools in the nation to offer an automotive program that is Master
Level Accredited by National Automotive Technicians Education Foundation (NATEF), a division of the Institute
for Automotive Services Excellence (ASE).
FIAT CHYSLER AUTOMOTIVE (FCA), MOPAR CAP LOCAL SCHOOL TRANING There is great demand for high quality and skilled automotive technicians. This demand has outpaced the number
of technicians the regular OEM programs can produce and FCA (Fiat Chrysler Automobiles) is the first to look at
high quality colleges to help their local dealers find the technicians they need. The foundational training that you
receive in class paired with the factory FCA training sets you apart from the other applicants in the industry, whether
applying at a FCA dealer or not. The fact that you will be able to show success and completion in actual dealership
OEM training demonstrates your ability to learn and a solid baseline of technical knowledge. These credentials make
Western Tech Catalog | 57
you employable, more so than just a college education alone. Together they prepare you for success right now and
into the future. The thirty-six Chrysler modules are a required part of the program, and accounts for 20% of the
student’s grade. Successful graduates upon leaving the program who has completed Level 0 and 1 can then begin
working at a FCA dealership at a Level 2 status, and complete 80-90% of the warranty work that comes in while
continuing to be trained in Level 2. This is the great value in the CAP Local program. Even if the graduate does not
choose a FCA dealership, the OEM training they have received will look good on a resume and demonstrates their
ability to complete factory training.
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Occupational Studies in Automotive Technology program will receive
training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination of classes
being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 80% of the training and education
on-ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
Driver’s License Requirement
To be accepted into the Automotive Technology program, in addition to the general admissions requirements and
enrollment procedure, a prospective student must possess a valid driver’s license before being allowed to start class.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Automotive Technology program is a hybrid program. It has established technical standards and
essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and essential
functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program satisfactorily.
Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets the
set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow students,
internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
5. The ability to detect or tell the differences between sounds that vary in pitch and loudness.
6. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
7. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
8. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
9. The ability to quickly and repeatedly adjust the controls of a machine or a vehicle to exact positions.
10. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of one
or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
11. Sufficient manual dexterity, strength, and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together with
your arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
12. The ability to coordinate two or more limbs while sitting, standing, or lying down.
13. The ability to use your abdominal and lower back muscles to support part of your body repeatedly or
continuously over time without ‘giving out’ or fatiguing.
14. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs.
15. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
16. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech Catalog | 58
The College does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
AOS DEGREE IN AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY
COURSES 1-17
1560 CLOCK HOURS
65.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
60.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The objective of the Automotive Technology
Program is to train the student as an entry level
automotive technician by providing them with the skills
and knowledge to repair today’s highly technical
automobiles. The student will be trained in automotive
electronics and computer systems, diagnosis, engine
rebuild, fuel and emission systems, air conditioning,
brakes, steering and suspension, and drive trains.
Students will learn the soft skills needed to be
successful in the automotive work place to include
applied math, business writing and psychology.
Graduates of this program will be prepared for entry
level positions as technicians or in independent auto
repair shops, automotive dealerships, tune-up shops and
fleet vehicle maintenance.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may differ from that
included in the program outline below.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENT Students graduating from this program must pass the
ASE G1 exam prior to their scheduled graduation date
and students must actively participate in all assigned
MOPAR modules.
Western Tech Catalog | 59
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE
ON CAMPUS/
ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU 101 Foundations 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
2 FS 101 Fuel Systems & Emission
Controls
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
3 PSY 202 Psychology for Success
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
4 ES 103 Basic
Electronics 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
5 AD 104 Automotive Diagnosis
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
6 AM 101 Applied
Mathematics 100 50/50 80/20 4.5 4.5
7 EN 106 Automotive Engine
Fundamentals
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
8 BR 107 Automotive Brakes
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
9 SS 108 Suspension &
Steering 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
10 PT 109 Powertrain / Transfer Case
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
11 AT 110
Automatic
Transmission
& Transaxle
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
12 AC 201
Automotive
Air
Conditioning
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
13 HYB 202 Hybrid, Electric &
Fuel Cell
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
14 AFS 203 Advanced Fuel Systems
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
15 AE 204 Advanced
Electronics 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
16 BWE 104 Business Writing
Essentials
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
17 AIN 207 Automotive Internship
Program
160 8/0/152 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours – AOS Degree in
Automotive Technology 1560
578/830/
152
65.5 60.0
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an
introduction to their field of study with particular
emphasis on providing an overview of important post-
secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-
management, academic integrity, effective use of
Western Technical College’s resources, and
comprehensive understanding of critical thinking skills.
Students will learn how to research industries, gain
better understand of employer expectations and begin
working on a chronological resume. Students will
Western Tech Catalog | 60
complete the course with a better understanding of their
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion
of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to:
13. Navigate the library, and conduct basic
research functions.
14. Complete an effective resume.
15. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry
requirements for his/her chosen field of
study.
16. Conduct a self-directed job search.
17. Apply critical thinking skills throughout
the program.
18. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
FS 101
FUEL SYSTEMS AND EMISSION
CONTROLS
40/60/4.5/4.0 The student will be introduced to the fundamentals
of design, construction, and operation of the internal
combustion, spark ignition engine's basic fuel and
emission control systems. Automotive safety and the
basic engine theories and laws, which govern the
formulas concerning force, work, torque, and power,
will be covered. This course will cover the fundamental
principles of the following systems: electronic fuel
injection, air intake, idle speed control, spark timing
control, positive crankcase ventilation, intake manifold
heat control, fuel pumps, fuel tanks, lines, and filters.
This course has no Chrysler modules.
During shop/lab work, the student will apply the
recommended safety procedures relating to the subject
matter. The student is required to identify and use the
proper automotive electronic fuel injection and
emission control systems service tools and equipment.
The student must perform diagnostic evaluation,
service, and repairs on each of the systems covered
during the course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose, service, and repair vehicles with
hot or cold no-start, hard start, poor
drivability, incorrect idle speed, flooding,
hesitation, surging, stalling, dieseling, and
emission problems on vehicles with
electronic fuel injection systems.
2. Inspect, test, and replace mechanical and
electrical fuel pumps, and pump control
systems.
3. Inspect, test, service, and replace positive
crankcase ventilation (PCV) filter/breather
cap, valves, hoses, tubes, and orifices.
4. Diagnose and repair emissions and
drivability problems caused by failure of
the exhaust gas recirculation valve
systems.
5. Perform exhaust system back pressure test.
6. Inspect and test components of the intake
air temperature control systems.
7. Inspect and test electronic fuel injection
system components.
COURSE 3
PSY 202
PSYCHOLOGY FOR SUCCESS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Psychology for Success course serves to
introduce the student to basic principles of psychology
and apply those principles to the work environment.
This course is designed to develop the student’s
communication and soft skills. This course is designed
to address the need employers have for skilled
employees who are proficient at problem-solving, who
possess communication skills, and who will commit to
a task. The student will be required to participate in
group discussions, group presentations, and individual
presentations on real-world practical applications.
The student can expect 15 hours of homework
during this course. This course includes three Chrysler
modules. Upon completion of this course, the student
will be able to do the following:
1. Discuss the importance of human
relations to organizations and careers.
2. Describe the contributions of four major
theorists to the study of human
motivation.
3. Discuss ways in which to behave ethically
at work.
4. Name the steps in conflict resolution.
5. Describe characteristics and roles of
effective team members.
6. Explain how to manage conflict.
7. Explain the importance of workplace
etiquette.
8. Describe career advancement strategies.
9. Describe ways to maintain a healthy
work-life balance.
COURSE 4
ES 103
BASIC ELECTRONICS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamental principles of the automobile's electrical
and electronic systems. The course covers the various
types of electrical circuits and how they operate, as well
as the theories and laws which dictate electrical circuit
behavior. The student will also learn the fundamentals
of design, construction, and operation of electrical
components, meters, wiring, and circuit diagrams. The
student will learn the concepts and functions of the body
control module (BCM), advanced lighting circuits,
electronic and conventional analog instrumentation,
indicator lights, warning lights, electrical accessories
and direct current motors. Starting and charging
systems will also be covered. This course includes two
Chrysler modules.
Shop/Lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use electrical /electronic system service tools and
equipment to diagnose and repair the electrical /
electronic systems and their corresponding
components. The student will learn to read and interpret
electrical wiring diagram circuits and perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on the following
systems: starting, charging, electrical accessories
Western Tech Catalog | 61
advanced lighting systems, electronic instrumentation,
chassis electronic controls and body computers.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Check basic and complex electrical
circuits with a test light and digital multi-
meter and be able to determine needed
repairs.
2. Check voltage and voltage drop in
electrical circuits using a digital multi-
meter (DVOM), and determine necessary
repairs.
3. Measure and diagnose the causes of
abnormal key-off battery drain, find
shorts, grounds, opens, and resistance
problems in electrical circuits and
determine necessary repairs.
4. Perform battery capacity and state of
charge test and determine necessary
repairs. Diagnose charging system
concerns that cause an undercharge, no
start or an overcharged condition.
5. Perform starter current draw and circuit
voltage drop test and determine necessary
repairs.
6. Inspect and test switches, connectors,
relays, and wires of electrical / electronic
circuits.
7. Diagnose incorrect operation of motor-
driven accessory-driven circuits and repair
as needed.
8. Use wiring diagrams to diagnose
electrical/electronic circuit problems.
COURSE 5
AD 104
AUTOMOTIVE DIAGNOSIS
20/30/2.0/2.0 This course will review the diagnosis procedures for
the basic systems related to the automotive engine. The
course will cover the use of diagnostic test tools and
scanners to detect and interpret diagnostic trouble codes
(DTC) and apply the necessary repairs. The student will
be required to use various test equipment to analyze
emission levels and determine the cause of abnormal
emission readings. The student will practice automotive
safety procedures and perform diagnosis on the
following engine systems: cooling, lubrication,
ignition, emission controls, spark timing controls,
intake, and manifold heat controls. Engine tune up
procedures will also be covered during this course. This
course includes one Chrysler modules.
During lab/shop time, the student will learn to apply
the recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures relating to the subject matter. The student
will also learn to use automotive emission analyzers and
engine oscilloscopes, hand tools and hand held test
equipment to determine general overall engine
condition.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Perform cylinder power balance tests and
determine necessary repairs.
2. Perform engine absolute (vacuum/boost)
manifold pressure tests and determine
necessary repairs.
3. Inspect and test distributors and service as
needed.
4. Inspect and test ignition secondary circuit
wiring and components, and replace as
needed.
5. Diagnose engine mechanical, electrical,
fuel and emission problems with an
oscilloscope and engine diagnostic
equipment and determine needed action.
6. Diagnose no starting, drivability, and
emission problems on vehicles with
Distributor Ignition (DI) systems and
determine needed repair.
COURSE 6
AM 101
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
50/50/4.5/4.5
During the first several days of class, the students
will receive a general school and program orientation,
to include training on how to utilize the Learning
Resource Center. The Applied Mathematics course will
re-familiarize the student with basic applied
mathematics functions and concepts as they apply to
Automotive Technology. The student will work on
decimals, common fractions, ratios and proportions,
and percentages as they apply to the automotive field.
The math course will improve the student’s ability to
navigate through some complex formulas in this field
and touch on a few elements of the automotive business.
This course includes one Chrysler module. The student
can expect 100 hours of homework during this course.
At the conclusion of this course, students will be able
to do the following:
1. Perform the basic arithmetic operations of
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
division of whole numbers
2. Perform the basic arithmetic operations
using common fractions and decimal
fractions
3. Calculate simple percentages
4. Calculate discount, profit and loss, and
commissions
5. Calculate interest and taxes
6. Calculate and convert between English
linear and metric measurements
7. Calculate rations and proportions
8. Use formulas for measuring area, volume,
and horsepower
9. Calculate circuit parameters using Ohm’s
Law
COURSE 7
EN 106
AUTOMOTIVE ENGINE
FUNDAMENTALS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the automotive internal combustion, spark ignition
engine. The student will learn automotive safety
practices and the theory and laws of physics involved
with the automobile’s engine operation. The student
will be taught the principal operation of a number of
engine systems, to include: lubrication, cooling, oil,
Western Tech Catalog | 62
fuel, intake, exhaust, manifolds, cylinder heads,
cylinder block assemblies, and valve train systems. The
student will learn to perform diagnosis, service and
repair on these same engine systems. This course
includes five Chrysler modules.
The student will learn to correctly identify and use
automotive engine service tools and equipment. Engine
removal and installation procedures are covered along
with disassembly, inspection, recondition and assembly
of the engine cylinder block and cylinder head
assemblies.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Inspect and test valve springs for
squareness, pressure and free height
comparison.
2. Adjust valves (mechanical or hydraulic
lifters).
3. Remove and inspect cylinder heads for
cracks and check gasket surface areas for
warpage, leaks, and passage conditions.
4. Inspect crankshaft for surface cracks and
journal damage.
5. Check oil passage condition.
6. Inspect and test radiator, pressure cap,
coolant recovery system, remove and
replace radiator assembly.
COURSE 8
BR 107
AUTOMOTIVE BRAKES
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course the student will be introduced to
the basic concepts involved in the brake system.
General safety practices, as well as safety procedures
specific to brake systems, will be covered. The student
will become familiar with how Pascal’s law is used to
increase force in a hydraulic system. The student will
learn the fundamentals of design and operation and
perform diagnosis, service and repair on the following
systems: master cylinders, power assist units, hydraulic
lines and valves, disc, drum, parking and antilock
brakes, electrical and electronic brake components. The
MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) are introduced
during this course. This course includes one Chrysler
module. During shop time, the student will be required
to apply safety practices and procedures.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Inspect, test, and replace metering (hold-
off), proportioning (balance), pressure
differential and combination valves.
2. Inspect, test, and replace components of
brake warning light systems.
3. Diagnose poor stopping, noise, pulling,
grabbing, dragging or pedal pulsation, and
determination of repairs.
4. Mount brake drum on lathe and machine
braking surfaces.
5. Refinish rotor according to manufacturer’s
recommendation.
6. Diagnose wheel locking, abnormal pedal
feel or pulsation, and noise problems.
COURSE 9
SS 108
SUSPENSION AND STEERING
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course the student will be introduced to
the automotive suspension and steering systems.
Automotive safety procedures, and the use of precision
steering and suspension measuring equipment, will be
introduced. Basic theories such as static balance,
dynamic balance, and compressibility will be taught
followed by an introduction to the fundamentals of
design and operation of the following systems: front
suspension, rear suspension, wheel bearing, tires,
wheels, shock absorbers, struts, steering columns,
steering linkage mechanisms, power steering pumps,
rack and pinion gears, computer-controlled suspension
systems, frames and four-wheel alignment. This course
includes one Chrysler module. The student will be
required to perform diagnosis, service, and repair of
these same systems during shop/lab time. Also during
shop/lab, the student will apply the recommended
automotive shop and personal safety procedures and
learn to identify and use automotive suspension and
steering equipment service tools and equipment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose short-and long-arm suspension
system noises, body sway, and uneven
riding height problems and determine
necessary repairs.
2. Remove, inspect, and replace MacPherson
Strut cartridge, and assemble strut coil
spring, insulator, and upper strut bearing
mount.
3. Inspect, remove, and replace shock
absorbers.
4. Balance wheel and tire assembly (static
and dynamic) utilizing the latest
computerized balancing machines.
5. Diagnose tire wear pattern and determine
needed repairs.
6. Perform a total four-wheel alignment
utilizing the latest computerized alignment
machine.
COURSE 10
PT 109
POWERTRAIN / TRANSFER CASE
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course introduces the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the automotive powertrain systems which transmit the
engine’s power to the vehicle’s drive wheels. The
student will learn the safety procedures and the basic
theories that directly relate to the powertrain system
such as engine torque and torque multiplication. The
student will also learn about the components of the
powertrain system and their sub-systems. The principal
operation of the following systems will also be covered:
clutches, manual transmissions, transaxles, front drive
axles, drive shafts, universal joints, differentials, and
rear drive axles, advance four-wheel systems, transfer
gear case as well as powertrain electrical and electronic
systems. This course includes two Chrysler modules.
The student will perform diagnostic service and repair
Western Tech Catalog | 63
work on these same systems during the shop/lab portion
of the course. The student will be required to apply the
recommended shop and personal safety procedures
related to powertrain systems during the recommended
student shop/lab time.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose clutch noise, binding, slippage,
pulsation, and chatter problems.
2. Diagnose transmission noise, hard
shifting, jumping out of gear, and fluid
leakage, and determine the necessary
repairs.
3. Disassemble, clean, and reassemble
transmission components.
4. Diagnose front-wheel drive (FWD) and
rear-wheel drive (RWD) shaft and
universal/ constant velocity (CV) joint
noise and vibration problems and
determine the necessary repairs.
5. Inspect, adjust, repair or replace the
hydraulic slave and master cylinders, lines,
and hoses.
6. Inspect and replace the pressure plate
assembly and clutch disc.
7. Diagnose differential noise and determine
and perform needed adjustments or
repairs.
8. Diagnose transfer gear case noise and
determine and perform needed adjustment
or repairs.
COURSE 11
AT 110
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND
TRANSAXLES
40/60/4.5/4.0 In this course, the students will learn the
fundamentals of design, operation, and construction of
the automobile’s automatic transmissions and
transaxles, which uses a combination of a torque
converter and a planetary gear system to change gear
ratios automatically. The students will review and
practice drive train theory and automatic transmissions
and transaxle theories of operation prior to learning the
following systems: hydraulic circuits and apply devices,
power flow, planetary gears, shafts, torque converter,
clutch engagement and the basic transmission and
transaxle electrical/electronic components, sensors, and
their respective computer-controlled circuits. This
course includes two Chrysler modules.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use the required service tools and equipment necessary
to perform basic diagnosis, service, and repairs on
automatic transmission and transaxles.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Perform lock-up torque converter system
tests and determine needed repairs.
2. Inspect, adjust, or replace manual shift
valve, throttle linkages or cables and check
gear select indicator (as applicable).
3. Explain how Pascal’s law applies to the
operation of automatic transmissions.
4. Check torque converter stator clutch
operation and measure torque converter
endplay.
5. Remove, disassemble, clean, inspect,
reassemble and reinstall transmissions and
transaxles.
6. Inspect, test, and replace electrical/
electronic transmissions and transaxles.
7. Retrieve trouble codes from common
electronically controlled automatic
transmissions switches and sensors.
8. Diagnose & recondition electronic
automatic transmissions/transaxles.
COURSE 12
AC 201
AUTOMOTIVE AIR CONDITIONING
40/60/4.5/4.0 During the theory portion of Course AC-204, the
students will be introduced to the automotive heating
and air conditioning systems. The students will learn
health and safety practices, the proper use and care of
air conditioning tools and equipment, as well as the
basic theories, rules and regulations that apply to
automotive air conditioning systems. The students will
learn the fundamental principles of temperature,
pressures and the differences between sensible, latent,
and specific heat values before they are taught the
fundamentals of design, construction and operation of
the air conditioning system, system components,
compressors and clutches, case and duct systems,
retrofit, system controls, engine cooling and comfort
heating systems. This course includes four Chrysler
modules.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use automotive air conditioning service tools and
equipment. Students will diagnose service and repair
air conditioning systems, system components, system
controls, compressors, clutches, heating and engine
cooling systems. Manifold gauge reading and
interpretation as well as retrofit from R-12 to R-134A
will be performed and covered in detail.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Conduct a performance test of the
A/C system and determine needed
repairs.
2. Perform leak test on A/C system and
determine needed repairs.
3. Diagnose A/C system problems that
cause the protection devices
(pressure thermal and PCM) to
interrupt system operation and
determine needed repairs.
4. Inspect, test, and replace A/C
compressor, clutch components, or
assembly.
5. Inspect evaporator housing water
drain and repair as needed.
6. Diagnose failures in the electrical
controls of heating and A/C systems
and determine needed repairs.
Western Tech Catalog | 64
COURSE 13
HYB 202
HYBRID, ELECTRIC AND FUEL-CELL
VEHICLES
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamental principles of the electric battery-operated
Hybrid, Electric and Fuel-Cell Vehicles. Prior to the
introduction of the theory and operation of the current
Hybrid Vehicle Technology, the student will review the
basic electrical systems that were formerly covered in
course ES-102, Basic Electronics. The student will
learn hybrid safety, hybrid benefits and the concepts
and basic functions of the following Hybrid Systems:
Series, Parallel, and Series Parallel, Mild and Assist.
The power-driven operating procedures for the
following auxiliary accessory systems: Battery System,
Power Brakes, Power Steering, Light Circuits,
Electronic Instrumentation, Indicator Lights, Warning
Devices and Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
System will also be discussed in detail. Hydrogen and
Prototype Fuel Cell Electric Vehicles and other possible
hybrid vehicles will also be discussed. This course
includes four Chrysler modules.
Shop/Lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use the hybrid vehicle service tools and equipment to
diagnose and repair the hybrid systems and its
corresponding components.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. List the precautions that must be adhered
to when working with or around high
voltage electrical systems.
2. Explain how regenerative braking works.
3. Describe the difference between vehicles
that are powered by electricity and those
that powered by an internal combustion
engine.
4. Describe some precautions that should be
followed when troubleshooting and
repairing an electric vehicle.
5. Describe how the operation of accessories
and auxiliary systems in a hybrid electric
vehicle differ from those in an internal
combustion engine vehicle and a battery
electric vehicle.
6. Explain why high voltage is needed in
assist-type vehicles.
7. Describe the special considerations and
procedures that must be followed when
servicing the different hybrid vehicle
systems.
COURSE 14
AFS 203
ADVANCED FUEL SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0 The students will review conventional and
computer-controlled carburetors, emission control
systems, on-board computers and computer input
sensors before being introduced to the fundamentals of
design, construction and operation of the common
components found in most electronic fuel injection
(EFI) systems. The students will learn automotive
safety practices and the basic theories of the following
automotive systems: throttle body, port fuel, sequential
fuel injection systems; electronic ignition systems and
On-Board Diagnostic II systems (OBDII), turbo
chargers, and superchargers. This course includes three
Chrysler modules.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying automotive
shop and personal safety procedures and learning how
to correctly identify and use the automotive fuel
injection service tools and diagnostic equipment.
Students will diagnose service and repair the following
systems: electronic fuel injection systems, electronic
ignition systems, On-Board Diagnostic II systems
(OBDII) and their corresponding sub-systems.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Connect and prepare a 4 or 5 gas emission
analyzer to test exhaust emissions. The
student will learn to read and interpret
exhaust gas emission readings and
determine needed repairs.
2. Inspect and test fuel pressure regulation
system components to adjust, repair and/or
replace as necessary.
3. Inspect and test fuel injectors and replace
as needed.
4. Inspect and test cold enrichment system
components and adjust or replace as
necessary.
5. Inspect throttle body mounting plates, air
induction and filtration system, intake
manifold, gaskets and replace as needed.
COURSE 15
AE 204
ADVANCED ELECTRONICS
40/60/4.5/4.0 The automotive electronics course will introduce the
students to the automotive computer systems. The
students will learn automotive safety practices, the
purpose and function of special computers,
electrical/electronic diagnostic test equipment, and the
basic theory of computer operation prior to the study of
the automotive computer systems. The students will
also be taught the fundamentals of design, construction,
and basic operation of the following electronic systems:
computers and input sensors, distributor and electronic
ignitions, fuel pumps, tanks, lines, filters, electronic fuel
injection, emission controls, body computer, electronic
instrument clusters, vehicle theft security, passive
restraint, antilock brake and traction control, computer-
controlled suspension, air conditioning, transmissions
and transaxles systems. This course includes six
Chrysler modules.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use automotive computer systems service tools and
diagnostic equipment. The students will perform
diagnosis, service and repairs on the above-mentioned
systems.
The students will operate computer scan tools,
digital storage oscilloscopes, engine and emission
analyzers and other test equipment that will allow them
Western Tech Catalog | 65
to monitor the performance of emission system and
diagnose component or system failures.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose emissions and drivability
problems resulting from failure of
computerized engine controls with and
without stored diagnostic trouble codes
and determine needed repairs.
2. Inspect, test, adjust and replace
computerized engine control system
sensors, actuators, and circuits.
3. Locate and interpret vehicle and major
components identification number (VIN,
vehicle certification labels and calibration
decals)
4. Diagnose no-starting, drivability, and
emission problems on vehicles with
electronic ignition (distributor less)
systems and determine needed repair.
5. Diagnose hot or cold no starting, hard
starting, poor drivability, incorrect idle
speed, poor idle, flooding, hesitation,
surging, engine misfire, power loss,
stalling and emission problems on vehicles
with injection-type fuel systems and
determine needed repairs.
COURSE 16
BWE 104
BUSINESS WRITING ESSENTIALS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Business Writing Essentials course will teach
students the skills required to write business memos,
business letters, and technical reports and to do research
when necessary. Students will prepare a resume that can
be used throughout their program. Team and individual
effort will be required for a student to be successful in
this course. A formal oral presentation will be required.
This course includes one review Chrysler module.
The student can expect 10 hours of homework
during this course. Upon completion of this course, the
student will be able to:
1. Produce memos, reports, and proposals.
2. Produce a resume.
3. Use the Learning Resource Center.
4. Use proper language, organization, and
citation styles to produce written
communication.
5. Use proper language, organization, and
speaking styles in oral communication.
6. Use peer review and peer editing
teamwork to produce polished oral and
written communication.
COURSE 17
AIN 207
AUTOMOTIVE INTERNSHIP PROGRAM
8/0/152/3.5/3.5 In this course, students will enter Western Tech’s
Automotive Technology’s Internship Program. The
Internship Program will allow students to experience
situations that occur during the daily operation of a
working shop. Students will be able to apply the
knowledge and skills they have learned in previous
courses to the workplace environment. Students
entering this program must have satisfactorily
completed all previous courses of the Automotive
Technology Program. “Satisfactorily completed”
includes meeting all academic and attendance
requirements and having demonstrated entry-level
competency in those skills identified as Graduate
Warranty Skills.
Each student will be placed in an approved
automotive repair, service, or maintenance facility
without monetary compensation to continue his/her
training alongside experienced automotive technicians.
The Internship Program Coordinator will closely
supervise each student's progress for a total of one-
hundred sixty (160) hours. Supervision will consist of
reviewing weekly student evaluations and
scheduled/unscheduled weekly extern site contact.
Student evaluations will be completed by the extern site
manager or supervisor on a weekly basis.
The Internship Program Coordinator will review the
student's weekly evaluation as well as any extern site
recommendations with each student individually.
During the review, any deficiencies indicated will be
addressed with the student. The student will work with
the Internship Program Coordinator to establish an
individual study program designed to address and
correct the areas that need improvement. The students
will follow their individual study program during the
weekly classroom sessions until satisfactorily
completed. This course includes no Chrysler modules.
The student must successfully complete the
Internship Program before they will be allowed to
graduate and receive their diplomas. While at the extern
site and upon completion of this course, each student
will have:
1. Demonstrated entry-level competency of the
automotive skills identified as Graduate
Warranty Skills in a repair, service, or
maintenance environment.
2. Demonstrated various communication skills
with management and coworkers while
performing the duties of an automotive
technician.
3. Demonstrate the ability to work as a team
member.
4. Demonstrate the ability to understand and
accept the responsibilities of an automotive
technician in the workplace.
5. Internships provide students the opportunity
to apply their knowledge and skills learned in
school at an actual employer’s job site.
Western Tech Catalog | 66
ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY
IN LIGHT DUTY DIESEL Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY IN LIGHT
DUTY DIESEL
Automotive service technicians and mechanics held about 739,900 jobs in 2014. Numerous openings will be in
automobile dealerships and independent repair shops, and about 1 in 10 automotive service technicians and
mechanics were self-employed in 2014. Employment of automotive service technicians and mechanics is projected
to grow 5 percent from 2014 to 2024. Technicians use their extensive knowledge of engine management, emission,
fuel, electrical, and ignition systems to diagnose issues that prevent engines from performing efficiently. Extensive
knowledge of computer controls, the ability to diagnose electrical and hydraulic problems, and other specialized
skills are needed to work on these complex components. Automotive training is strong competition for entry-level
jobs. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 51,540 National Employment 2012: 701,100
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 60,680 Projected National Employment 2022: 761,500
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 9,140 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 60,400
Percent Change 2012-2022: 17.70% Percent Change 2012-2022: 8.60%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $18.85 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $19.22
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
1,305 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
915 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 67
FIAT CHYSLER AUTOMOTIVE (FCA), MOPAR CAP LOCAL SCHOOL TRANING There is great demand for high quality and skilled automotive technicians. This demand has outpaced the number
of technicians the regular OEM programs can produce and FCA (Fiat Chrysler Automobiles) is the first to look at
high quality colleges to help their local dealers find the technicians they need. The foundational training that you
receive in class paired with the factory FCA training sets you apart from the other applicants in the industry, whether
applying at a FCA dealer or not. The fact that you will be able to show success and completion in actual dealership
OEM training demonstrates your ability to learn and a solid baseline of technical knowledge. These credentials make
you employable, more so than just a college education alone. Together they prepare you for success right now and
into the future. The thirty-five Chrysler modules are a required part of the program. Successful graduates upon
leaving the program who has completed Level 0 and 1 can then begin working at a FCA dealership at a Level 2
status, and complete 80-90% of the warranty work that comes in while continuing to be trained in Level 2. This is
the great value in the CAP Local program. Even if the graduate does not choose a FCA dealership, the OEM training
they have received will look good on a resume and demonstrates their ability to complete factory training.
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY IN LIGHT DUTY DIESEL PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Occupational Studies in Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in
Light Duty Diesel program will receive training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training
is provided in a combination of classes being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will
provide 80% of the training and education on-ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
Driver’s License Requirement
To be accepted into the Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Light Duty Diesel program, in addition
to the general admissions requirements and enrollment procedure, a prospective student must possess a valid driver’s
license before being allowed to start class.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Light Duty Diesel program is a hybrid
program. It has established technical standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below.
The ability to meet these standards and essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required
in order to complete the program satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential
functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, externship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and
sentences.
5. The ability to detect or tell the differences between sounds that vary in pitch and loudness.
6. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
7. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
8. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
9. The ability to quickly and repeatedly adjust the controls of a machine or a vehicle to exact positions.
Western Tech Catalog | 68
10. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of
one or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
11. Sufficient manual dexterity, strength, and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together
with your arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
12. The ability to coordinate two or more limbs while sitting, standing, or lying down.
13. The ability to use your abdominal and lower back muscles to support part of your body repeatedly or
continuously over time without ‘giving out’ or fatiguing.
14. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs.
15. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
16. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
AOS DEGREE IN AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY
IN LIGHT DUTY DIESEL
COURSES 1-17
1560 CLOCK HOURS
65.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
60.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The objective of the Associate of Occupational
Studies in Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty
in Light Duty Diesel is to train the students as
automotive technicians with special emphasis on Light
Duty Diesel powered vehicles. This program will
introduce the students to the basic fundamentals of
mechanics, as well as Light Duty Diesel related
technology. As a technician in today’s ever-growing
and ever-changing industry, a technician must be able
to adapt and keep up-to-date with new automotive
technologies, power concepts and ideas. With today’s
automotive manufacturing companies focusing on fuel
economy a modern technician must not only be able to
perform basic automotive mechanics, but he or she must
also understand diesel engine aspects as well. The
objective of this course is to prepare the students for
work in the Light Duty Diesel industry. Those who
successfully complete this program will be prepared for
entry-level positions in automotive dealerships,
independent garages, Light Duty diesel specialized
shops, and accessory parts companies. Graduates from
this program will be able to apply their training as entry
level technicians in this fast paced and growing Light
Duty diesel industry. Students will be trained in the
following ASE areas:
• A1 – Engine Repair
• A2 – Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
• A3 – Manual Drive Train & Axles
• A4 – Suspension & Steering
• A5 – Brakes
• A6 – Electrical/Electronic Systems
• A7 – Heating & Air Conditioning
• A8 – Engine Performance
• A9 – Light Vehicle Diesel Engines
TIME CODES
The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in
class or lab per course and the subsequent number of
credit hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may differ
from that included in the program outline below.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENT Students graduating from this program must pass the
ASE A9 exam prior to their scheduled graduation date
and students must actively participate in all assigned
MOPAR modules.
Western Tech Catalog | 69
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY IN LIGHT DUTY DIESEL
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE ON
CAMPUS/ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU 101 Foundations 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
2 FS 101 Fuel Systems & Emission
Controls
100 40/60 80/20
4.5 4.0
3 PSY 202 Psychology
for Success 50 20/30
80/20 2.0 2.0
4 ES 103 Basic
Electronics 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
5 AD 104 Automotive Diagnosis
50 20/30 80/20
2.0 2.0
6 AM 101 Applied
Mathematics 100 50/50
80/20 4.5 4.5
7 EN 106 Automotive Engine
Fundamentals
100 40/60 80/20
4.5 4.0
8 BR 107 Automotive
Brakes 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
9 SS 108 Suspension &
Steering 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
10 PT 109 Powertrain /
Transfer Case 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
11 AT 110
Automatic
Transmission
& Transaxle
100 40/60
80/20/
4.5 4.0
12 LDD AC
201
Air
Conditioning 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
13 LDD DEA
202
Light Duty
Diesel Engines &
Accessories
100 40/60
80/20
4.5 4.0
14 LDD FMD
203
Light Duty
Diesel Fuel & Emission
Systems with Diagnosis
100 40/60
80/20
4.5 4.0
15 LDD ABE
204
Light Duty
Diesel
Advanced Body
Attachments
& Electronics
100 40/60
80/20
4.5 4.0
16 BWE 104
Business
Writing
Essentials
50 20/30
80/20
2.0 2.0
17 LDD IN 206
Light Duty Diesel
Internship
Program
160 8/0/152
00/00
3.5 3.5
Total Hours – AOS Degree in
Automotive Technology with a
Subspecialty in Light Duty Diesel
1560 578/830/
152
65.5 60.0
Western Tech Catalog | 70
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an
introduction to their field of study with particular
emphasis on providing an overview of important post-
secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-
management, academic integrity, effective use of
Western Technical College’s resources, and
comprehensive understanding of critical thinking skills.
Students will learn how to research industries, gain
better understand of employer expectations and begin
working on a chronological resume. Students will
complete the course with a better understanding of their
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion
of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to:
1. Navigate the library, and conduct basic
research functions.
2. Complete an effective resume.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry
requirements for his/her chosen field of
study.
4. Conduct a self-directed job search.
5. Apply critical thinking skills throughout
the program.
6. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
FS 101
FUEL SYSTEMS AND EMISSION
CONTROLS
40/60/4.5/4.0 The student will be introduced to the fundamentals
of design, construction, and operation of the internal
combustion, spark ignition engine's basic fuel and
emission control systems. Automotive safety and the
basic engine theories and laws, which govern the
formulas concerning force, work, torque, and power,
will be covered. This course will cover the fundamental
principles of the following systems: electronic fuel
injection, air intake, idle speed control, spark timing
control, positive crankcase ventilation, intake manifold
heat control, fuel pumps, fuel tanks, lines, and filters.
This course includes no Chrysler modules.
During shop/lab work, the student will apply the
recommended safety procedures relating to the subject
matter. The student is required to identify and use the
proper automotive electronic fuel injection and
emission control systems service tools and equipment.
The student must perform diagnostic evaluation,
service, and repairs on each of the systems covered
during the course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose, service, and repair vehicles with
hot or cold no-start, hard start, poor
drivability, incorrect idle speed, flooding,
hesitation, surging, stalling, dieseling, and
emission problems on vehicles with
electronic fuel injection systems.
2. Inspect, test, and replace mechanical and
electrical fuel pumps, and pump control
systems.
3. Inspect, test, service, and replace positive
crankcase ventilation (PCV) filter/breather
cap, valves, hoses, tubes, and orifices.
4. Diagnose and repair emissions and
drivability problems caused by failure of
the exhaust gas recirculation valve
systems.
5. Perform exhaust system back pressure test.
6. Inspect and test components of the intake
air temperature control systems.
7. Inspect and test electronic fuel injection
system components.
COURSE 3
PSY 202
PSYCHOLOGY FOR SUCCESS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Psychology for Success course serves to
introduce the student to basic principles of psychology
and apply those principles to the demanding work
environment of the 21st century. This course is
designed to develop the student’s communication and
soft skills. The emphasis of this course is to address
the need employers have for skilled employees, who
are also proficient at problem-solving, possesses
written and oral communication skills, and a
commitment to task. The student will be required to
actively participate in group discussions, group
presentations, and individual presentations, on real-
world practical applications, such as building self-
esteem, developing positive affirmations, and other
behavioral skill areas.
This course is designed to prepare students for the
job-seeking process. Students will be required to
demonstrate personal and job related behavioral skills
both orally and in written format. Résumé construction
and a review of the proper completion of the
employment application will be covered. Appropriate
dress, persuasive interviewing techniques and
mannerisms will be covered. The student can expect
fifteen hours of homework during this course. The
student can expect 15 hours of homework during this
course. This course includes three Chrysler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Discuss the importance of human
relations to organizations and careers.
2. Describe the contributions of four major
theorists to the study of human
motivation.
3. Discuss ways in which to behave ethically
at work.
4. Name the steps in conflict resolution.
5. Describe characteristics and roles of
effective team members.
6. Explain how to manage conflict.
7. Explain the importance of workplace
etiquette.
8. Describe career advancement strategies.
9. Describe ways to maintain a healthy
work-life balance.
Western Tech Catalog | 71
COURSE 4
ES 103
BASIC ELECTRONICS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamental principles of the auto and light duty diesel
electrical and electronic systems. The course covers
the various types of electrical circuits and how they
operate, as well as the theories and laws which dictate
electrical circuit behavior. The student will also learn
the fundamentals of design, construction, and
operation of electrical components, meters, wiring, and
circuit diagrams. The student will learn the concepts
and functions of the body control module (BCM),
advanced lighting circuits, electronic and conventional
analog instrumentation, indicator lights, warning
lights, electrical accessories and direct current motors.
Starting and charging systems will also be covered.
This course includes seven Chrysler modules.
Shop/Lab work will consist of applying the
recommended repair shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use electrical /electronic system service tools and
equipment to diagnose and repair the electrical /
electronic systems and their corresponding
components. The student will learn to read and
interpret electrical wiring diagram circuits and perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on the following
systems: starting, charging, electrical accessories
advanced lighting systems, electronic instrumentation,
chassis electronic controls and body computers.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Check basic and complex electrical
circuits with a test light and digital multi-
meter and be able to determine needed
repairs.
2. Check voltage and voltage drop in
electrical circuits using a digital multi-
meter (DVOM), and determine necessary
repairs.
3. Measure and diagnose the causes of
abnormal key-off battery drain, find
shorts, grounds, opens, and resistance
problems in electrical circuits and
determine necessary repairs.
4. Perform battery capacity and state of
charge test and determine necessary
repairs. Diagnose charging system
concerns that cause an undercharge, no
start or an overcharged condition.
5. Perform starter current draw and circuit
voltage drop test and determine necessary
repairs.
6. Inspect and test switches, connectors,
relays, and wires of electrical / electronic
circuits.
7. Diagnose incorrect operation of motor-
driven accessory-driven circuits and
repair as needed.
8. Use wiring diagrams to diagnose
electrical/electronic circuit problems.
COURSE 5
AD 104
AUTOMOTIVE DIAGNOSIS
20/30/2.0/2.0 This course will review the diagnosis procedures for
the basic systems related to the automotive engine. The
course will cover the use of diagnostic test tools and
scanners to detect and interpret diagnostic trouble codes
(DTC) and apply the necessary repairs. The student will
be required to use various test equipment to analyze
emission levels and determine the cause of abnormal
emission readings. The student will practice automotive
safety procedures and perform diagnosis on the
following engine systems: cooling, lubrication,
ignition, emission controls, spark timing controls,
intake, and manifold heat controls. Engine tune up
procedures will also be covered during this course. This
course includes three Chrysler modules.
During lab/shop time, the student will learn to apply
the recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures relating to the subject matter. The student
will also learn to use automotive emission analyzers and
engine oscilloscopes, hand tools and hand held test
equipment to determine general overall engine
condition.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Perform cylinder power balance tests and
determine necessary repairs.
2. Perform engine absolute (vacuum/boost)
manifold pressure tests and determine
necessary repairs.
3. Inspect and test distributors and service as
needed.
4. Inspect and test ignition secondary circuit
wiring and components, and replace as
needed.
5. Diagnose engine mechanical, electrical,
fuel and emission problems with an
oscilloscope and engine diagnostic
equipment and determine needed action.
6. Diagnose no-starting, drivability, and
emission problems on vehicles with
Distributor Ignition (DI) systems and
determine needed repair.
COURSE 6
AM 101
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
50/50/4.5/4.5 During the first several days of class, the students
will receive a general school and program orientation,
to include training on how to utilize the Learning
Resource Center. The Applied Mathematics course will
re-familiarize the student with basic applied
mathematics functions and concepts as they apply to
Automotive Technology. The student will work on
decimals, common fractions, ratios and proportions,
and percentages as they apply to the automotive field.
The math course will improve the student’s ability to
navigate through some complex formulas in this field
and touch on a few elements of the automotive business.
This course includes one Chrysler module. The student
can expect 100 hours of homework during this course.
Western Tech Catalog | 72
At the conclusion of this course, students will be able
to do the following:
1. Perform the basic arithmetic operations of
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
division of whole numbers
2. Perform the basic arithmetic operations
using common fractions and decimal
fractions
3. Calculate simple percentages
4. Calculate discount, profit and loss, and
commissions
5. Calculate interest and taxes
6. Calculate and convert between English
linear and metric measurements
7. Calculate rations and proportions
8. Use formulas for measuring area, volume,
and horsepower
9. Calculate circuit parameters using Ohm’s
Law
COURSE 7
EN 106
AUTOMOTIVE ENGINE
FUNDAMENTALS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the automotive internal combustion, spark ignition
engine. The student will learn automotive safety
practices and the theory and laws of physics involved
with the automobile’s engine operation. The student
will be taught the principal operation of a number of
engine systems, to include: lubrication, cooling, oil,
fuel, intake, exhaust, manifolds, cylinder heads,
cylinder block assemblies, and valve train systems.
The student will learn to perform diagnosis, service
and repair on these same engine systems. This course
includes six Chrysler modules.
The student will learn to correctly identify and
use automotive engine service tools and equipment.
Engine removal and installation procedures are
covered along with disassembly, inspection,
recondition and assembly of the engine cylinder block
and cylinder head assemblies.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Inspect and test valve springs for
squareness, pressure and free height
comparison.
2. Adjust valves (mechanical or hydraulic
lifters).
3. Remove and inspect cylinder heads for
cracks and check gasket surface areas for
warpage, leaks, and passage conditions.
4. Inspect crankshaft for surface cracks and
journal damage.
5. Check oil passage condition.
6. Inspect and test radiator, pressure cap,
coolant recovery system, remove and
replace radiator assembly.
COURSE 8
BR 107
AUTOMOTIVE BRAKES
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course the student will be introduced
to the basic concepts involved in the brake system.
General safety practices, as well as safety procedures
specific to brake systems, will be covered. The student
will become familiar with how Pascal’s law is used to
increase force in a hydraulic system. The student will
learn the fundamentals of design and operation and
perform diagnosis, service and repair on the following
systems: master cylinders, power assist units,
hydraulic lines and valves, disc, drum, parking and
antilock brakes, electrical and electronic brake
components. The MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets)
are introduced during this course. During shop time,
the student will be required to apply safety practices
and procedures. This course includes one Chrysler
module. The student can expect 25 hours of homework
during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Inspect, test, and replace metering (hold-
off), proportioning (balance), pressure
differential and combination valves.
2. Inspect, test, and replace components of
brake warning light systems.
3. Diagnose poor stopping, noise, pulling,
grabbing, dragging or pedal pulsation, and
determination of repairs.
4. Mount brake drum on lathe and machine
braking surfaces.
5. Refinish rotor according to
manufacturer’s recommendation.
6. Diagnose wheel locking, abnormal pedal
feel or pulsation, and noise problems.
COURSE 9
SS 108
SUSPENSION AND STEERING
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course the student will be introduced
to the automotive suspension and steering systems.
Automotive safety procedures, and the use of precision
steering and suspension measuring equipment, will be
introduced. Basic theories such as static balance,
dynamic balance, and compressibility will be taught
followed by an introduction to the fundamentals of
design and operation of the following systems: front
suspension, rear suspension, wheel bearing, tires,
wheels, shock absorbers, struts, steering columns,
steering linkage mechanisms, power steering pumps,
rack and pinion gears, computer-controlled suspension
systems, frames and four-wheel alignment. This course
includes one Chrysler module.
The student will be required to perform diagnosis,
service, and repair of these same systems during
shop/lab time. Also, during shop/lab, the student will
apply the recommended automotive shop and personal
safety procedures and learn to identify and use
automotive suspension and steering equipment service
tools and equipment. The student can expect 25 hours
of homework during this course.
Western Tech Catalog | 73
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Diagnose short-and long-arm suspension
system noises, body sway, and uneven
riding height problems and determine
necessary repairs.
2. Remove, inspect, and replace
MacPherson Strut cartridge, and assemble
strut coil spring, insulator, and upper strut
bearing mount.
3. Inspect, remove, and replace shock
absorbers.
4. Balance wheel and tire assembly (static
and dynamic) utilizing the latest
computerized balancing machines.
5. Diagnose tire wear pattern and determine
needed repairs.
6. Perform a total four-wheel alignment
utilizing the latest computerized
alignment machine.
COURSE 10
PT 109
POWERTRAIN / TRANSFER CASE
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course introduces the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the powertrain & transfer case systems which transmit
the engine’s power to the vehicle’s drive wheels. The
student will learn the safety procedures and the basic
theories that directly relate to the powertrain & transfer
case systems such as engine torque and torque
multiplication. The student will also learn about the
components of the powertrain & transfer case systems
and their sub-systems. The principal operation of the
following systems will also be covered: clutches,
manual transmissions, transaxles, front drive axles,
drive shafts, universal joints, differentials, and rear
drive axles, advance four-wheel systems, transfer gear
case as well as powertrain & transfer case systems
electrical and electronic systems. This course includes
two Chrysler modules.
The student will perform diagnostic service and
repair work on these same systems during the shop/lab
portion of the course. The student will be required to
apply the recommended shop and personal safety
procedures related to powertrain & transfer case
systems during the recommended student shop/lab
time. The student can expect 25 hours of homework
during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Diagnose clutch noise, binding, slippage,
pulsation, and chatter problems.
2. Diagnose transmission noise, hard
shifting, jumping out of gear, and fluid
leakage, and determine the necessary
repairs.
3. Disassemble, clean, and reassemble
transmission components.
4. Diagnose front-wheel drive (FWD) and
rear-wheel drive (RWD) shaft and
universal/ constant velocity (CV) joint
noise and vibration problems and
determine the necessary repairs.
5. Inspect, adjust, repair or replace the
hydraulic slave and master cylinders,
lines, and hoses.
6. Inspect and replace the pressure plate
assembly and clutch disc.
7. Diagnose differential noise and determine
and perform needed adjustments or
repairs.
8. Diagnose transfer gear case noise and
determine and perform needed adjustment
or repairs.
COURSE 11
AT 110
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
40/60/4.5/4.0 In this course, the students will learn the
fundamentals of design, operation, and construction of
the automobile’s automatic transmissions and
transaxles, which uses a combination of a torque
converter and a planetary gear system to change gear
ratios automatically. The students will review and
practice drive train theory and automatic transmissions
and transaxle theories of operation prior to learning the
following systems: hydraulic circuits and apply
devices, powerflow, planetary gears, shafts, torque
converter, clutch engagement and the basic
transmission and transaxle electrical/electronic
components, sensors, and their respective computer-
controlled circuits. This course includes two Chrysler
modules.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use the required service tools and equipment necessary
to perform basic diagnosis, service, and repairs on
automatic transmission and transaxles. The student can
expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Perform lock-up torque converter system
tests and determine needed repairs.
2. Inspect, adjust, or replace manual shift
valve, throttle linkages or cables and
check gear select indicator (as
applicable).
3. Explain how Pascal’s law applies to the
operation of automatic transmissions.
4. Check torque converter stator clutch
operation and measure torque converter
endplay.
5. Remove, disassemble, clean, inspect,
reassemble and reinstall transmissions
and transaxles.
6. Inspect, test, and replace electrical/
electronic transmissions and transaxles.
7. Retrieve trouble codes from common
electronically controlled automatic
transmissions switches and sensors.
8. Diagnose & recondition electronic
automatic transmissions/transaxles.
Western Tech Catalog | 74
COURSE 12
LDD AC 201
AIR CONDITIONING
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to theory,
design, construction, and operating principles of the
following climate control system components:
compressors, clutches, evaporator cores, air ducts and
case, refrigerant flow, heater cores, electrical/
electronic temperature controls and their required
subsystems. The student will learn the fundamental
principles of temperature, pressures and the
differences between sensible, latent, and specific heat
values. This course includes four Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply
the recommended shop and personal safety procedures
and learn how to correctly identify and use air
conditioning service tools and equipment, such as
refrigerant leak detectors, vacuum pumps, and A/C
refrigerant recovery and recycling center machines.
The student will learn how to read and interpret
manifold gauge reading, as well as retrofit from R-12
to R-134A systems. The student will diagnose, service,
and repair A/C systems and components in compliance
with EPA section 609 regulation. The student can
expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Perform leak test on A/C system and
determine needed repairs.
2. Conduct a performance test of the A/C
and determine needed repairs.
3. Diagnose A/C system problems that cause
the protection devices (pressure, thermal,
and PCM) to interrupt system operation
and determine needed repairs.
4. Inspect, test, and replace A/C compressor,
clutch components, or assembly.
5. Inspect evaporator housing water drain
and repair as needed.
6. Diagnose failures in the electrical/
electronic controls of heating and A/C
systems and determine needed repairs.
COURSE 13
LDD DEA 202
LIGHT DUTY DIESEL ENGINES &
ACCESSORIES
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, theory, and laws
of physics involved with the operation of four (4)
stroke cycle light duty diesel engines. The student will
learn the principle operation and interaction of the
major components of 4 stroke diesel engines, such as
engine blocks, crankshafts, cylinder heads, and valve
train components. The student will learn to perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on these same engine
systems. The student will also be introduced to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the diesel engine accessory systems, such as oil
lubrication, cooling, fuel, intake, exhaust
turbochargers, and superchargers. The student will
perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on these same
systems. This course includes three Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the students will apply
the recommended diesel shop and personal safety
procedures, and they will learn to correctly identify
and use diesel engine and accessory service tools,
equipment, and repair manuals. Engine removal and
installation procedures are covered along with
disassembly, reconditioning, and reassembly of the
engine block and cylinder heads. The student will also
perform diesel engine tune-up procedures and interpret
a laboratory oil analysis profile of engine oil. The
student can expect 25 hours of homework during this
course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Remove and inspect cylinder head
assembly for cracks, and check gasket
surface areas for warpage, leaks, and
passage conditions.
2. Inspect and test valve spring for
squareness, pressure, and free height
comparison.
3. Inspect crankshaft for surface cracks and
journal damage.
4. Inspect engine block cylinder bores,
internal drilled passage for coolant and
lubricating oil bores for the crankshaft
and camshaft, and the openings for the
push rods and cam followers.
5. Adjust valves.
6. Locate typical, cooling system internal
leaks and diagnose basic cooling system
malfunctions.
7. Inspect, measure, repair and/or replace
engine oil pumps, drives, inlet pipes, and
screens.
8. Perform oil pressure test and determine
necessary.
9. Interpret the results of a laboratory oil
analysis profile of engine oil.
10. Perform test procedures on lubrication
systems for contamination, oil level,
temperature, filtration, and oil
consumption; and determine needed
repairs.
11. Mix coolant using the correct proportions
of water, antifreeze, and supplemental
cooling system additives to meet
manufacturer recommendations and
ambient temperature requirements.
12. Inspect, adjust, and/or replace drive belts
COURSE 14
LDD FMD 203
LIGHT DUTY DIESEL FUEL &
EMISSION SYSTEMS WITH DIAGNOSIS
40/60/4.5/4.0 The student will be introduced to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the Dodge, GM, and Ford, diesel engine fuel injection,
governors, and emission controls systems. Basic diesel
engine theories and laws which govern the formulas
concerning force, work, torque, and power will also be
covered. This course includes two Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply
the diesel shop and personal safety procedures and
they will learn to correctly identify and use diesel
Western Tech Catalog | 75
engine fuel service tools and test equipment that are
recommended to perform diagnosis, service, and
repairs on mechanical and hydraulic diesel fuel
injection, governors, fuel pumps, tanks, and emission
control systems. The student can expect 25 hours of
homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Inspect, repair or replace fuel tanks, vents,
cap(s), mounts, valves, crossover, and
return lines and fittings.
2. Prime and bleed the fuel system;
diagnose, check and repair or replace the
primer pump.
3. Inspect diagnosis, test, adjust, repair or
replace engine governor systems.
4. Perform an engine inspection, diagnosis,
test, and adjust, and time distributor-type
or in-line type fuel injection pump and
drives.
5. Inspect, diagnosis test, adjust, repair
and/or replace the fuel injectors.
6. Diagnosis, test, and service diesel
injection systems.
COURSE 15
LDD ABE 204 LIGHT DUTY DIESEL ADVANCED BODY
ATTACHMENTS & ELECTRONICS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course introduces the student to the principles
of the light duty diesel trucks body attachments related
to light duty trucks and electrical and electronic
systems. The course covers the various types of body
attachments and electrical circuits and how they
operate, as well as the theories and laws, which dictate
electrical circuit behavior. The student will also learn
the fundamentals of design, construction, and operation
of electrical components, meters, wiring, circuit
diagrams, conventional analog instrumentation,
indicator lights, warning lights, electrical accessories,
and direct current motors. The starting and charging
systems will also be covered. This course includes no
Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply
the recommended diesel shop and personal safety
procedures and they will learn to correctly identify and
use the proper service tools and test equipment required
to perform diagnosis, service, and repairs body
attachments and diesel electrical/electronic systems and
their corresponding components. The student can
expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Apply Ohms Law to series, parallel, and
series-parallel circuits.
2. Check voltage and voltage drop in
electrical circuits using a digital
multimeter (DVOM) and determine
necessary repairs.
3. Diagnose shorts, opens, and resistance
problems in electrical circuits and
determine necessary repairs.
4. Perform battery capacity and state of
charge test and determine necessary
repairs.
5. Perform starter current draw and circuit
voltage drop test and determine necessary
repairs.
6. Diagnose charging system problems that
cause an under-charge, a no-charge, or an
over-charge condition.
7. Remove and replace light duty truck body
attachments
COURSE 16
BWE 104
BUSINESS WRITING ESSENTIALS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Business Writing Essentials course will teach
students the skills required to write business memos,
business letters, and technical reports and to do research
when necessary. Students will prepare a resume that can
be used throughout their program. Team and individual
effort will be required for a student to be successful in
this course. A formal oral presentation will be required.
This course includes one review Chrysler modules.
The student can expect 10 hours of homework
during this course. Upon completion of this course, the
student will be able to:
1. Produce memos, reports, and proposals.
2. Produce a resume.
3. Use the Learning Resource Center.
4. Use proper language, organization, and
citation styles to produce written
communication.
5. Use proper language, organization, and
speaking styles in oral communication.
6. Use peer review and peer editing
teamwork to produce polished oral and
written communication.
COURSE 17
LDD IN 206
LIGHT DUTY DIESEL INTERNSHIP
PROGRAM
8/0/152/3.5/3.5 In this course, students will enter Western Tech’s
Light Duty Diesel Internship Program. The Internship
program will allow students to experience situations
that occur during the daily operation of a working
shop. Students will be able to apply the knowledge and
skills they have learned in previous courses to the
workplace environment.
Students entering this program must have
satisfactorily completed all previous courses of the
Light Duty Diesel program. “Satisfactorily completed”
includes meeting all academic and attendance
requirements and having demonstrated entry-level
competency in those skills identifying as Graduate
Warranty Skills. Each student will be placed in an
approved Light Duty Diesel repair, service, or
maintenance facility without monetary compensation
to continue his/her training alongside experienced
technicians. The Internship Program Coordinator will
closely supervise each student’s progress for a total of
one-hundred sixty (160) hours. Supervision will
consist of reviewing weekly student evaluations and
scheduled/unscheduled weekly intern site contact.
Intern site manager or supervisor on a weekly basis
Western Tech Catalog | 76
will complete students’ evaluations. This course
includes no Chrysler modules.
The Internship Program Coordinator will review
the student’s weekly evaluation as well as any extern
site recommendations with each student individually.
During the review, any deficiencies indicated will be
addressed with the student. The student will work with
the Internship Program Coordinator to establish an
individual study program designed to address and
correct the areas that need improvement. The students
will follow their individual study programs. The
students must successfully complete the Internship
Program before they will be allowed to graduate and
receive their diplomas.
While at the extern site and upon completion of
this course, each student will have:
1. Demonstrate entry-level competency of
the Light Duty Diesel skills identified as
Graduate Warranty Skills in the repair,
service, or maintenance environment.
2. Demonstrated various communication
skills with management and co-workers
while performing the duties of a Light
Duty Diesel service technician.
3. Demonstrated the ability to work as a
team member.
4. Demonstrated ability to understand and
accept the responsibilities of a Light Duty
Diesel service technician in the work
place.
Western Tech Catalog | 77
ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY
IN PERFORMANCE TUNING Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY WITH A
SUBSPECIALTY IN PERFORMANCE TUNER Automotive service technicians and mechanics held about 739,900 jobs in 2014. Numerous openings will be in
automobile dealerships and independent repair shops, and about 1 in 10 automotive service technicians and
mechanics were self-employed in 2014. Employment of automotive service technicians and mechanics is projected
to grow 5 percent from 2014 to 2024. Technicians use their extensive knowledge of engine management, emission,
fuel, electrical, and ignition systems to diagnose issues that prevent engines from performing efficiently. Extensive
knowledge of computer controls, the ability to diagnose electrical and hydraulic problems, and other specialized
skills are needed to work on these complex components. Automotive training is strong competition for entry-level
jobs. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 51,540 National Employment 2012: 701,100
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 60,680 Projected National Employment 2022: 761,500
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 9,140 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 60,400
Percent Change 2012-2022: 17.70% Percent Change 2012-2022: 8.60%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $18.85 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $19.22
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
1,305 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
915 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
FIAT CHYSLER AUTOMOTIVE (FCA), MOPAR CAP LOCAL SCHOOL TRANING There is great demand for high quality and skilled automotive technicians. This demand has outpaced the number
of technicians the regular OEM programs can produce and FCA (Fiat Chrysler Automobiles) is the first to look at
high quality colleges to help their local dealers find the technicians they need. The foundational training that you
receive in class paired with the factory FCA training sets you apart from the other applicants in the industry, whether
applying at a FCA dealer or not. The fact that you will be able to show success and completion in actual dealership
OEM training demonstrates your ability to learn and a solid baseline of technical knowledge. These credentials make
you employable, more so than just a college education alone. Together they prepare you for success right now and
into the future. The thirty-six Chrysler modules are a required part of the program and accounts for 20% of the
student’s grade. Successful graduates upon leaving the program who has completed Level 0 and 1 can then begin
working at a FCA dealership at a Level 2 status, and complete 80-90% of the warranty work that comes in while
Western Tech Catalog | 78
continuing to be trained in Level 2. This is the great value in the CAP Local program. Even if the graduate does not
choose a FCA dealership, the OEM training they have received will look good on a resume and demonstrates their
ability to complete factory training.
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY IN PERFORMANCE TUNING PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Occupational Studies in Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in
Performance Tuning program will receive training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training
is provided in a combination of classes being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will
provide 80% of the training and education on-ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
Driver’s License Requirement
To be accepted into the Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Performance Tuning program, in addition
to the general admissions requirements and enrollment procedure, a prospective student must possess a valid driver’s
license before being allowed to start class.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty in Performance Tuning is a hybrid program. It has
established technical standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet
these standards and essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete
the program satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets the
set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow students,
internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
5. The ability to detect or tell the differences between sounds that vary in pitch and loudness.
6. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
7. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
8. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
9. The ability to quickly and repeatedly adjust the controls of a machine or a vehicle to exact positions.
10. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of one
or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
11. Sufficient manual dexterity, strength, and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together with
your arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
12. The ability to coordinate two or more limbs while sitting, standing, or lying down.
13. The ability to use your abdominal and lower back muscles to support part of your body repeatedly or
continuously over time without ‘giving out’ or fatiguing.
14. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs.
15. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
16. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech Catalog | 79
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
AOS DEGREE IN AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY
IN PERFORMANCE TUNING
COURSES 1-17
1560 CLOCK HOURS
65.0 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
60.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The objective of the Associate of Occupational
Studies in Automotive Technology with a Subspecialty
in Performance Tuner is to train the students as
automotive technicians with special emphasis on high
performance tuning. This program will introduce the
students to the basic fundamentals of mechanics, as well
as performance tuning. As a technician in today’s ever-
growing and ever-changing industry, a technician must
be able to adapt and keep up-to-date with new
automotive technologies, concepts and ideas. With
today’s automotive manufacturing companies waging a
“horsepower war,” a modern technician must not only
be able to perform basic automotive mechanics, but he
or she must also understand the high-performance
aspect as well. The objective of this course is to prepare
the students for work in this billion-dollar industry.
Those who successfully complete this program will be
prepared for entry-level positions in automotive
dealerships, independent garages, tuning-specialized
shops, dynamometer shops, and high-performance parts
manufacturing companies. Graduates from this
program will be able to apply their training as entry
level technicians or can opt to open their own shop and
be self-employed in this growing fast-paced industry.
Students will be trained in the following ASE areas: • G1 – Auto Maintenance and Light Repair
• A1 – Engine Repair
• A3 – Manual Drive Train & Axles
• A4 – Suspension & Steering
• A5 – Brakes
• A6 – Electrical/Electronic Systems
• A8 – Engine Performance
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may differ from that
included in the program outline below.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENT Students graduating from this program must pass the
ASE G1 exam prior to their scheduled graduation date
and students must actively participate in all assigned
MOPAR modules.
Western Tech Catalog | 80
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN AUTOMOTIVE
TECHNOLOGY WITH A SUBSPECIALTY IN PERFORMANCE TUNING
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE ON
CAMPUS/ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU 101
Foundations 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
2 PTFS
101 Fuel Systems 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
3 PTIEM
102
Interior and Exterior
Modifications
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
4 PSY 202 Psychology for Success
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
5 PTAE 104
Introduction to
Automotive Electrical
Systems
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
6 PTPMT
105
Performance
Manual Transmissions
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
7 AM 101 Applied
Mathematics 100 50/50 80/20 4.5 4.5
8 PTPED
107 Performance Engine Diagnosis
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
9 PTBER
108
Basic Engine
Rebuilding 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
10 PTPB 109
Performance Brakes
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
11 PTPS
110
Performance
Suspension 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
12 PTAFS
201 Advanced Fuel Systems
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
13 PTAAE
202
Advanced
Automotive Electronics
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
14 PTFNI
203
Forced and
Nitrous Induction 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
15 PTEMS
204
Engine Performance &
Management
Systems
150 55/95 80/20 6.5 6.0
16 BWE
104
Business Writing
Essentials 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
17 PTIN
207
Tuner Internship
Program 160 8/0/152 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours – AOS Degree in
Automotive Technology w/
Subspecialty in Performance Tuner
1560 573/835/
152
65.0 60.0
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an
introduction to their field of study with particular
emphasis on providing an overview of important post-
secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-
management, academic integrity, effective use of
Western Technical College’s resources, and
comprehensive understanding of critical thinking skills.
Students will learn how to research industries, gain
better understand of employer expectations and begin
working on a chronological resume. Students will
complete the course with a better understanding of their
Western Tech Catalog | 81
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion
of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to:
1. Navigate the library, and conduct basic
research functions.
2. Complete an effective resume.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry
requirements for his/her chosen field of
study.
4. Conduct a self-directed job search.
5. Apply critical thinking skills throughout
the program.
6. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
PTFS 101
FUEL SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0 The student will be introduced to the fundamentals
of design, construction, and operation of the automotive
internal-combustion, spark-ignition engine’s basic fuel
and emission control systems. The student will be
taught the essentials of the automobile’s air intake and
exhaust systems, fuel pumps, tanks, lines, filters, idle
speed control systems, spark timing, and intake
manifolds. The student will be taught the required
terminology and the special components associated
with modified high-performance fuel and emission
systems. The student will learn automotive safety
practices and the basic theories of the following
automotive systems: throttle body, port fuel, sequential
fuel injection systems; electronic ignition systems and
On-Board Diagnosis II systems (OBDII),
turbochargers, and superchargers. This course includes
no Chrysler modules.
During the lab/shop time, the student will apply the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures relating to the topics covered. The students
will be taught to identify and use the proper service
tools and special test equipment necessary to perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on original
manufacturer’s equipment and on high performance
modified fuel and emission components, electronic fuel
injection systems, electronic ignition systems, On-
Board Diagnostic II systems (OBDII) and their
corresponding sub-systems. The student can expect 40
hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose hot or cold no starting, hard
starting, poor drivability, incorrect idle
speed, poor idle speed, hesitation, stalling,
and emissions related problems.
2. Inspect, test, and replace fuel pumps and
pump control systems.
3. Inspect, test, and replace positive
crankcase ventilation (PCV), filter/
breather cap, valves, tubes, orifices, and
hoses.
4. Diagnose emissions and drivability
problems caused by failure of the exhaust
gas recirculation systems (EGR).
5. Inspect and test components of the intake
air temperature control systems.
6. Select, install, and test a variety of
different fuel related components.
7. Select and install an aftermarket ignition
system.
8. Install a complete custom fuel system from
pump to injectors.
9. Design a complete fuel system from
ground up that will meet Brake Specific
Fuel Consumption requirements.
10. Connect and prepare a 4 or 5 gas emission
analyzer to test exhaust emission. The
student will learn to read and interpret
exhaust gas emission readings and
determine needed repairs.
11. Inspect and test fuel pressure regulation
system components to adjust, repair and/or
replace as necessary.
12. Inspect and test fuel injectors and replace
as needed.
13. Inspect and test cold enrichment system
components and adjust or replace as
necessary.
COURSE 3
PTIEM 102
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR
MODIFICATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0
This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of interior/exterior operation, and theory
of high performance exterior modification kits and
components that will affect a vehicle’s aerodynamics,
visual enhancements, safety, and performance gauge
monitoring. The student will be taught the principle
functions and correct installation procedures of safety
devices such as: race seats, seat belt harness, roll cages,
monitoring devices, tachometers, body kits, rear deck
spoilers, canards, splitters, projector headlamps, hyper-
white bulbs, HID conversions, neon under-car kits, and
exterior lighting components. The student will perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on these same systems.
This course includes no Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the students will apply the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and they will learn to correctly identify and
use the special tools and equipment needed to service
modified interior and exterior high-performance
systems and corresponding components. The student
can expect 10 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Differentiate between different forms of
aerodynamic packages, and properly
install and comprehend the function of
each aerodynamic component.
2. Install and adjust different styles of engine
monitoring devices and interpret each
gauge reading.
3. Select and install the correct safety devices
for each vehicle application.
4. Distinguish between the different types of
exterior lighting components and properly
install each device.
Western Tech Catalog | 82
COURSE 4
PSY 202
PSYCHOLOGY FOR SUCCESS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Psychology for Success course serves to
introduce the student to basic principles of psychology
and apply those principles to the work environment.
This course is designed to develop the student’s
communication and soft skills. This course is designed
to address the need employers have for skilled
employees who are proficient at problem-solving, who
possess communication skills, and who will commit to
a task. The student will be required to participate in
group discussions, group presentations, and individual
presentations on real-world practical applications. This
course includes three Chrysler modules.
The student can expect 15 hours of homework
during this course. Upon completion of this course, the
student will be able to do the following:
1. Discuss the importance of human
relations to organizations and careers.
2. Describe the contributions of four major
theorists to the study of human
motivation.
3. Discuss ways in which to behave ethically
at work.
4. Name the steps in conflict resolution.
5. Describe characteristics and roles of
effective team members.
6. Explain how to manage conflict.
7. Explain the importance of workplace
etiquette.
8. Describe career advancement strategies.
9. Describe ways to maintain a healthy
work-life balance.
COURSE 5
PTAE 104
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMOTIVE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course introduces the student to the
fundamental principles of the automobile’s basic
electrical and electronic systems. The course covers the
various types of electrical circuits and how they operate,
as well as the theories and laws, which dictate electrical
circuit behavior. The student will also learn
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
electrical components, meters, wiring, and circuit
diagrams. Conventional analog instrumentation,
indicator lights, warning lights, electrical accessories,
direct current motors, starting and charging systems will
also be covered. This course includes three Chrysler
modules.
The student will apply the recommended automotive
shop safety procedures during lab as it relates to the
topics covered. Students will learn to identify and use
the proper test equipment to diagnose electrical systems
and their components. Students will perform basic
electrical troubleshooting, service and repairs on
electrical wiring, batteries, lighting circuits,
conventional instrument clusters, electrical accessories,
and starting and charging systems. The student can
expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Check basic electrical circuits with a test
light and determine needed repairs.
2. Check voltage and voltage drop in
electrical circuits using a digital
multimeter (DVOM) and determine
necessary repairs.
3. Find shorts, grounds, opens, and resistance
problems in electrical circuits and
determine necessary repairs.
4. Perform battery capacity and state of
charge test and determine necessary
repairs.
5. Perform starter current draw and circuit
voltage drop test and determine necessary
repairs.
6. Diagnose charging system problems that
cause an undercharge, a no-charge, or an
over-charge condition.
COURSE 6
PTPMT 105
PERFORMANCE MANUAL
TRANSMISSIONS
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course introduces the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the automotive powertrain system, which transmits the
engine’s power to the vehicle’s drive wheels. The
students will learn the safety procedures and the basic
theories that directly relate to the powertrain system
such as engine torque and torque multiplication. The
student will also learn about the components of the
powertrain system and their sub-systems. This course
includes four Chrysler modules.
The principle operation of the following systems
will also be covered: clutches, manual transmissions,
transaxles, front drive axles, drive shafts, universal
joints, differentials, rear-drive axles, four-wheel drive
systems, and powertrain electrical systems. The student
can expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose clutch noise, binding,
slippage, pulsation, and chatter
problems.
2. Diagnose transmission noise, hard
shifting, jumping out of gear, and
fluid leakage and determine the
necessary repairs.
3. Disassemble, clean, and reassemble
transmission components.
4. Diagnose front-wheel drive (FWD)
and rear-wheel drive (RWD) shaft
and universal/constant velocity
(CV) joint noise and vibration
problems and determine the
necessary repairs.
5. Inspect, adjust, repair or replace the
hydraulic slave and master
cylinders, lines, and hoses.
6. Inspect and replace the pressure
plate assembly and clutch disc.
Western Tech Catalog | 83
COURSE 7
AM 101
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
50/50/4.5/4.5 During the first several days of class, the students
will receive a general school and program orientation,
to include training on how to utilize the Learning
Resource Center. The Applied Mathematics course will
re-familiarize the student with basic applied
mathematics functions and concepts as they apply to
automotive technology. The student will refresh in
decimals, common fractions, ratios and proportions,
algebra and percentages as they apply to electronics
relative to the automotive field. The math course will
improve the student’s ability to navigate through many
complex formulas in this field. This course includes one
Chrysler module. The student can expect 100 hours of
homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Apply basic mathematics conscripts to
circuit analysis.
2. Apply the basic principles of temperature,
length, and area measurement.
3. Identify and properly use basic hand tools,
measuring tools, and instruments required
to perform service work on an
automobile’s combustion spark-ignition
systems.
4. Apply the basic principles of Ohm’s Law
and electrical relationships.
COURSE 8
PTPED 107
PERFORMANCE ENGINE DIAGNOSIS
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course will review the basic fuel and emission
standards that were covered in course PTEP-105. The
course will then cover the study of the vehicle emission
periodic motor vehicle inspection (PMVI), which
includes a tailpipe emission test and an under-the-hood
inspection. The student will be required to use various
test equipment to analyze emission levels and determine
the cause of abnormal emission readings. The student
will practice automotive safety procedures and perform
diagnosis on the following engine systems: cooling,
lubrication, ignition, emission controls, spark timing
controls, intake, and manifold heat controls. Engine
tune-up procedures will also be covered during this
course. This course includes six Chrysler modules.
During lab/shop time the student will learn to apply
the recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures relating to the subject matter. The student
will also learn to use automotive emission analyzers and
engine oscilloscopes, hand tools, and hand-held test
equipment to determine general overall condition. The
student can expect 25 hours of homework during this
course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Perform cylinder power balance test and
determine necessary repairs.
2. Perform engine absolute (vacuum/boost)
manifold pressure test and determine
necessary repairs.
3. Inspect and test the distributor and service
as needed.
4. Inspect and test ignition secondary circuit
wiring and components, and replace as
needed.
5. Diagnose engine mechanical, electrical,
fuel and emission problems with an
oscilloscope and engine diagnostic
equipment and determine needed action.
6. Diagnose no-starting, drivability, and
emission problems on vehicles with
distributor ignition (DI) systems and
determine needed repair.
COURSE 9
PTBER 108
BASIC ENGINE REBUILDING
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the automotive internal combustion, spark-ignition
engine. The student will be taught the theory and laws
of physics involved with automobile’s engine
operation, as well as the function of a number of engine
systems to include: lubrication, cooling, cylinder block,
cylinder head, and valve train systems. Engine removal
and installation are covered along with the disassembly,
inspection, reconditioning, and assembly of the engine
block, cylinder heads, and their correlated components.
The student will be taught the terminology along with
the special parts associated with high performance
modified engine internal components designed to
strengthen the motor. Proper identification and
selection of engine component combinations using
advanced dynamometer simulation software, as well as
actual chassis dynamometer testing, will also be taught
in detail. This course includes five Chrysler modules.
During the lab/shop time, he/she will apply the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures relating to the topics covered. They will be
taught to identify and use the proper engine service
tools and special test equipment necessary to perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on original manufactured
engines and on high performance modified engines and
their corresponding components. The student can
expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Inspect and test valve springs for
squareness, pressure and free height
comparison.
2. Adjust valves (mechanical or hydraulic
lifters).
3. Remove and inspect cylinder head for
cracks and check gasket surface areas for
warpage, leaks, and passage condition.
4. Inspect crankshaft for surface cracks and
journal damage.
5. Disassemble, clearance, and then
reassemble rotating assembly.
6. Select, install, and test a variety of
different engine internal components.
7. Select and install an aftermarket rotating
assembly.
8. Install a complete valve train assembly.
Western Tech Catalog | 84
COURSE 10
PTPB 109
PERFORMANCE BRAKES
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course, the student will be introduced to
the basic concepts involved with the automobile’s brake
system. The student will be taught how Pascal’s law is
used to increase force in a hydraulic system, along with
the fundamentals of design, construction, and operation
of the following brake systems: master cylinders, power
assist units, hydraulic lines and valves, disc brake
assemblies, parking brake assemblies, anti-lock brake
systems, electrical and electronic brake components.
The student will be taught the correct procedures
needed to customize brake components specifically to
produce the best results for a variety of different
applications, such as road racing, drag racing and high-
performance street cars. This course includes one
Chrysler module.
During the lab/shop time, the student will apply the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures relating to the topics covered. The student
will be taught to identify and use the proper brake
service tools and special test equipment necessary to
perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on original
manufactured and on high performance modified
brakes. The student can expect 25 hours of homework
during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose poor stopping, noise, pulling,
grabbing, dragging or pedal pulsation and
determine needed repairs.
2. Inspect, test, and replace metering (hold-
off), proportioning (balance), pressure
differential, and combination valves.
3. Refinish brake rotors according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Select, install, and test high performance
brake systems.
5. Select, install, and test different types of
suspension systems.
6. Design, install, and test different types of
high performance traction combinations
7. Design your own complete braking,
suspension, and traction system.
COURSE 11
PTPS 110
PERFORMANCE SUSPENSION
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course the student will be introduced to
the automotive suspension and steering systems.
Automotive safety procedures, and the use of precision
steering and suspension measuring equipment, will be
introduced. Basic theories such as static balance,
dynamic balance, and wheel alignment will be taught
followed by an introduction to the fundamentals of
design and operation of the following systems: front
suspension, rear suspension, wheel bearing, tires,
wheels, shock absorbers, struts, steering columns,
steering linkage mechanisms, power steering pumps,
rack and pinion gears, computer-controlled suspension
systems, frames and four-wheel alignment. The student
will be required to perform diagnosis, service wheel
alignment and repair of these same systems during
shop/lab time. Also during shop/lab, the student will
apply the recommended automotive shop and personal
safety procedures and learn to identify and use
automotive suspension and steering equipment service
tools and equipment. This course includes two Chrysler
module. The student can expect 25 hours of homework
during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose short-and long-arm suspension
system noises, body sway, and uneven
riding height problems and determine
necessary repairs.
2. Remove, inspect, and replace MacPherson
Strut cartridge, and assemble strut coil
spring, insulator, and upper strut bearing
mount.
3. Inspect, remove, and replace shock
absorbers.
4. Balance wheel and tire assembly (static
and dynamic) utilizing the latest
computerized balancing machines.
5. Diagnose tire wear pattern and determine
needed repairs.
6. Perform a total four-wheel alignment
utilizing the latest computerized alignment
machine.
7. Select the proper wheels and tire
combination for different types of driving
conditions.
COURSE 12
PTAFS 201
ADVANCED FUEL SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0
The student will review emission control systems,
on-board computers and computer input sensors before
being introduced to the fundamentals of design,
construction and operation of the common components
found in most electronic fuel injection (EFI) systems.
The student will learn automotive safety practices and
the basic theories of the following automotive systems:
throttle body, port fuel, sequential fuel injection
systems; electronic ignition systems and On-Board
Diagnosis II systems (OBDII), turbochargers, and
superchargers. This course includes four Chrysler
module.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying automotive
shop and personal safety procedures and learning how
to correctly identify and use the automotive service
tools and diagnostic equipment. Students will diagnose,
service, and repair the following systems: electronic
fuel injection systems, electronic ignition systems, On-
Board Diagnostic II systems (OBDII) and their
corresponding sub-systems. The student can expect 25
hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Connect and prepare a 4 or 5 gas emission
analyzer to test exhaust emission. The
student will learn to read and interpret
exhaust gas emission readings and
determine needed repairs.
Western Tech Catalog | 85
2. Inspect and test fuel pressure regulation
system components to adjust, repair and/or
replace as necessary.
3. Inspect and test fuel injectors and replace
as needed.
4. Inspect and test cold enrichment system
components and adjust or replace as
necessary.
5. Inspect throttle body mounting plates, air
induction and filtration system, intake
manifold, gaskets and replace as needed.
COURSE 13
PTAAE 202
ADVANCED AUTOMOTIVE
ELECTRONICS
20/30/2.0/2.0
The automotive electronics course will introduce the
students to the automotive computer systems. The
students will learn automotive safety practices, the
purpose and function of special computers,
electrical/electronic diagnostic test equipment, and the
basic theory of computer operation prior to the study of
the automotive computer systems. The students will
also be taught the fundamentals of design construction
and basic operation of the following electronic systems:
computers and input sensors, distributor and electronic
ignitions, fuel pumps, tanks, lines filters electronic fuel
injection, emissions controls, body computer, electronic
instrument clusters, vehicle theft security, passive
restraint, antilock brake and tractions control,
computer-controlled suspension, air conditioning
transmission and transaxles systems. This course
includes three Chrysler module.
Shop/lab work will consist of applying the
recommended automotive shop and personal study
procedures and learning how to correctly identify and
use the automotive computer systems service tools and
diagnostic equipment. The student will perform
diagnosis, service and repairs on the above-mentioned
systems.
The student will operate computer scan tools, digital
storage oscilloscopes, engine and emission analyzers
and other test equipment that will allow him/her to
monitor the performance of emission systems and
diagnose component or system failures. The student can
expect 12 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose emissions and drivability
problems resulting from failure of
computerized engine controls with and
without stored diagnostic trouble codes
and determine needed repairs.
2. Inspect, test, adjust and replace
computerized engine control system
sensors, actuators, and circuits.
3. Locate and interpret vehicle and major
components identification (VIN, vehicle
certification labels and calibration decals).
4. Diagnose no-starting, drivability and
emission problems on vehicles with
electronics ignition (i.e. without
distributors) systems and determine
needed repair.
5. Diagnose hot or cold no starting, hard
starting, poor drivability, incorrect idle
speed, poor idle, flooding hesitation,
surging, engine misfire, power loss,
stalling and emission problems on vehicles
with injection type fuel systems and
determine needed repairs.
COURSE 14
PTFNI 203
FORCED AND NITROUS INDUCTION
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course will provide the students with the basic
fundamentals of the three power adders: nitrous,
superchargers, and turbochargers. The student will
learn the operation and theory of wet and dry nitrous
systems, as well as nitrous do’s and don’ts, centrifugal
and root’s type superchargers, and turbocharger
selection and sizing, for both journal and ball bearing.
This course includes one Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the students will apply the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and they will learn to correctly identify and
use the special service tools and equipment needed to
perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on different
turbochargers, superchargers, and nitrous systems.
They will also use the dynamometer to compare how
much power is produced by each system. The student
can expect 25 hours of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify, install, and properly test a nitrous
oxide system without blowing the engine.
2. Identify, select, and properly install a
supercharger system.
3. Identify, select, and professionally install a
turbocharger kit.
4. Students will have an in-depth
understanding of the three types of power
adders and be able to apply each system
without damaging the engine.
COURSE 15
PTEMS 204
ENGINE PERFORMANCE &
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
55/95/6.5/6.0 This course will introduce the student to the basic
fundamentals and theory of how to select, install, and
calibrate engine management systems, such as piggy-
back and stand-alone systems. This course will focus on
proper air/fuel ratios and timing maps, specifically for
both low and wide-open throttle and will cover the
actual “tuning” process. The student will be taught the
different fuel and timing parameters for the three
different power adders and they will learn how to “make
power” using correct air/fuel ratios and ignition timing.
This course includes two Chrysler modules.
During the shop/lab time, the students will apply the
recommended automotive shop and personal safety
procedures and they will learn to correctly identify and
use the special service tools and equipment required to
perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on
programmable engine systems. The student will select,
install, and calibrate an ECU, on the dynamometer, for
Western Tech Catalog | 86
both low, and wide-open throttle, and max power with
maximum reliability. The student can expect 25 hours
of homework during this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Select proper management system for
specific applications.
2. Properly install a programmable engine
management system using a wide band O2
sensor and/or a dynamometer.
3. “Make power” while maintaining
reliability when programming a standalone
EMS.
COURSE 16
BWE 104
BUSINESS WRITING ESSENTIALS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Business Writing Essentials course will teach
students the skills required to write business memos,
business letters, and technical reports and to do research
when necessary. Students will prepare a resume that can
be used throughout their program. Team and individual
effort will be required for a student to be successful in
this course. A formal oral presentation will be required.
This course includes one Chrysler module.
The student can expect 10 hours of homework
during this course. Upon completion of this course, the
student will be able to:
1. Produce memos, reports, and proposals.
2. Produce a resume.
3. Use the Learning Resource Center.
4. Use proper language, organization, and
citation styles to produce written
communication.
5. Use proper language, organization, and
speaking styles in oral communication.
6. Use peer review and peer editing
teamwork to produce polished oral and
written communication.
COURSE 17
PTIN 207
TUNER INTERNSHIP PROGRAM
8/0/152/3.5/3.5
In this course, students will enter Western Tech’s
Automotive Performance Tuning Internship Program.
The Internship Program will allow students to
experience situations that occur during the daily
operation of a working shop. Students will be able to
apply the knowledge and skills they have learned in
previous courses to the workplace environment.
Students entering this program must have satisfactorily
completed all previous courses of the Automotive
Performance Tuning Program. “Satisfactorily
completed” includes meeting all academic and
attendance requirements and having demonstrated
entry-level competency in those skills identified as
Graduate Warranty Skills. This course includes no
Chrysler modules.
Each student will be placed in an approved
automotive repair, service, or maintenance facility
without monetary compensation to continue his/her
training alongside experienced automotive performance
tuning technicians. The Internship Program
Coordinator will closely supervise each student's
progress for a total of one-hundred sixty (160) hours.
Supervision will consist of reviewing weekly student
evaluations and scheduled/unscheduled weekly extern
site contact. Student evaluations will be completed by
the extern site manager or supervisor on a weekly basis.
The Internship Program Coordinator will review the
student's weekly evaluation as well as any extern site
recommendations with each student individually.
During the review, any deficiencies indicated will be
addressed with the student. The student will work with
the Internship Program Coordinator to establish an
individual study program designed to address and
correct the areas that need improvement. The students
will follow their individual study program during the
weekly classroom sessions until satisfactorily
completed.
The student must successfully complete the
Internship Program before they will be allowed to
graduate and receive their diplomas. While at the extern
site and upon completion of this course, each student
will have:
1. Demonstrated entry-level competency of
the automotive skills identified as
Graduate Warranty Skills in a repair,
service, or maintenance environment.
2. Demonstrated various communication
skills with management and coworkers
while performing the duties of an
automotive fundamental and performance
tuning technician.
3. Demonstrate the ability to work as a team
member.
4. Demonstrate the ability to understand and
accept the responsibilities of an
automotive fundamental and performance
tuning technician in the workplace.
Western Tech Catalog | 87
ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN DIESEL
MECHANICS Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN DIESEL MECHANICS Diesel service technicians and mechanics held about 263,900 jobs in 2014. Diesel technicians usually work in
well-ventilated and sometimes noisy repair shops. They occasionally repair vehicles on roadsides or at worksites.
Most diesel technicians work full time. Overtime is common, as many repair shops extend their service hours during
evenings and weekends. As more freight is shipped across the country, additional diesel-powered trucks will be
needed to carry freight where trains and pipelines are not available or economical. Additionally, diesel cars and light
trucks are becoming more popular, and more diesel technicians will be needed to maintain and repair these vehicles.
Employment of diesel service technicians and mechanics is projected to grow 12 percent from 2014 to 2024, faster
than the average for all occupations. Diesel engine maintenance and repair is becoming more complex as engines
and other components use more electronic systems to control their operation. For example, fuel injection and engine
timing systems rely heavily on microprocessors to maximize fuel efficiency and minimize harmful emissions. In
most shops, workers often use hand-held or laptop computers to diagnose problems and adjust engine
functions. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 14,140 National Employment 2012: 119,300
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 17,220 Projected National Employment 2022: 131,600
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 3,080 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 12,300
Percent Change 2012-2022: 21.80% Percent Change 2012-2022: 10.30%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $22.17 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $23.42
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
410 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
310 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA (DTNA) GET AHEAD PROGRAM Take real web-based factory training that is recognized by Freightliner® and Western Star® Truck Dealerships and
Detroit™ Engine Distributors. Western Tech’s partnership with DTNA and the DTNA service network offers
advanced job opportunities for you. The fifty-five Daimler modules are a requirement of the program and accounts
for 20% of the student’s grade.
Western Tech Catalog | 88
In 2010 Western Tech’s Diesel Program became National Automotive Technician’s Education Foundation
(NATEF) Certified.
NATEF MASTER LEVEL ACCREDITED PROGRAM IN MEDIUM/HEAVY TRUCK
TECNICIAN TRAINING
What Does NATEF Master Level Accredited In
MEDIUM/HEAVY TRUCK TECHNICIAN TRAINING
Mean?
NATEF Master Level Accredited in Medium/Heavy Truck
Technician Training means that Western Tech’s Diesel Mechanics
program has been certified by the National Automotive Technicians
Education Foundation (NATEF), a division of the National Institute
for Automotive Service.
It indicates excellence in the following eight areas:
T2. Truck Diesel Engines
T3. Truck Drive Train
T4. Truck Brakes
T5. Truck Suspension & Steering
T6. Truck Electrical & Electronic Systems
T7. Truck HVAC
T8. Truck PM
Truck Hydraulics
How did Western Tech’s Diesel Program become NATEF Master Level Accredited?
Western Tech completed an extensive evaluation and application process. Upon NATEF’s review, an evaluation
team conducted an on-site inspection of our campus to review the curriculum, teaching techniques, equipment and
training aids, task sheets, tools, budget, and safety measures. Western Tech remains one of the few private career
schools in the nation to be ASE Master Certified in Medium/Heavy Truck Technician Training.
How does a Western Tech Graduate benefit from an NATEF Master Level Accredited program?
To become ASE Certified, a person must have two years’ work experience and pass ASE certification
examinations. A graduate of the school’s NATEF Master Level Accredited Diesel program is allowed to substitute
the training for one year of work experience toward ASE’s two year work requirement. In addition, information
covered in the curriculum helps to prepare students to take the ASE examinations.
Experienced Instructional Staff
Our instructors are required to have recent and sufficient field experience and training before joining the Western
Tech team. They share insights with our students that might otherwise take years to learn. We continually update our
instructors with seminars and workshops to keep them abreast of new technology. In turn, they pass this knowledge
on to our students. All of Western Tech’s Diesel Mechanics instructors are ASE Certified. A large percentage of the
instructional staff is Master Certified in all areas of Medium/Heavy Truck.
NATEF Master Level Accredited
Western Tech is one of the few private career schools in the nation to offer a Diesel Program that is Master Level
Accredited by National Automotive Technicians Education Foundation (NATEF), a division of the Institute for
Automotive Services Excellence (ASE).
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE DIESEL
MECHANICS PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Occupational Studies in Diesel Mechanics program will receive training
through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination of classes being
offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 80% of the training and education on-
ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Western Tech Catalog | 89
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
Driver’s License Requirement
To be accepted into the Diesel Mechanics program, in addition to the general admissions requirements and
enrollment procedure, a prospective student must possess a valid driver’s license before being allowed to start class.
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CANDIDATES INTERESTED IN PURSING THE CDL
COURSE IN THE DIESEL MECHANICS PROGRAM WTC has partnered with Mesilla Valley Transportation in order to provide students in the Diesel Mechanics
program an opportunity to obtain their CDL. The Texas Department of Motor Vehicles has published requirements
for candidates interested in obtaining a Commercial Driver’s License (CDL).
1. Candidates that are 18-20 years of age, can qualify for an Intrastate CDL;
2. Candidates 21 years of age or older may apply for an Interstate CDL;
3. Candidates must possess and present a current driver’s license from any state. However, candidates
must surrender their auto driver’s license and accept a Texas CDL;
4. Candidates must undergo a background check. Serious felony charges will prevent the DMV from
issuing a CDL. Please check with your admissions representative for the list of those items before
choosing to take this course;
5. Candidates must possess and present a social security identification card;
6. Candidates must produce vehicle insurance and registration on his/her vehicle(s) that are all registered
in his/her name;
7. The applicant must undergo a Department of Transportation (DOT) physical;
8. DOT Drug Test (must return clean);
9. The applicant must pass a vision exam;
10. The applicant must be fingerprinted and have a photo taken;
NOTE: Individuals that have gone through the training for the CDL, but were unable to obtain a CDL for
failure to note produce or pass any of the items listed above, will still be charged for the course in its entirety.
Also, students pursuing a CDL in the Diesel Mechanics program are required to undergo a background check
before internship.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Diesel Mechanics program is a hybrid program. It has established technical standards and
essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and essential
functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program satisfactorily.
Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and
sentences.
5. The ability to detect or tell the differences between sounds that vary in pitch and loudness.
6. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
7. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
8. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
9. The ability to quickly and repeatedly adjust the controls of a machine or a vehicle to exact positions.
10. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of
one or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
11. Sufficient manual dexterity, strength, and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together
with your arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
12. The ability to coordinate two or more limbs while sitting, standing, or lying down.
Western Tech Catalog | 90
13. The ability to use your abdominal and lower back muscles to support and balance part of your body
repeatedly or continuously over time without ‘giving out’ or fatiguing. Work may be done up to 6 feet
off the ground.
14. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs. 15. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
16. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
AOS DEGREE IN DIESEL MECHANICS
COURSES 1-16
1560 CLOCK HOURS
65.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
60.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The objective of the Associate of Occupational
Studies in Diesel Mechanics is to prepare the student for
entry-level employment as a diesel technician with the
basic knowledge and skills to diagnose malfunctions,
perform preventative maintenance and make necessary
repairs on the following systems: diesel engines,
suspension and steering, air brakes,
electrical/electronics, drive train, heating ventilation
and air conditioning, and hydraulics.
The student who completes the program will be
prepared to work as an entry-level diesel service
technician in medium/heavy-duty dealerships, diesel
repair facilities, service and fleet maintenance facilities.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may differ from that
included in the program outline below.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENT Students graduating from this program must pass the
ASE T8 exam prior to their scheduled graduation date
and students must actively participate in all assigned
Daimler modules.
Western Tech Catalog | 91
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDEIES IN DIESEL
MECHANICS
# COURSE TITLE HRS THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE
ON
CAMPUS/ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU 101 Foundation 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
2 DTPM
101
Preventative
Maintenance 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
3 DTEF
102
Electronic
Fundamentals 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
4 PSY 202 Psychology
for Success 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
5 DTDT
104 Drive Trains 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
6 DTEN
105
Diesel
Engines and
Accessories
150 55/95 80/20 6.5 6.0
7 AM 101 Applied
Mathematics 100 50/50 80/20 4.5 4.5
8 DTFS
107 Fuel Systems 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
9 DTBS
108
Heavy Truck
Brakes 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
10 DTSS
109
Truck
Suspension
and Steering
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
11 DTHA
201
Hydraulic
Applications 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
12 DTED
202
Advanced
Electronics &
PC Based
Diagnostics
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
13 DTCC
203
Climate
Control
Systems
100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
14 CDL 204 CDL
Training 100 40/60 00/00 4.5 4.0
Or
14 DTBCW
204
Basic Cutting
and Welding 100 40/60 00/00 4.5 4.0
15 BWE 104
Business
Writing
Essentials
50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
16 DTIN 207
Diesel
Internship
Program
160 8/0/152 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours – AOS Degree in
Diesel Mechanics 1560 573/835/152
65.5 60.0
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an
introduction to their field of study with particular
emphasis on providing an overview of important post-
secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-
management, academic integrity, effective use of
Western Technical College’s resources, and
comprehensive understanding of critical thinking skills.
Students will learn how to research industries, gain
better understand of employer expectations and begin
working on a chronological resume. Students will
complete the course with a better understanding of their
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion
of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to:
1. Navigate the library, and conduct basic
research functions.
2. Complete an effective resume.
Western Tech Catalog | 92
3. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry
requirements for his/her chosen field of
study.
4. Conduct a self-directed job search.
5. Apply critical thinking skills throughout
the program.
6. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
DTPM 101
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
40/60/4.5/4.0 During this course, the student will learn how to
correctly perform preventative maintenance procedures
on all medium/heavy-duty truck systems and
components, to include trailers and fifth wheels. The
student will be taught the proper procedure to follow
when inspecting the following systems: brakes, exterior
lights, engine compartment, interior cabin, tires, and
steering and suspension components. Students will
learn basic shop management and organizational skills.
Special emphasis will be placed on shop safety practices
from the perspective of both the employee and the
employer.
Throughout the shop/lab time the student will apply
the recommended shop and personal safety procedures
and learn how to identify and use special service tools
and equipment required to perform preventative
maintenance on various truck systems and components.
Students will also participate in organization and
workflow management while in a shop environment.
The student can expect 25 hours of homework during
this course. This course includes three Daimler
modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
4. Visually inspect frames, tires, and exterior
components.
5. Inspect and recommend repairs for truck
cooling systems.
6. Replace engine oil and oil filters.
7. Perform complete truck chassis
lubrication.
8. Perform preventative maintenance
inspections.
COURSE 3
DTEF 102
ELECTRONIC FUNDAMENTALS
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course introduces the student to the
fundamental principles of the medium/heavy-duty
diesel trucks basic electrical and electronic systems.
The course covers the various types of electrical circuits
and how they operate, as well as the theories and laws,
which dictate electrical circuit behavior. The student
will also learn the fundamentals of design, construction,
and operation of electrical components, meters, wiring,
circuit diagrams, conventional analog instrumentation,
indicator lights, warning lights, electrical accessories,
and direct current motors. The starting and charging
systems will also be covered.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply the
recommended diesel shop and personal safety
procedures and they will learn to correctly identify and
use the proper service tools and test equipment required
to perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on diesel
electrical/electronic systems and their corresponding
components. The student can expect 25 hours of
homework during this course. This course includes
seven Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
4. Apply Ohms Law to series, parallel, and
series-parallel circuits.
5. Check voltage and voltage drop in
electrical circuits using a digital
multimeter (DVOM) and determine
necessary repairs.
6. Diagnose shorts, opens, and resistance
problems in electrical circuits and
determine necessary repairs.
7. Perform battery capacity and state of
charge test and determine necessary
repairs.
8. Perform starter current draw and circuit
voltage drop test and determine necessary
repairs.
9. Diagnose charging system problems that
cause an under-charge, a no-charge, or an
over-charge condition.
COURSE 4
PSY 202
PSYCHOLOGY FOR SUCCESS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Psychology for Success course serves to
introduce the student to basic principles of psychology
and apply those principles to the work environment.
This course is designed to develop the student’s
communication and soft skills. This course is designed
to address the need employers have for skilled
employees who are proficient at problem-solving, who
possess communication skills, and who will commit to
a task. The student will be required to participate in
group discussions, group presentations, and individual
presentations on real-world practical applications. The
student can expect 15 hours of homework during this
course. Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to do the following:
4. Discuss the importance of human
relations to organizations and careers.
5. Describe the contributions of four major
theorists to the study of human
motivation.
6. Discuss ways in which to behave ethically
at work.
7. Name the steps in conflict resolution.
8. Describe characteristics and roles of
effective team members.
9. Explain how to manage conflict.
10. Explain the importance of workplace
etiquette.
11. Describe career advancement strategies.
12. Describe ways to maintain a healthy
work-life balance.
Western Tech Catalog | 93
COURSE 5
DTDT 104
DRIVE TRAINS
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course will introduce the student to the theory,
design, construction, and operating principles of
medium/heavy-duty truck drivetrain systems that
include manual transmissions, clutches, drive shafts,
universal joints, semi-full floating drive axles, multi-
wheel drive systems, power take off, air operated
shifting, two speed and controlled traction differentials,
and tires/rims. Students will review air/hydraulic
principles and components operation, and the basic
theories such as engine torque multiplication and gear
theory will be taught.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply the
recommended shop and personal safety procedures and
learn to identify and use service tools and test
equipment necessary to perform diagnosis, service and
repairs on medium/heavy-duty truck drivetrain systems
and related components. The student can expect 25
hours of homework during this course. This course
includes four Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Diagnose clutch noise binding, slippage,
pulsation, and chatter problems.
2. Remove, disassemble, clean, inspect, and
reassemble and reinstall transmission and
components.
3. Inspect, test, and replace electrical/
electronic transmission components.
4. Inspect, remove, repair or replace drive
shaft components.
5. Inspect, adjust, and replace single disc
clutch pressure place and clutch disc.
6. Inspect and replace pilot bearing.
7. Inspect flywheel housing to transmission
housing/engine mating surface and
measure flywheel housing face and bore
run out; determine needed action.
COURSE 6
DTEN 105
DIESEL ENGINES & ACCESSORIES
55/95/6.5/6.0
This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, theory, and laws
of physics involved with the operation of four (4) stroke
cycle diesel engines. The student will learn the principle
operation and interaction of the major components of 2
and 4 stroke diesel engines, such as engine blocks,
crankshafts, cylinder heads, and valve train
components. The student will learn to perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on these same engine
systems. The student will also be introduced to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and operation of
the diesel engine accessory systems, such as oil
lubrication, cooling, fuel, intake, exhaust turbochargers,
superchargers, and engine braking. The student will
perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on these same
systems.
During the shop/lab time, the students will apply the
recommended diesel shop and personal safety
procedures, and they will learn to correctly identify and
use diesel engine and accessory service tools,
equipment, and repair manuals. Engine removal and
installation procedures are covered along with
disassembly, reconditioning, and reassembly of the
engine block and cylinder heads. The student will also
perform diesel engine tune-up procedures and interpret
a laboratory oil analysis profile of engine oil. The
student can expect 37 hours of homework during this
course. This course includes eleven Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able
to:
1. Remove and inspect cylinder head
assembly for cracks, and check
gasket surface areas for warpage,
leaks, and passage conditions.
2. Inspect and test valve spring for
squareness, pressure, and free
height comparison.
3. Inspect crankshaft for surface
cracks and journal damage.
4. Inspect engine block cylinder bores,
internal drilled passage for coolant
and lubricating oil bores for the
crankshaft and camshaft, and the
openings for the push rods and cam
followers.
5. Adjust valves.
6. Locate typical, cooling system
internal leaks and diagnose basic
cooling system malfunctions.
7. Inspect, measure, repair and/or
replace engine oil pumps, drives,
inlet pipes, and screens.
8. Perform oil pressure test and
determine necessary repairs.
9. Interpret the results of a laboratory
oil analysis profile of engine oil.
10. Perform test procedures on
lubrication systems for
contamination, oil level,
temperature, filtration, and oil
consumption; and determine needed
repairs.
11. Mix coolant using the correct
proportions of water, antifreeze, and
supplemental cooling system
additives to meet manufacturer
recommendations and ambient
temperature requirements.
12. Inspect, adjust, and/or replace drive
belts.
COURSE 7
AM 101
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
50/50/4.5/4.5 During the first several days of class, the students
will receive a general school and program orientation,
to include training on how to utilize the Learning
Resource Center. The Applied Mathematics course will
re-familiarize the student with basic applied
mathematics functions and concepts as they apply to
Diesel Mechanics. The student will work on decimals,
common fractions, ratios and proportions, and
percentages as they apply to the automotive field. The
math course will improve the student’s ability to
Western Tech Catalog | 94
navigate through some complex formulas in this field
and touch on a few elements of the automotive business.
The student can expect 100 hours of homework during
this course. At the conclusion of this course, students
will be able to do the following:
1. Perform the basic arithmetic operations of
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
division of whole numbers
2. Perform the basic arithmetic operations
using common fractions and decimal
fractions
3. Calculate simple percentages
4. Calculate discount, profit and loss, and
commissions
5. Calculate interest and taxes
6. Calculate and convert between English
linear and metric measurements
7. Calculate rations and proportions
8. Use formulas for measuring area, volume,
and horsepower
9. Calculate circuit parameters using Ohm’s
Law
COURSE 8
DTFS 107
FUEL SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0
The student will be introduced to the fundamentals
of design, construction, and operation of the Detroit,
International, Cummins, and Caterpillar diesel engine
fuel injection, governors, and emission controls
systems. Basic diesel engine theories and laws which
govern the formulas concerning force, work, torque,
and power will also be covered.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply the
diesel shop and personal safety procedures and they will
learn to correctly identify and use diesel engine fuel
service tools and test equipment that are recommended
to perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on
mechanical and hydraulic diesel fuel injection,
governors, fuel pumps, tanks, and emission control
systems. The student can expect 25 hours of homework
during this course. This course includes six Daimler
modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Inspect, repair or replace fuel tanks, vents,
cap(s), mounts, valves, crossover, and
return lines and fittings.
2. Prime and bleed the fuel system; check and
repair or replace the primer pump.
3. Inspect, test, adjust, repair or replace
engine governor systems.
4. Perform an engine inspection, test, and
adjust, and time distributor-type or in-line
type fuel injection pump and drives.
5. Inspect, test, adjust, repair and/or replace
the fuel injectors.
6. Diagnosis, test, and service diesel injection
systems.
COURSE 9
DTBS 108
HEAVY TRUCKS BRAKES
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course will introduce the student to the
fundamentals of design, construction, operation, and
theory of the medium/heavy-duty truck air and
air/hydraulic brake systems and components, such as:
master cylinder, power assist unit, disc drums, wheel
bearings, air brake component and their related
electrical/electronic subsystem. Trailer braking systems
will also be covered. The student will perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on these same systems.
During lab/shop time, the student will apply the
recommended shop and personal safety procedures, and
they will learn to correctly identify and use the required
air and air/hydraulic brake systems and components
service tools and test equipment required to perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on medium/ heavy-duty
truck air and air/ hydraulic brake systems. The student
will learn how to use and interpret Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS). The student can expect 25 hours of
homework during this course. This course includes
three Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Remove, replace or repack wheel bearings
and seals.
2. Use proper procedures when handling
brake fluids.
3. Service brake lines and hoses.
4. Inspect, measure, and repair or replace
brake system components.
5. Diagnose and repair stop light circuits.
6. Service and adjust parking brake systems.
7. Perform leakage and operational tests on
brake application valves.
8. Diagnose poor stopping, noise, pulling,
grabbing, dragging or pedal pulsations,
and determine needed repairs.
9. Remove and replace truck wheels.
COURSE 10
DTSS 109
TRUCK SUSPENSION AND STEERING
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course will introduce the students to the
fundamentals of design, construction, and theory of the
medium/heavy-duty truck front and rear suspensions
systems. The student will learn the operation and theory
of the wheel bearings, shock absorbers, power steering,
air assisted manual steering, and steering columns,
linkages, computer controlled suspension systems, load
sensing steering, fiber composite leaf springs,
electronic air bag suspensions, cab air suspension
systems, spoke disc, dual rims, and tire matching. The
student will learn the basic theories of static balance,
dynamic balance, and compressibility. The students
will perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on these
same systems.
During shop/lab time, the students will apply the
recommended shop and personal safety procedures and
they will learn to correctly identify and use the required
medium/heavy-duty truck front and rear suspension
systems, service tools, and test equipment. Special
Western Tech Catalog | 95
emphasis will be placed on wheel/ tire dismounting and
mounting. The student can expect 25 hours of
homework during this course. This course includes four
Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Remove and replace steering columns,
gears, and related components.
2. Adjust sector lash on manual steering
gears.
3. Diagnose, remove, and replace tie rod
ends, pitman, arms, and idler arms.
4. Drain and flush power steering systems.
5. Remove and replace power steering
pumps, pulleys, integral reservoirs, and
check flow control valves and pressure
relief valve.
6. Inspect, remove, repair or replace front and
rear suspension components.
7. Perform preoperational inspection on
tractor/trailer air suspension systems. Use
a computer wheel aligner to measure all
front and rear suspension angles, and
adjust the angles according to
manufacturer specifications.
COURSE 11
DTHA 201
HYDRAULIC APPLICATIONS
40/60/4.5/4.0
During this course the student will be introduced to
the fundamentals of design, construction, theory and
operation of the medium/heavy-duty truck mechanical
and hydraulic systems, to include hydraulic pumps,
tanks, hoses, fittings, valves, and actuators.
Throughout the shop/lab time, the students will
apply the recommended shop and personal safety
procedures and learn how to correctly identify and use
special service tools and test equipment required to
perform diagnosis, service, and repairs on
medium/heavy-duty diesel hydraulic systems. The
student can expect 25 hours of homework during this
course. This course includes four Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify system type (closed and open);
perform system test, diagnosis and
determine needed repairs.
2. Read and interpret system diagrams and
schematics.
3. Verify placement of equipment/
components safety labels and placards;
determine needed action.
4. Check reservoir fluid level, condition, and
consumption, and determine needed
action.
5. Inspect hoses and connections (length,
size, routing, and protection); repair and/or
replace as needed.
6. Diagnose root cause of hydraulic pump
failure and determine needed action.
7. Inspect, repair, and/or replace reservoir,
sight glass, vents, caps mounts, valves,
screens, and hydraulic pumps.
8. Purge and/or bleed systems in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommended
procedures.
COURSE 12
DTED 202
ADVANCED ELECTRONICS & PC
BASED DIAGNOSTICS
40/60/4.5/4.0
During this course, the student will review the basic
electrical systems that were covered in DTEF-102
before they will be introduced to the fundamentals of
design, construction, and theory of the medium/heavy
truck onboard computer systems that include engine
and body computers, input/output sensors, electronic
instrumentation, electronic lighting, anti-theft, passive
restraint, electrical accessories, and electronic chassis
controls.
The shop/lab work will consist of the student is
applying the recommended shop and personal safety
procedures, and learning how to read and interpret
wiring diagrams, and correctly identifying and using the
service tools and test equipment required to perform
diagnosis, service, and repairs on on-board computer
systems. The student can expect 25 hours of homework
during this course. This course includes seven Daimler
modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Check current flow in electrical/electronic
circuits using a digital multimeter
(DVOM) and determine needed repairs.
2. Measure and diagnose the cause(s) of
abnormal key-off battery drain and
determine needed repairs.
3. Inspect and test switches, connectors,
relays and wires of electrical/electronic
circuits and determine needed repairs.
4. Diagnose incorrect operation of motor
driven accessory circuits and repair as
needed.
5. Diagnose the cause of data base
communication problems and determine
needed action.
6. Inspect and test auxiliary power outlet,
integral fuses, terminals, and repair or
replace as needed.
COURSE 13
DTCC 203
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0
This course will introduce the student to theory,
design, construction, and operating principles of the
following climate control system components:
compressors, clutches, evaporator cores, air ducts and
case, refrigerant flow, heater cores, electrical/ electronic
temperature controls and their required subsystems. The
student will learn the fundamental principles of
temperature, pressures and the differences between
sensible, latent, and specific heat values.
During the shop/lab time, the student will apply the
recommended shop and personal safety procedures and
learn how to correctly identify and use air conditioning
service tools and equipment, such as refrigerant leak
Western Tech Catalog | 96
detectors, vacuum pumps, and A/C refrigerant recovery
and recycling center machines. The student will learn
how to read and interpret manifold gauge reading, as
well as retrofit from R-12 to R-134A systems. The
student will diagnose, service, and repair A/C systems
and components in compliance with EPA section 609
regulation. The student can expect 25 hours of
homework during this course. This course includes four
Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Perform leak test on A/C system and
determine needed repairs.
2. Conduct a performance test of the A/C and
determine needed repairs.
3. Diagnose A/C system problems that cause
the protection devices (pressure, thermal,
and PCM) to interrupt system operation
and determine needed repairs.
4. Inspect, test, and replace A/C compressor,
clutch components, or assembly.
5. Inspect evaporator housing water drain
and repair as needed.
6. Diagnose failures in the electrical/
electronic controls of heating and A/C
systems and determine needed repairs.
OPTION #1
COURSE 14
CDL 204
CDL TRAINING
40/60/4.5/4.0
The student will receive entry-level training in
commercial vehicle operation and driving with
classroom and behind-the-wheel instruction. This will
include laws relating to intrastate commercial motor
vehicle operations; pre-trip inspection, vehicles safety
and operational equipment. Coupling and uncoupling
of combination units, placing the commercial motor
vehicle in safe operation, the use of controls and
emergency equipment. The student will be trained on
inspection of mechanical components, defensive
driving techniques, cargo loading, securing load,
documentation, map reading, DOT log books, trip
planning, accident and fire prevention, reporting,
hazardous material transportation and documentation.
The students will also be given demonstration and skill
development of basic maneuvers of driving a
combination vehicle. Driving proficiency development
will include vehicle control, backing, visual search,
shifting, turning, space and speed management, and
hazard perception. Successful completion of this class
should prepare the student to pass the Commercial
Driver's License (CDL) skill examination.
Classroom and behind-the-wheel instruction will
consist of: laws relating to either interstate and/or
intrastate commercial motor vehicle operations; pre-
trip inspection of commercial motor vehicles and both
safety and operational equipment; coupling and
uncoupling of combination units, if the commercial
motor vehicle to be driven includes such units; placing
the commercial motor vehicle in operation; use of the
commercial motor vehicle's controls and emergency
equipment; operation of the inner-city and interstate
highway traffic and passing; turning, backing, and
parking the commercial motor vehicle; braking and
slowing the vehicle by means other than application of
the brakes; and completing driver's daily log books.
Students that select this option must meet all state and
Federal requirements related to obtaining a CDL.
OR OPTION #2
COURSE 14
DTBCW 204
BASIC CUTTING AND WELDING
40/60/4.5/4.0
During this course, the student will be taught how to
set-up the oxyacetylene process for cutting and welding.
The student will learn the basic techniques for basic
fillet welds. Safety precautions will be strictly enforced.
The shop/lab work will consist of the student
applying the recommended shop and personal safety
procedures, the student will practice metal cutting and
horizontal welding. Upon completion of this course, the
student will be able to:
1. Fully understand the importance of shop
and equipment safety.
2. Breakdown and set-up oxygen and
acetylene cutting and welding torches.
3. Fuse metal in the horizontal position using
the shielded metal arc welding process.
COURSE 15
BWE 104
BUSINESS WRITING ESSENTIALS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Business Writing Essentials course will teach
students the skills required to write business memos,
business letters, and technical reports and to do research
when necessary. Students will prepare a resume that can
be used throughout their program. Team and individual
effort will be required for a student to be successful in
this course. A formal oral presentation will be required.
The student can expect 10 hours of homework during
this course. This course includes two Daimler modules.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able
to:
1. Produce memos, reports, and proposals.
2. Produce a resume.
3. Use the Learning Resource Center.
4. Use proper language, organization, and
citation styles to produce written
communication.
5. Use proper language, organization, and
speaking styles in oral communication.
6. Use peer review and peer editing
teamwork to produce polished oral and
written communication.
COURSE 16
DTIN 207
DIESEL INTERNSHIP PROGRAM
8/0/152/3.5/3.5
In this course, students will enter Western Tech’s
Diesel Mechanics Internship Program. The Internship
program will allow students to experience situations
that occur during the daily operation of a working shop.
Students will be able to apply the knowledge and skills
they have learned in previous courses to the workplace
environment.
Western Tech Catalog | 97
Students entering this program must have
satisfactorily completed all previous courses of the
Diesel Mechanics program. “Satisfactorily completed”
includes meeting all academic and attendance
requirements and having demonstrated entry-level
competency in those skills identifying as Graduate
Warranty Skills. Each student will be placed in an
approved diesel repair, service, or maintenance facility
without monetary compensation to continue his/her
training alongside experienced diesel technicians. The
Internship Program Coordinator will closely supervise
each student’s progress for a total of one-hundred sixty
(160) hours. Supervision will consist of reviewing
weekly student evaluations and scheduled/unscheduled
weekly intern site contact. Intern site manager or
supervisor on a weekly basis will complete students’
evaluations.
The Internship Program Coordinator will review the
student’s weekly evaluation as well as any extern site
recommendations with each student individually.
During the review, any deficiencies indicated will be
addressed with the student. The student will work with
the Internship Program Coordinator to establish an
individual study program designed to address and
correct the areas that need improvement. The students
will follow their individual study programs. The
students must successfully complete the Internship
Program before they will be allowed to graduate and
receive their diplomas. While at the extern site and upon
completion of this course, each student will have:
1. Demonstrate entry-level competency of
the medium/heavy-duty truck skills
identified as Graduate Warranty Skills in
the repair, service, or maintenance
environment.
2. Demonstrated various communication
skills with management and co-workers
while performing the duties of a diesel
service technician.
3. Demonstrated the ability to work as a team
member.
4. Demonstrated ability to understand and
accept the responsibilities of a Diesel
service technician in the work place.
Western Tech Catalog | 98
ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN
REFRIGERATION AND HVAC TECHNOLOGY Available at 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN REFRIGERATION AND HVAC TECHNOLOGY Employment of heating, air conditioning, and refrigeration mechanics and installers is projected to grow 14
percent from 2014 to 2024, much faster than the average for all occupations. Commercial and residential building
construction will drive employment growth. Heating and air conditioning systems control the temperature, humidity,
and overall air quality in homes, businesses, and other buildings. By providing a climate-controlled environment,
refrigeration systems make it possible to store and transport food, medicine, and other perishable items. The growing
number of sophisticated climate-control systems is also expected to increase demand for qualified HVACR
technicians. Job opportunities for HVACR technicians are expected to be excellent, particularly for those who have
completed training at an accredited technical school or through an apprenticeship. Candidates familiar with computer
tablets and electronics, as well as those who have developed troubleshooting skills, will have the best job
opportunities as employers continue to have difficulty finding qualified technicians to install, maintain, and repair
complex new systems. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 23,230 National Employment 2012: 267,600
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 28,220 Projected National Employment 2022: 323,500
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 4,990 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 55,900
Percent Change 2012-2022: 21.50% Percent Change 2012-2022: 20.90%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $20.28 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $22.17
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
590 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
500 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 99
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE REFRIGERATION
AND HVAC TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Occupational Studies in Refrigeration and HVAC Technology program
will receive training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination
of classes being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 80% of the training and
education on-ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
Driver’s License Requirement
To be accepted into the Refrigeration and HVAC Technology program, in addition to the general admissions
requirements and enrollment procedure, a prospective student must possess a valid driver’s license before being
allowed to start class.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Refrigeration and HVAC Technology program is a hybrid program. It has established technical
standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and
essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program
satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and
sentences.
5. The ability to see detail at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
6. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
7. Sufficient flexibility to bend, stretch, twist, or reach with your body, arms, and/or legs.
8. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of
one or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble very small objects.
9. Sufficient manual dexterity and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together with your
arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
10. The ability to coordinate two or more limbs while sitting, standing, or lying down.
11. The ability to use your abdominal and lower back muscles to support part of your body repeatedly or
continuously over time without ‘giving out’ or fatiguing.
12. The ability to lift up to 50 lbs.
13. The ability to climb both step ladders and extension ladders.
14. The ability to work in high places (i.e. roof tops).
15. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
16. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech Catalog | 100
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
AOS DEGREE IN REFRIGERATION AND
HVAC TECHNOLOGY
COURSES 1-18
1560 CLOCK HOURS
65.0 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
60.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The Associate of Occupational Studies Degree in
Refrigeration and HVAC Technology program trains
students in basic refrigeration principles, basic
electricity, air conditioning, and sheet metal work.
Students receive additional training in commercial
refrigeration, commercial air conditioning, motor
controls, and ice machines. The Refrigeration and
HVAC Technology program incorporates modern
efficiency concepts that tie in energy sustainability and
weatherization. Through guidance by organizations
such as, the U.S. Green Building Council, this program
incorporates energy management, thermography, and
energy auditing concepts along with basic solar
electricity (photovoltaics) and wind power.
The Refrigeration and HVAC Technology program
prepares graduates for entry level positions as
refrigeration technicians, air conditioning technicians,
maintenance technicians, or sheet metal workers. With
the special training, the graduates have the possibility
for rapid advancement due to their knowledge of high
efficiency systems and concepts.
CERTIFICATIONS • Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
-608
• R-410 Refrigerant Safety Certification
• HVAC Excellence Electrical Assessment
Exam
• NABCEP Entry Level Solar Exam
• Texas Dept. of Licensing & Regulations
Certified Technician Registration*
Note: Students will have to pass a background
check in order to register with the Texas Dept. of
Licensing & Regulations.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of the classes may differ from
that included in the program outline below.
Western Tech Catalog | 101
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF OCCUPATIONAL STUDIES IN
REFRIGERATION AND HVAC TECHNOLOGY
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY
/LAB
PERCENTAGE
ON
CAMPUS/ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 FOU 101 Foundation 50 20/30 80/20 2.0 2.0
2 TF 101 Technical Fundamentals
100 40/60 80/20
4.5 4.0
3 EL 102 Electricity 100 40/60 80/20 4.5 4.0
4 AM 101 Applied
Mathematics 100 50/50
80/20 4.5 4.5
5 BWE 104
Business
Writing Essentials
50 20/30
80/20
2.0 2.0
6 GS 105 General Sheet
Metal 50 20/30
80/20 2.0 2.0
7 FR 103 Fundamentals
of Refrigeration 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
8 AC 106 Air
Conditioning 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
9 HS 109 Heating
Systems 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
10 ACC 201
Commercial
Air Conditioning
100 40/60
80/20
4.5 4.0
11 RC 203 Commercial
Refrigeration 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
12 HEM 206 Electrical Motors and
Controls
100 40/60 80/20
4.5 4.0
13 REA 210 Renewable Energy
Applications
40 16/24 80/20
1.5 2.0
14 IM 204 Ice Making
Machines 60 24/36
80/20 2.5 2.0
15 RM 207 Refrigerant
Management 100 40/60
80/20 4.5 4.0
16 HDI 208
Diagnostic and
Install Procedures
100 40/60
80/20
4.5 4.0
17 PSY 202 Psychology for
Success 50 20/30
80/20 2.0 2.0
18 HIN 209
HVAC
Internship
Program
160 8/0/152
00/00
3.5 3.5
Total Hours – AOS Degree in
Refrigeration and HVAC
Technology
1560 578/830/
152
65.0 60.0
Western Tech Catalog | 102
COURSE 1
FOU 101
FOUNDATIONS
20/30/2.0/2.0 Foundations is a course designed to give students an introduction to their field of study with particular emphasis
on providing an overview of important post-secondary skills, such as self-reflection, time-management, academic
integrity, effective use of Western Technical College’s resources, and comprehensive understanding of critical
thinking skills. Students will learn how to research industries, gain better understand of employer expectations and
begin working on a chronological resume. Students will complete the course with a better understanding of their
career roadmap to navigate their way to the completion of their educational aspirations.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Navigate the library, and conduct basic research functions.
2. Complete an effective resume.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of the industry requirements for his/her chosen field of study.
4. Conduct a self-directed job search.
5. Apply critical thinking skills throughout the program.
6. Apply financial literacy objectives.
COURSE 2
TF 101
TECHNICAL FUNDAMENTALS
40/60/4.5/4.0 During the first several days of class, the students will receive a general school and program orientation, to include
training on how to utilize the Learning Resource Center. Western Tech pays particular attention to new students
ensuring they get started on the right track by properly orienting them to their career fields. During this orientation
course, new students are encouraged to ask questions, which helps to gain a full understanding of the subject material
at hand.
They will be taught study skills, basic electricity, basic refrigeration cycle, safety precautions, the proper use of
hand tools and measuring instruments, and the practicing of good work and study habits which will be of benefit to
their entire careers.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Utilize Learning Resource Center
2. Swage and flare copper and aluminum tubing.
3. Braze copper to copper, aluminum to aluminum, copper to steel, and steel to steel.
4. Read and interpret special tools: manifold gages, volt, Ohm and amp meters.
5. Determine common start and run windings of a hermetic compressor.
6. Draw a schematic and wire a 115-volt hermetic compressor.
COURSE 3
EL 102
ELECTRICITY
40/60/4.5/4.0 In this course, Ohm’s law as it applies to series, parallel, and series parallel circuits, alternating current, power
voltage systems will be taught along with types of electric motors and motor components. Wire sizing, disconnect
switches and fusible disconnects will be shown and their applications discussed. Use of volt-ohm meters distribution
and voltage systems will be taught along with types of electric motors and motor components. Solid state devices
will also be discussed.
Practical applications involve motor identification, disassembly inspection and assembly of three-phase and open
motors. Use of schematic diagrams will be taught in troubleshooting control circuits.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Wire a three-phase motor using a magnetic starter and line voltage thermostat.
2. Wire a three-phase motor using a magnetic starter and a low voltage thermostat.
3. Wire a P.S.C. motor with a contractor and a 5 microfarad capacitor.
4. Wire a three-phase motor using a dual voltage contractor and a low voltage thermostat.
COURSE 4
AM 101
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
50/50/4.5/4.5 The Applied Mathematics course will re-familiarize the student with basic applied mathematics functions and
concepts as they apply to Refrigeration and HVAC Technology. The student will work on decimals, common
fractions, ratios and proportions, and percentages as they apply to the HVAC field. The math course will improve
the student’s ability to navigate through some complex formulas in this field and touch on a few elements of the
Western Tech Catalog | 103
Refrigeration, Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning business. The student can expect 100 hours of homework
during this course. At the conclusion of this course, students will be able to do the following:
1. Perform the basic arithmetic operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of whole
numbers
2. Perform the basic arithmetic operations using common fractions and decimal fractions
3. Calculate simple percentages
4. Calculate discount, profit and loss, and commissions
5. Calculate interest and taxes
6. Calculate and convert between English linear and metric measurements
7. Calculate rations and proportions
8. Use formulas for measuring area, volume, and horsepower
9. Calculate circuit parameters using Ohm’s Law
COURSE 5
BWE 104
BUSINESS WRITING ESSENTIALS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Business Writing Essentials course will teach students the skills required to write business memos, business
letters, and technical reports and to do research when necessary. Students will prepare a resume that can be used
throughout their program. Team and individual effort will be required for a student to be successful in this course. A
formal oral presentation will be required.
The student can expect 10 hours of homework during this course. Upon completion of this course, the student
will be able to:
1. Produce memos, reports, and proposals.
2. Produce a resume.
3. Use the Learning Resource Center.
4. Use proper language, organization, and citation styles to produce written communication.
5. Use proper language, organization, and speaking styles in oral communication.
6. Use peer review and peer editing teamwork to produce polished oral and written communication.
COURSE 6
GS 105
GENERAL SHEET METAL
20/30/2.0/2.0 Upon the completion of this course, the student will have acquired the knowledge to fabricate and install both
residential and commercial sheet metal ducting systems. Sheet metal fabrication will give the student the ability to
produce the basic requirements needed in the sheet metal industry
The proper use of tools and safe handling of sheet metal will be emphasized.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Produce a Pittsburgh Lock by hand and by machine.
2. Produce drives by hand and by machine.
3. Produce “S” cleats by hand.
4. Produce 90 degree elbow with a curved back and throat.
COURSE 7
FR 103
FUNDAMENTALS OF REFRIGERATION
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will cover the basic refrigeration cycle and the four basic components of a refrigeration system. The
refrigeration cycle is the basis of all refrigerating equipment and an integral part of the program. The different types
of compressors, condensers, evaporators, and metering devices will also be covered. Students will perform lab
projects on refrigeration trainers and be able identify components and observe the refrigeration cycle.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand and explain the refrigeration cycle.
2. Understand and identify the basic components in the refrigeration cycle.
3. Identify the different types of compressors, evaporators, condensers, and metering devices.
4. Evacuate and charge a refrigeration system.
5. Diagnose and repair a domestic refrigerator.
Western Tech Catalog | 104
COURSE 8
AC 106
AIR CONDITIONING
40/60/4.5/4.0 The refrigeration cycle as applied to air conditioning will be covered. Students will be able to define comfort and
understand basic Psychrometric chart. The design and theory of operation of air conditioning systems including direct
expansion evaporators, sensors and dehumidification will be explained.
Practical work experience consisting of general servicing, component replacement, schematic drawing and
troubleshooting of conventional and computer controlled Air Conditioners will also be included.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Wire heating and cooling systems.
2. Describe package and split air conditioning systems.
3. Define wet-bulb and dry-bulb temperatures.
4. Use and understand the purpose of a sling psychrometer and digital psychrometer.
COURSE 9
HS 109
HEATING SYSTEMS
40/60/4.5/4.0 In this course the student will be taught various types of heating systems in use today. Installation and repair
techniques will be discussed and demonstrated with emphasis on gas-fired, electric systems.
Practical work experience will consist of piping, venting, control testing, and wiring of electronic controls on
various heating systems. General diagnostics and servicing will be practiced.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Cut and thread black pipe.
2. Adjust gas valve pressure.
3. Perform a C0 check.
4. Adjust a thermostat heat anticipator.
5. Troubleshoot standing pilot and high efficiency furnaces.
COURSE 10
ACC 201
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course will cover commercial air conditioning systems including high pressure, low pressure, and absorption
chilled water systems. Students will also cover cooling towers, pumps, commercial package units, variable refrigerant
flow, and variable air volume systems.
Practical work experience will consist of diagnostic procedures applied to electrical circuits, refrigerant circuits
and water circuits.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify major components of a chilled water system
2. Explain the proper operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting procedures of chilled water systems
3. Perform start-up and troubleshoot a scroll chilled water system
COURSE 11
RC 203
COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION
40/60/4.5/4.0 In this course students will cover commercial refrigeration systems including single compressor and parallel
compressor, or supermarket rack systems. The design and theory of operation of reach-in, walk-in freezers, and
coolers will be taught. An in-depth study of controls to regulate commercial systems completes this stage.
Practical work experience will consist of schematic diagram tracing, diagnostics and general servicing. The
equipment used for practical work will be medium and low temperature commercial units normally found in
supermarkets, restaurants, and food storage places.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Define and measure superheat, sub-cooling, and compressor efficiency.
2. Pump down a refrigeration system and perform component removal.
3. Diagnose, set, and install pressure devices.
4. Diagnose, set, and install defrost time clocks.
Western Tech Catalog | 105
COURSE 12
HEM 206
ELECTRIC MOTORS AND CONTROLS
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course teaches the theory, operation, installation and maintenance of electric motors and electric motor
controllers. Three phase compressors and three phase starting circuits. Students will learn about and train on variable
frequency drive trainers where they will learn to program and troubleshoot VFD’s. Practical work projects will
include various motors, controls, and control panels.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Wire stop-start switches with line voltage controls.
2. Install and operate 120 volt on-delay timer with motor control.
3. Wire sequence controls.
4. Identify and wire three-phase wye and delta motor circuit connections.
5. Program and troubleshoot Variable Frequency Drive’s
COURSE 13
REA 210
RENEWABLE ENERGY APPLICATIONS
16/24/1.5/2.0 This course covers basic renewable energy platforms in distributed power generation and common
configurations, specifically in photovoltaics (solar energy). Students will cover basic design principles and
installation procedures. At the end of this course, students will take the NABCEP entry level exam. The NABCEP
entry level exam is recognized industry wide as a prerequisite for industry certifications and aids in qualification and
competency of industry professionals.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify the major components of a Photovoltaic system
2. Differentiate between Photovoltaic power generating platforms
3. Apply design concepts in series and parallel configurations
4. Develop a working knowledge in mechanical structures required for Photovoltaic installations
5. Understand key concepts in National Electrical Code Articles related to electrical safety and
Photovoltaics.
COURSE 14
IM 204
ICE MAKING MACHINES
24/36/2.5/2.0 This course will provide the student with the general knowledge to diagnose and repair ice machines. Installation
and service procedures will be presented and discussed. Proper piping practices will be taught that will enable the
student to properly install a remote condenser ice maker.
Practical work will consist of diagnosing electrical circuits, refrigerant charge, water circuit and other
malfunctions to ice makers. Commercial types of ice makers commonly found in the industry will contain
electromechanical as well as electronic controls.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Demonstrate the sequence of operation on various ice machines.
2. Demonstrate proper ice machine cleaning procedures on various ice machines.
3. Demonstrate proper ice machine sanitizing procedures on various ice machines.
4. Operate, diagnose, and repair various ice machines of various sizes and manufacturers.
COURSE 15
RM 207
REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
40/60/4.5/4.0 According to Section 608 of the Clean Air Act of 1990, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), has made
it a requirement that persons servicing or disposing of air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment be certified. It
also limits the sale of refrigerants to certified technicians. In this course, the student learns the regulations, and
techniques and equipment necessary in order to pass the certification examination. The student must obtain his
certification in Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, or Universal class in order to pass the course. In addition, the student will
receive training in R-410A refrigerant safety. This will allow them to pass the Safety Certification exam that enhances
their refrigerant management skills. In addition, the student will receive training in R-410A refrigerant safety.
Practical work experience will consist of refrigerant recovery, recycling and charging refrigeration systems using
up-to-date procedures and equipment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Set up and operate portable scales.
2. Demonstrate proper refrigerant recovery methods.
Western Tech Catalog | 106
3. Demonstrate proper refrigerant recycling methods.
4. Properly evacuate and charge a refrigeration system.
COURSE 16
HDI 208
DIAGNOSTIC AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
40/60/4.5/4.0 This course introduces the student to the latest and most accurate diagnostic procedures used in the field as it
applies to electrical, mechanical, and air flow problems. The course will cover low, medium, and high temperature
systems used in heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration industry. Electrical diagrams will be shown
and pressure temperature relationships will be explained.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Demonstrate proper leak testing, vacuum, and charging methods.
2. Measure and adjust superheat and sub-cooling.
3. Demonstrate proper field wiring.
4. Demonstrate mechanical techniques on a variety of equipment.
COURSE 17
PSY 202
PSYCHOLOGY FOR SUCCESS
20/30/2.0/2.0 The Psychology for Success course serves to introduce the student to basic principles of psychology and apply
those principles to the work environment. This course is designed to develop the student’s communication and soft
skills. This course is designed to address the need employers have for skilled employees who are proficient at
problem-solving, who possess communication skills, and who will commit to a task. The student will be required to
participate in group discussions, group presentations, and individual presentations on real-world practical
applications.
The student can expect 15 hours of homework during this course. Upon completion of this course, the student
will be able to do the following:
1. Discuss the importance of human relations to organizations and careers.
2. Describe the contributions of four major theorists to the study of human motivation.
3. Discuss ways in which to behave ethically at work.
4. Name the steps in conflict resolution.
5. Describe characteristics and roles of effective team members.
6. Explain how to manage conflict.
7. Explain the importance of workplace etiquette.
8. Describe career advancement strategies.
9. Describe ways to maintain a healthy work-life balance.
COURSE 18
HIN 209
INTERNSHIP PROGRAM
8/0/152/3.5/3.5 The internship program allows the student to experience situations which occur during the daily operation of a
working shop as students are placed with a local employer and apply the knowledge and skills learned in the
classroom and shop/lab. Participation in the internship program requires that the student satisfactorily completes all
previous program courses.
The student will be placed in an approved HVAC/R repair, service or maintenance facility without monetary
compensation. The internship coordinator will supervise each student’s progress during the 160-clock hour
internship. Supervision consists of weekly student evaluations and scheduled/unscheduled weekly site visits. A
weekly evaluation will be completed by the intern site manager. Students will be required to attend school one day
per week for a classroom session during the internship experience. During this class period the intern coordinator
will review the student’s weekly evaluation as well as any recommendations made by the site manager or coordinator.
Time will be taken to review any deficiencies suited by the site manager. A study program will be established by
the extern coordinator and progress will be monitored each week during the class session. The student must
successfully meet each requirement of the internship in order to qualify for graduation.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to: 1. Demonstrate entry-level competency of the HVAV/R skills identified under the Graduate Warranty Skills initiative.
2. Demonstrate the ability to work as a team member during the internship experience.
3. Understand the responsibilities and duties of the HVAC/R technician in the workplace.
Workforce Skills Development Training will also be included.
Western Tech Catalog | 107
ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus & 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
Copyright: <a href='http://www.123rf.com/profile_nexusplexus'>nexusplexus / 123RF Stock Photo</a>
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
The AAS Degree in Business Administration and Management will help students learn to cultivate a variety of
skills and assets needed by businesses. Supervisors directly oversee and coordinate the activities of clerical and
administrative support workers. Supervisors of Office and Administrative Support Workers held about 119,490 jobs
in 2010. There was above average growth rate in colleges and universities, office administrative services, and an
average growth rate in business support services. Employment growth is projected to increase by 53.90% in Texas
and 14.30% nationally.
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 115,420 National Employment 2012: 1,424,450
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 139,670 Projected National Employment 2022: 1,589,600
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 24,250 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 171,500
Percent Change 2012-2022: 21.00% Percent Change 2012-2022: 12.10%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $26.96 Average Hourly Wage 2013: $27.01
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
2,745 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
2,425 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 108
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT PROGRAM Pearson “My Foundations” Exam
Prospective students will take the Pearson “My Foundations” exam prior to starting the program. Students do not
have to pass a threshold to be admitted to the program. However, students that fall below the established benchmark
will be required to complete the Pearson “My Foundations” modules for strengthening. Students can begin the online
modules before the first day of class, but will have up to the end of the 1st term to complete the prescribed modules.
Students who do not complete the Pearson “My Foundations” modules will not be allowed to continue in the program
until they are completed.
Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Applied Science in Business Administration and Management program
will receive training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination
of classes being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 50% of the training and
education on-ground and 50% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Business Administration and Management program is a hybrid program. It has established
technical standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these
standards and essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the
program satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that
meets the set academic requirements
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with
fellow students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by
Western Tech
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and
sentences
5. The ability to see details at close range (within a few feet of the observer)
6. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness
7. The ability to work with others in a team environment
8. The ability to respect instructor, classmates, and internship staff and customers
9. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as
Word, Outlook, and Excel.
10. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
Western Tech Catalog | 109
AAS DEGREE IN BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
COURSES 1-20
1216 CLOCK HOURS
63.50 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC
& THECB)
63.50 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The Business Administration and Management
Associate degree program will help students learn to
cultivate a variety of skills and assets needed by
businesses. The program will provide students with the
knowledge and technical skills needed for positions in
business and may also provide students with
opportunities for career advancement. The program
provides training in a variety of courses including: the
Principles of Management, Organizational Ethics and
Behavior, Accounting Principles, Marketing, Human
Resource Management, among others. It will also
provide hands-on experience in Microsoft Word and
Excel. This program provides General Education,
technical, and specialized courses that will prepare the
graduate for careers in private, public, and government
sectors. Students may find employment as an office
manager, program coordinator, office supervisor,
administrative office assistant, data entry clerk, office
specialist, general manager, property manager, public
relations specialist, retail supervisor, operation
coordinator, business manager, logistics clerk, office
clerk, executive assistant, project coordinator, assistant
project manager, advertising rep, marketing
coordinator, HR assistant among other business
positions.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
48/48/160/4.0
Theory hours per course/
Lab hours per course/
Internship hours per course/
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of the classes may differ from
that included in the program outline.
Western Tech Catalog | 110
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE
ON CAMPUS/
ONLINE
TWC/THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 BMGT
1327
Principles of
Management 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
2 ITSC
1209
MS Office
Applications I 48 32/16 50%/50% 2.5 2.5
3 ITSC
2221
MS Office
Applications II 48 32/16 50%/50% 2.5 2.5
4 ENGL
1301
Composition I 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
5 HRPO
2301
Human Resource
Management 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
6 MATH
1312
Basic Algebra 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
7 ACNT
1525
Accounting
Principles I 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
8 BMGT
1341
Business Ethics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
9 SCOM
1211
Fundamentals of
Human
Communication
48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
10 ACNT
1526
Accounting
Principles II 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
11 MRKG
1311
Principles of
Marketing 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
12 ECON
2301
Principles of
Macroeconomics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
13 GEOL
1301
Geology 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
14 BUSG
2317
Business Law 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
15 ACNT
1229
Payroll
Accounting 48 38/10 50%/50% 2.5 2.5
16 MATH
1321
Business
Mathematics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
17 ACNT
1213
Computerized
Accounting
(QuickBooks)
96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
18 PSYC
2301
General
Psychology 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
19 BMGT
2210
Professionalism 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
20
BMGT
1388
Business
Administration &
Management
Internship
160 0/0/160 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours-AAS Degree in Business
Administration and Management 1216
870/186/
160 63.5 63.5
Students in the Business Administration and
Management program will qualify for certifications in
Word, Excel, Payroll, Bookkeeping, and QuickBooks.
Student can earn digital badges in selective
courses. Badges will create a learning pathway
throughout their program. A digital badge is a
representation of a skill a student has learned. Badges
verify their skills and achievements that may be
industry-specific or internally prepared badges and can
be displayed digitally on their resumes. Western
Technical College offers 8 digital badges: Word, Excel,
Payroll, QuickBooks, Marketing, Principles of
Management, Human Resources, and Business Ethics.
Western Tech Catalog | 111
COURSE 1
BMGT 1327
Principles of Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course explores the rich concepts and
applications of management. Students will learn to
apply management concepts about decision making,
foundations of planning, managing change, effective
communication, operations management, and team
building.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Define management and Operations
management
2. Understand globalization and how it
affects organizations
3. Become acquainted with the foundation of
decision making
4. Understand organizational structure and
design
5. Be able to apply principles of Human
Resource Management
6. Understand the foundations of human
behavior and motivating and rewarding
employees
7. Understand managing change, innovation,
groups, managing work teams, leadership
and trust
8. Know how to manage communication and
information
COURSE 2
ITSC 1209
MS Office Applications I
32/16/0/2.5/2.5 Students will be introduced to Word. The course will
concentrate on hands-on experience with the features of
Microsoft Office. Students will learn to format text,
compress files, create new documents, insert and format
graphics, create tables, insert footnotes, create columns,
use mail merge, create charts, and insert hyperlinks.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Save files in new folders, print, save, use
comments and track changes in a
document
2. Format text and paragraphs
3. Create a document using tables and
templates to create resumes and cover
letters
4. Create research papers, newsletters, and
merged mailing labels
5. Create a blog post, web content, insert
hyperlinks and use advanced editing tools
6. Create mass mailings
7. Embed and link objects and use macros
COURSE 3
ITSC 2221
MS Office Applications II
32/16/0/2.5/2.5 Students will be introduced to Microsoft Excel. The
course will concentrate on hands-on experience with the
features of Microsoft Office. Students will learn to
create worksheets and charting data, tables, pie-charts,
diagrams, templates, pivot tables and pivot charts,
formulas, format worksheets, and evaluate complex
formulas.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Create and manage worksheets and
workbooks.
2. Manage data cells and ranges
3. Create tables
4. Perform Operations with formulas &
functions
5. Create Charts and objects.
COURSE 4
ENGL 1301
Composition I
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The student, focusing on the academic essay, will
study the principles and techniques of expository and
persuasive composition, including drafting, revising,
and editing in paragraphs and essays and will produce a
resume.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Use paragraphs as building blocks of
essays.
2. Explain the means of persuasion and
strategies for evaluating evidence.
3. Demonstrate technical writing skills and
concise written communication.
4. Distinguish among academic writing,
writing for work, and informal writing.
5. Evaluate what was read and make editorial
suggestions.
6. Write an expository and a persuasive
essay.
COURSE 5
HRPO 2301
Human Resources Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course provides an in-depth study and practice
of personnel management or human resource
management. It includes the process of acquiring,
training, appraising, and compensating employees, and
of attending to their labor relations, health and safety,
and fairness concerns.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Explain why human resource management
is important to all managers and describe
the trends that are influencing it.
2. Summarize the basic equal employment
opportunity laws and how each impacts
HR functions such as recruitment and
selection
3. Explain the basic defenses against
discrimination allegations and provide
examples of what employers can and
cannot legally do with respect to
recruitment, selection, and promotion and
layoff practices
4. Describe three important strategic human
resource management tools
Western Tech Catalog | 112
5. Write job descriptions, including
summaries and job functions, using the
Internet and traditional methods
6. Explain and give examples of the need for
branding in effective recruiting and how to
do a background check on job candidates
7. List and explain the five steps in the
training process and the pros and cons of
at least eight performance appraisal
methods
8. Define employee relations and discuss at
least four methods for managing
COURSE 6
MATH 1312
Basic Algebra
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The student will study relations and functions,
including polynomial, rational, exponential,
logarithmic, and special functions. Other topics include
systems of equations and its applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Use scientific notation.
2. Perform operations on and factor
polynomials.
3. Graph, solve and apply linear and
quadratic equations.
4. Perform operations on and solve rational
equations.
5. Calculate and define ratio and proportions.
6. Solve systems of linear equations.
7. Analyze functions.
COURSE 7
ACNT 1525
Accounting Principles I
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course will develop an understanding of
accounting principles relating to business operations.
The course will concentrate on generally accepted
principles, the accounting process, assets and liabilities,
journalizing, and posting adjusting entries. Students
will be able to record transactions and adjusting entries,
post to the ledger, close periods, and see the effects in
the ledger accounts.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Examine and prepare Income Statements,
Statement of Retained Earnings, and
Balance Sheets
2. Understand assets, liabilities, owner’s
equity, and the importance of financial
statements
3. Use revenue and expense accounts
4. Define the drawing account
5. List the rules of debit and credit
6. Understand permanent and temporary
accounts and the general journal
7. Correct journal and ledger errors
8. Understand journalizing, posting adjusting
entries, and the closing process
COURSE 8
BMGT 1341
Business Ethics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The course will focus on the moral and ethical issues
of businesses. This course will focus on business
decision making, ethics, economics and law, ethical
organizational decision making, market ethics, whistle-
blowing, trade secrets and conflict of interest,
discrimination and affirmative action, marketing,
advertising, product safety, employment rights and
ethics in finance.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Understand ethical management and ethics
in organizations and describe the two
realms that law and ethics govern
2. Describe breaches and fraud
3. Identify the rules of business ethics and
describe ethical requirement specific to
professionals
4. Describe the Kantian Ethics
5. Identify employee rights and describe the
justification of whistle-blowing and the
meaning of loyalty
6. Describe trade secrets, conflict of interest,
the challenges of privacy, and the meaning
of discrimination and harassment
7. Understand the distinction between safety
and health
8. Describe the relationship between ethics
and economics and describe business
decisions that are unethical even if legal
COURSE 9
SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of Human Communication
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Study of human communication as a process.
Overview of the principals of interpersonal, small group
and presentation skills essential to effective social,
business, and professional interaction. Emphasis on
examining the role of self-concept, perception, culture,
verbal, nonverbal, and written communication.
Applying effective writing principles and strategies for
understanding and presenting information for various
purposes and audiences.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify the components of
communication and its barriers.
2. Analyze the audience and describe the
criteria for choosing communication
media.
3. Communicate ethically and avoid potential
legal consequences of communication.
4. Plan the purpose, content and organization
of message.
5. Proofread message, revise for content,
style and correctness.
6. Prepare and deliver a presentation.
Western Tech Catalog | 113
COURSE 10 ACNT 1526
Accounting Principles II
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course is a continuation of Accounting
I. Students apply concepts related to Accounts
Receivable, long-term liabilities, fixed assets, inventory
valuation, Partnerships, Corporations, process costing,
cost-volume analysis, cost allocation and responsibility
accounting. Students will be able to launch Connect for
practice purposes and lab.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Journalize transactions for Accounts
Receivable, long-term notes payable and
mortgage payable
2. Describe bonds payable and report
liabilities on the balance sheet
3. Use commonly used depreciation methods
4. Describe and illustrate how debt and
equity securities are reported
5. Explain different inventory valuations
such as FIFO, LIFO, Average cost method
6. Explain how financial statements are used
to analyze a business and perform a
horizontal and vertical analysis of
financial statements
7. Record materials and labor costs in a job
order costing system
8. Prepare a production cost report using the
weighted-average method and use cost-
volume profit analysis for profit planning
COURSE 11
MRKG 1311
Principles of Marketing
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course involves the systematic planning,
implementation and control of a mix of business
activities intended to bring together buyers and sellers
for the mutually advantageous exchange or transfer of
products.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Understand the marketplace and customers
and identify the fire core marketplace
concepts
2. Describe customer relationship
management, identify strategies for
creating value for customers, create
business portfolios and develop growth
strategies
3. Describe how changes in the demographic
and economic environments affect
marketing decisions
4. Describe how companies analyze and use
marketing information and how companies
find and develop new-product ideas
5. List and define the major types of buying
decision behavior and the stages in the
buyer decision process
6. Define the major steps in designing a
customer-driven marketing strategy:
market segmentation, targeting,
differentiation, and positioning
7. Identify the three major pricing strategies
and discuss the importance of
understanding customer-value
perceptions, company costs, and
competitor strategies when setting prices
8. Define the need to understand competitors
as well as customers through competitor
analysis
COURSE 12
ECON 2301
Principles of Macroeconomics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 An analysis of the economy as a whole including
measurement and determination of Aggregate Demand
and Aggregate Supply, national income, inflation, and
unemployment. Other topics include international trade,
economic growth, business cycles, and fiscal policy and
monetary policy.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Explain the role of scarcity, specialization,
opportunity cost and cost/benefit analysis
in economic decision-making.
2. Identify the determinants of supply and
demand; demonstrate the impact of shifts
in both market supply and demand curves
on equilibrium price and output.
3. Define and measure national income and
rates of unemployment and inflation.
4. Identify the phases of the business cycle
and the problems caused by cyclical
fluctuations in the market economy.
5. Define money and the money supply;
describe the process of money creation by
the banking system and the role of the
central bank.
6. Construct the aggregate demand and
aggregate supply model of the macro
economy and use it to illustrate
macroeconomic problems and potential
monetary and fiscal policy solutions.
7. Explain the mechanics and institutions of
international trade and their impact on the
macro economy.
8. Define economic growth and identify
sources of economic growth.
COURSE 13
GEOL 1301
Geology
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course introduces students to the study of the
materials and processes that have modified and shaped
the surface and interior of Earth over time. These
processes are described by theories based on
experimental data and geologic data gathered from field
observations.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to do the following:
1. Describe how the scientific method has led
to our current understanding of Earth’s
structure and processes.
2. Interpret the origin and distribution of
minerals, rocks and geologic resources.
Western Tech Catalog | 114
3. Explain the theory of plate tectonics and its
relationship to the formation and
distribution of Earth’s crustal features.
4. Quantify the rates of physical and
chemical processes acting on Earth and
how these processes fit into the context of
geologic time.
5. Associate how surface processes are
driven by interactions among Earth’s
systems (e.g., the geosphere, hydrosphere,
biosphere, and atmosphere).
6. Identify and describe the internal structure
and dynamics of Earth.
7. Appreciate the interactions of humans with
Earth (e.g., resource development or
hazard assessment).
COURSE 14
BUSG 2317
Business Law
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course provides an overview of business law and
introduces fundamental principles encountered in the
business environment. Some of the topics include
courts and jurisdiction, judicial, bankruptcy and
organization, torts, crimes and intellectual property,
contracts and e-commerce, liability, equal opportunity
limited partnership and special partnership,
employment, and e-filing.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Understand constitutional law for business
and e-commerce
2. Understand criminal law and cyber crimes
3. Define third-party rights and discharge
4. Understand key terms and concepts of the
formation of sales and lease contracts
5. Identify credit, mortgages, and debtor’s
rights
6. Become acquainted with employment,
worker protection, and immigration law
7. Identify and describe the different types of
business entities such as: sole
proprietorship, partnerships, corporations
etc.
COURSE 15
ACNT 1229
Payroll Accounting
38/10/0.5/2.5 Students will be introduced to payroll laws and
regulations, determine gross earnings, payroll
deductions, federal and state payroll taxes, and tax
reports. A comprehensive practice set requires students
to perform payroll functions for a small business. This
practice set will conclude with the end-of-quarter and
end-of-year activities that all businesses must go
through.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Define and explain the terms represented
by these abbreviations: IRS, OASDI,
FICA, FUTA, SUTA, ERISA
2. Describe the general types of withholding
allowances to which an employee will be
entitled
3. Define the common payroll periods:
weekly, biweekly semimonthly, and
monthly and the difference between
temporary and contract workers
4. Compute gross earning based on regular
and overtime hours worked and describe
how an EFT payroll system works
5. Name several common “pretax” items that
lessen the amount of income tax for
employees
6. Use federal and state wage-bracket tables
to determine income taxes due on
employee earnings
7. Calculate social security and Medicare
taxes on employee earnings
8. Compute the earnings from tips of an
employee, explain how taxes on these
earnings are recorded, and complete an
annual state report of wages paid and tax
owed
COURSE 16
MATH 1321
Business Mathematics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course explores the rich concepts and
applications for students in business, management,
natural, and social sciences. Students will learn to
apply mathematics concepts involving fractions,
working with decimals, first level equations, portion
formula, discounts, markups and markdowns, simple
and compound interest, annuities, and discount notes.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide fractions.
2. Work with decimals.
3. Solving first levels equations for the
unknown.
4. Solving the portion formula.
5. Solving single & chain discounts.
6. Solve markups & markdowns.
7. Solve simple interest, future value, and
present value.
8. Solve compound interest, future value,
and present value.
9. Solve annuities, future value, and present
value.
COURSE 17
ACNT 1213 Computerized Accounting (QuickBooks)
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course is designed to present accounting
concepts and their relationship to QuickBooks.
Students will learn the underlying accounting concepts
and receive hands-on training on how to implement
them in QuickBooks. The course introduces students to
QuickBooks accounting for a service business, a
merchandising business, payroll, and a company setup
for QuickBooks. Students will record business
transactions using an up-to-date commercial software
Western Tech Catalog | 115
program designed for and used by businesses and
accountants.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Recognize QuickBooks forms and
understand the use of lists and registers in
QuickBooks
2. Prepare QuickBooks graphs and use
QuickReport within graphs
3. Create invoices, record sales transactions
on account, and create payroll checks
4. Understand the concepts for computerized
accounting for payables
5. Record depreciation and enter the
adjusting entries required for accrual-basis
accounting.
6. Use the Customer Center to obtain
information regarding credit customers
7. Customize a purchase order template
8. Set up a company using the EasyStep
Interview and QuickBooks Setup
COURSE 18
PSYC 2301
General Psychology
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The student will be introduced to the basic principles of
psychology and apply those principles to a particular
field of knowledge or activity.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Understand human developmental phases.
2. Explain the basic psychological concepts.
3. Appreciate the theorists’ explanations of
human behavior.
4. Describe the therapeutic approaches
5. Identify psychological disorders, their
causes and treatments
6. Apply psychological principles to
understanding and working with co-
workers and clients.
COURSE 19
BMGT 2210
Professionalism
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course focuses on career preparation, job search
tools and resources, and professionalism. In addition,
students will be assigned a project that will allow them
to use the skills learned in the program. Students will
demonstrate the practical application of skills learned in
other courses. Student will also perform in a mock
interview with a real-world employer that will grade
them on their interviewing skills. The mock interview
will also prepare the students for interviews in their job
seeking endeavors Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Conduct a targeted job search, including a
realistic job preview
2. Create a job search portfolio
3. Identify references to be used in your job
search and sources for job lead
4. Identify the steps for building a resume
package and create a resume and cover
letter
5. Demonstrate strategies to implement when
invited to an interview
6. Discuss salary negotiation strategies
7. Define a team and its functions
8. Conduct collaborative work in the
community
COURSE 20
BMGT 1388
Business Administration & Management
Internship
0/0/160/3.5/3.5 Internship will integrate the knowledge and skills
students learned in the program. Working under the
direction and supervision of business owners,
managers, supervisors, or industry experts, students
maintain ethical and professional work standards while
applying classroom learning. Students will receive
actual hands-on application in a workplace
environment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Recognize individual and cultural
differences and respond appropriately
2. Demonstrate initiative and interest in
performing the duties assigned
3. Maintain good attendance and punctuality
4. Maintain a professional appearance and
ethical behavior
5. Demonstrate competency in Word, Excel,
Human Resource Management,
Marketing, Advertising, Accounting, and
Payroll.
6. Recognize ethical decision making
7. Use organizational skills and complete
projects assigned on a timely basis
8. Demonstrate ability to work in a team,
meet deadlines and keeping work area
clean and organized
Note: While every effort will be made to schedule
internship experiences for students in the evening
program to coincide with their school schedule, most
companies in the business field operate during regular
business hours, which is 8:00 a.m. to 5:00
p.m. Therefore, evening students must be prepared to
attend their internships during morning and/or afternoon
hours to successfully complete this program requirement.
Western Tech Catalog | 116
ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY
Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY
Electrical and electronics installers and repairers held about 139,100 jobs in 2014. Electrical and electronics
installers and repairers must understand electrical equipment and electronics. Electrical and electronics engineering
technicians also work closely with electrical and electronics engineers and computer hardware engineers in the
computer systems design services industry. Demand for these technicians overall is expected to be sustained by
demand for workers in this industry because of the continuing integration of computer and electronics systems.
Overall employment of electrical and electronics installers and repairers is projected to show little or no change from
2014 to 2024. (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 14,570 National Employment 2012: 146,500
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 17,130 Projected National Employment 2022: 146,500
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 2,560 Absolute Change 2012-2022: N/A
Percent Change 2012-2022: 17.60% Percent Change 2012-2022: N/A
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $30.07 Average Hourly Wage 2014: $29.01
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
300 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
255 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Applied Science in Electronics Engineering Technology program will
receive training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination of
classes being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 80% of the training and
education on-ground and 20% online.
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
Western Tech Catalog | 117
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
WESTERN TECH OFFERS
CERTIFICATION TESTING TO ITS
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY GRADUATES
WHAT IS ISCET? ISCET, The International Society of Certified Electronics Technicians was founded in 1965. It is a professional
certification designed to measure the degree of theoretical knowledge and technical proficiency of practicing
technicians. All Western Tech students enrolled in the Electronics Engineering Technology program are encouraged
to take the Associate- Level CET examination upon completion of course nine, Industrial Journeyman CET exam
upon completion of course 14, and Communications Journeyman CET exams upon completion of course 22. The
Associate CET covers basic electronics, math, DC and AC circuits, transistors and diode circuits, and
troubleshooting. While the Journeyman exam covers detailed subjects in each of the available specialties of
Industrial, Communications, Bio-medical Equipment, Consumer, Radar, and Computers.
HOW DO WESTERN TECH GRADUATES BENEFIT FROM ISCET CERTIFICATION? The certification concept enables employers to separate knowledgeable job applicants from those with less
training and skills. The certification process can also assure employers and consumers that the technician possesses
the knowledge and training necessary to do a good job.
FOA Fiber Optic Association offer certifications to recognize acquired skills in the area of fiber optic technology and
equipment. Recipients demonstrate knowledge of fiber optics systems, and installations as well as skills in the use
of optical test equipment, fusion splicers, and optical connector installation.
IPC IPC provides the internationally-recognized JSTD-001 Hand soldering certification which demonstrates the
understanding of industry standards for high-reliability soldering as well as demonstrated skills in the assembly and
soldering of wires, terminals, Through-hole components, and surface-mount components.
WHAT IS COMP TIA? Comp TIA, the Computing Technology Industry Association, represents over 7,500 computer hardware and
software manufacturers, distributors, retailers, system integrators, and Internet companies. Comp TIA certifies
information technology and service professionals with its widely adopted certification programs.
Western Tech students are encouraged to take the A+ Certification examination upon completion of the EET
Technology 3 courses. The A+ Certification assesses basic computer service and repair technology skills. Students
are also encouraged to take the Network+ Certification examination upon completion of the EET Technology 4
course.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Electronic Engineering Technology program is a hybrid program. It has established technical
standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and
essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program
satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
Western Tech Catalog | 118
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
5. The ability to see details at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
6. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and brightness.
7. Sufficient finger dexterity and steadiness to make precisely coordinated movements of the fingers of
one or both hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
8. Sufficient manual dexterity and steadiness to quickly move your hand, your hand together with your
arm, or your two hands to grasp, manipulate, or assemble objects.
9. Performing physical activities that require considerable use of your arms and legs moving your whole
body, such as climbing, lifting, balancing, walking, stopping, and handling of materials.
10. The ability to use computers and computer systems (including hardware and software) to program, set
up functions, enter data, or process information.
11. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
12. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
AAS DEGREE IN ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY
COURSES 1-22
1744 CLOCK HOURS
73.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
73.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The graduate of this program will gain valuable
knowledge in DC/AC circuits, Solid State circuits,
Digital circuits, Digital Applications, PLCs, Industrial
Electronics, Basic Robotic Programing,
Communications Technology and Basic Computer and
Networking skills. In addition to the theoretical
knowledge gained in these areas, the graduate will gain
valuable hands-on experience in a diverse set of
technical areas. Specifically, the student will learn
about schematic reading, circuit analyzing and
troubleshooting circuits, fiber optic splicing and
termination techniques, program PLCs, Pneumatics and
Robotics, radio frequency (RF) transmitters and
receivers, microwave systems, cellular systems, and
networking devices. The experience gained from this
program will prepare the student for the following
professional certification examinations: The ISCET
Associate Level Certified Electronics Technician
(CET), ISCET Journeyman in Communications, ISCET
Journeyman in Industrial, the Fiber Optics
Association’s Certified Fiber Optics Technician
Certification, CompTIA A+ and Network+
Certification, and High Reliability Hand Soldering IPC
J Standard 001. The graduate of this program will be
qualified for entry-level employment as Electronic
Engineering Technician, Manufacturing Technician,
Automation Technician, Telecommunications
Technician, Test Technician, Electronics Repair
Technician, Bench Technician, Utilities Electronic
Technician, Fiber-Optic Technician, and Repair
Technician.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0/3.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)/
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
NOTE: The sequential order of classes may differ from that
included in the program outline below.
Western Tech Catalog | 119
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY
# COURSE TITLE
CLOCK
HOURS
(LEC/LAB/
TOTAL)
PERCENTAGE
ON
CAMPUS/
ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 MATH 1314 College Algebra and
Trigonometry 48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
2 CPMT 1405
IT Essentials: PC
Hardware and
Software
32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
3 PHYS 1301 College Physics I 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
4 ITNW 1458 Network+ 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
5 ENGL 1301 English Composition 48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
6 SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of
Human
Communication
48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
7 CETT 1403 DC Circuits 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
8 CETT 1405 AC Circuits 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
9 CETT 1441 Solid State Circuits 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
10 CETT 2339 Amplifiers 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
11 CETT 1425 Digital Fundamentals 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
12 CETT 1415 Digital Applications 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
13 LOTT 1301 Introduction to Fiber
Optics 16/32/48 100%/00 2.0 2.0
14 ELMT 2239
Advanced
Programmable Logic
Controllers
16/32/48 80%/20% 2.0 2.0
15 RBTC 2339 Robot Programming
and Diagnostics 16/32/48 80%/20% 2.0 2.0
16 ELMT 2333 Industrial Electronics 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
17 PSYC 2301 General Psychology 48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
18 INTC 2230
Instrumentation
Systems and
Troubleshooting
16/32/48 80%/20% 2.0 2.0
19 CETT 1304 High Reliability
Soldering 16/32/48 100%/00 2.0 2.0
20 EECT 2339 Communications
Circuits 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
21 EECT 2435 Telecommunications 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
22 EECT 2288
Internship -
Electronics and
Communications
Technology
0/0/160 00/00 3.5 3.0
Total Hours – AAS Degree in Electronics
Engineering Technology
656/928/160/
1744 73.5 73.0
**All ISS/EET students pursuing the AAS Degree
shall be required to complete at least two (2)
industry certifications in their field of study prior to
course twenty (20).
COURSE 1
MATH 1314
COLLEGE ALGEBRA AND
TRIGONOMETRY
48/0/3.0/3.0
The student will study relations and functions,
including polynomial, rational, exponential,
logarithmic, and special functions. Other topics
include systems of equations, trigonometric
functions and their applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Use scientific notation.
2. Perform operations on and factor
polynomials.
3. Graph, solve and apply linear and
quadratic equations.
4. Perform operations on and solve
rational equations.
5. Calculate and define ratio and
proportions.
6. Solve systems of linear equations.
7. Analyze functions.
8. Graph and analyze trigonometric
functions.
Western Tech Catalog | 120
COURSE 2
CPMT 1405
IT ESSENTIALS: PC HARDWARE AND
SOFTWARE
32/64/4.0/4.0 An introduction to the computer hardware and
software skills needed to help meet the growing
demand for entry-level information and
communication technology (ICT) professionals.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Explain the internal components of a
computer.
2. Assemble a computer system.
3. Install an operating system.
4. Install/connect associated peripherals.
5. Troubleshoot using system tools and
diagnostic software.
6. Use simulation and virtual software to
investigate networking concepts and
analyze network behavior.
COURSE 3
PHYS 1301
COLLEGE PHYSICS I
32/64/4.0/4.0
The student will learn the science of matter and
energy and the interactions between them through
traditional fields such as mechanics and
electromagnetism. It will cover concepts and
applications of units and vectors; motion in one and
two dimensions; Newton’s laws; energy; and,
basics of electricity and electromagnetism. Includes
Lab.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Understand units and conversions.
2. Explain one and two-dimensional
motion.
3. Apply the principles of Newton’s
Laws.
4. Analyze equations of force, work, and
energy and apply them.
5. Evaluate simple electric circuits using
Ohm’s Law.
COURSE 4
ITNW 1458
NETWORK+
32/64/4.0/4.0 Assists individuals in preparing for the
Computing Technology Industry Association
(CompTIA) Network+ certification exam and
career as a network professional.
Upon completion of this course, students will be
able to do the following:
1. Identify and define terminology,
hardware, and software components of
computer networks.
2. Utilize equipment, protocols, and
topologies to differentiate between
various network systems.
3. Demonstrate skills in installing
network hardware, software, and
cable.
4. Troubleshoot network connectivity;
configure network protocol.
5. Install and configure network client
software.
COURSE 5
ENGL 1301
ENGLISH COMPOSITION I
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student, focusing on the academic essay,
will study the principles and techniques of
expository and persuasive composition, including
drafting, revising, and editing in paragraphs and
essays and will produce a resume.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Use paragraphs as building blocks of
essays.
2. Explain the means of persuasion and
strategies for evaluating evidence.
3. Demonstrate technical writing skills
and concise written communication.
4. Distinguish among academic writing,
writing for work, and informal writing.
5. Evaluate what was read and make
editorial suggestions.
6. Write an expository and a persuasive
essay.
7. Prepare a personal resume.
COURSE 6
SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of Human Communication
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Study of human communication as a process.
Overview of the principals of interpersonal, small
group and presentation skills essential to effective
social, business, and professional interaction.
Emphasis on examining the role of self-concept,
perception, culture, verbal, nonverbal, and written
communication. Applying effective writing
principles and strategies for understanding and
presenting information for various purposes and
audiences.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Identify the components of
communication and its barriers.
2. Analyze the audience and describe the
criteria for choosing communication
media.
3. Communicate ethically and avoid
potential legal consequences of
communication.
4. Plan the purpose, content and
organization of message.
5. Proofread message, revise for content,
style and correctness.
6. Prepare and deliver a presentation.
7. Apply the do’s and don’ts of a proper
interview.
Western Tech Catalog | 121
COURSE 7
CETT 1403
DC CIRCUITS
32/64/4.0/4.0 During the first several days of class, the
students will receive a general school and program
orientation, to include training on how to utilize the
Learning Resource Center. The student will learn
the effects of resistance, voltage, current, and power
within an electrical circuit. This includes the study
of Ohm’s Law, resistors, series, parallel and series-
parallel in resistive DC sources. Additionally, the
student is exposed to the practical application of this
theory in comprehensive laboratory exercises.
During this course the student will also study the
physics behind magnetism and electromagnetism as
it applies to the next course on AC.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Identify and use resistor color codes;
2. Use Ohm’s law to calculate basic resistive
circuits;
3. Identify and construct series resistive circuits;
4. Identify and construct parallel resistive
circuits;
5. Use a digital multimeter to check the value of
a resistor;
6. Identify a series-parallel resistive circuit;
7. Identify and construct voltage and current
divider circuits;
8. Calculate the values needed in analyzing a
circuit that uses DC
COURSE 8
CETT 1405
AC CIRCUITS
32/64/4.0/4.0 The scope of this course includes RC time
constants, capacitor and inductor characteristics.
During laboratory exercises, students will measure
voltage and current in inductive circuits with AC
power applied. In addition, students are taught the
common use of laboratory equipment such as
oscilloscopes and signal generators. Students will
perform comprehensive laboratory exercises to
solidify the theoretical aspects taught during the
course. In addition, the scope of this course will
include the combined effects of inductance,
capacitance and resistance in AC and DC circuits.
Disciplines also presented are RLC circuit analysis,
passive filters and resonance circuit analysis.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Make necessary measurements using an
analog and digital Multimeter;
2. Make AC, DC, time, amplitude and frequency
measurements using a dual-trace oscilloscope;
3. Identify the phase difference between two
signals using an oscilloscope;
4. Identify series or parallel reactive circuits;
5. Make calculations necessary in order to
analyze input and output current requirements
pertinent to transformers;
6. Identify and construct filters of various types;
7. Analyze and calculate the impedance, voltage
drops and currents dealing with resistive,
capacitive and or inductive circuits.
COURSE 9
CETT 1441
SOLID STATE CIRCUITS
32/64/4.0/4.0 A study of various semiconductor devices
incorporated in circuits and their applications.
Emphasis on circuit construction, measurements,
and analysis.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Construct, analyze, test, and
troubleshoot circuits containing
various semiconductor devices.
COURSE 10
CETT 2339
AMPLIFIERS
32/64/4.0/4.0 Advanced study of electronic amplifier
applications; their construction, testing, and
alignment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Apply problem solving techniques for
the analysis and repair of multistage
amplifiers.
COURSE 11
CETT 1425
DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS
32/64/4.0/4.0 This course is an entry level course in digital
electronics to include numbering systems, logic
gates, Boolean algebra, and combinational logic.
Different types of circuits such as of flip-flops, shift
registers, adders, display decoders, multiplexers and
demultiplexers, semiconductor memories, and other
digital devices. The student is also introduced to
troubleshooting techniques. Laboratory exercises
during this course will provide the student practical
experience to reinforce the theory.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Convert between all number systems used in
digital electronics.
2. Use gates to perform logic functions using
Boolean Equations.
3. Analyze sequential logic devices used in
counters and shift registers.
4. Build and troubleshoot adder and subtractor
circuits.
5. Convert analog inputs into digital outputs and
vice versa.
COURSE 12
CETT 1415
DIGITAL APPLICATIONS
32/64/4.0/4.0 This course covers combinational and sequential
logic elements and circuits with emphasis on design
Western Tech Catalog | 122
and troubleshooting of combinational and
sequential circuits the benefits of Digital
Communications, digital transmission and data
conversions. Analog to digital and digital to analog
conversions are covered in depth. Parallel and serial
data transmission is also covered. Pulse code
modulation and pulse modulation is discussed in
detail. Time division multiplexing (TDM) and
frequency division multiplexing (FDM) will be
covered. Optical communications and the use of
optoelectronic devices will also be explored.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Give a step-by-step account of the
transmission of analog signals using digital
techniques.
2. List the advantages and disadvantages of the
three most common types of analog-to-digital
converters.
3. Explain why pulse code modulation has
superseded pulse amplitude modulation (PAM),
pulse width modulation (PWM), and pulse
position modulation (PPM) techniques.
4. Draw and fully label a block diagram of a
digital signal-processing (DSP) circuit.
5. Compare frequency division multiplexing
with time division multiplexing.
6. Define pulse-code modulation (PCM) and
state the primary benefits of PCM over other
forms of pulse modulation.
7. State the difference between asynchronous
and synchronous data transmission.
8. Explain the need for and types of
communication protocols.
9. Name the two types of optical transmitter
components and their main operating range.
10. Explain the operation of an optical detector
and receiver.
COURSE 13
LOTT 1301
INTRODUCTION TO FIBER OPTICS
16/32/2.0/2.0 An introductory course in fiber optics and its
application including advantages of fiber, light
transmission in fiber, types of fiber, sources,
detectors, and connectors. This course will
introduce the students to the origins of fiber optics.
Fiber optic components, installation, testing, and
safety will be the primary focus of this block of
instruction. The student will learn the types and
specifications of various cables and hot to choose
the proper cable for a particular project. Fiber optic
media to Ethernet signal converts mane by 3M
Communication Markets Division will be employed
in various networking labs. Reinforcing the
necessity to integrate fiber optic cabling and signal
conversion. Cable color coding, terminations,
testing and inspection will be covered in detail. The
Fiber Optics Association Certification and 3M
Certification, Fusion Splice Certification will be
presented to the student upon successful completion
of this course.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Full understanding of fiber optic systems
operation and hardware.
2. Hands on practice of assembly and polishing
of optical connectors
3. Identification of different fiber optic systems.
4. Training on the use of Optical Time Domain
reflectometers, fiber fusion splicers and optical
power meters
5. Certification as an FOA fiber technician
COURSE 14
ELMT 2239
ADVANCED PROGRAMMABLE
LOGIC CONTROLLERS
16/32/2.0/2.0 Advanced applications of programmable logic
controllers as used in industrial environments
including concepts of programming, industrial
applications, troubleshooting, and equipment will
be covered. The student will be introduced
programmable logic controllers with its devices,
symbols, interfaces, memories, programming
languages, and PLC ladder logic diagrams. Develop
ladder logic to utilize advanced PLC functions;
compose a ladder logic program to demonstrate an
advanced industrial control application; apply
advanced programming techniques for specialized
applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to: 1. Identify characteristics of a PLC and
its functions.
2. Learn the functions of counters,
timers, latching circuits and
interrupts.
3. Develop advanced ladder logic
diagrams using different PLC
scenarios.
COURSE 15
RBTC 2339
ROBOT PROGRAMMING AND
DIAGNOSTICS 16/32/2.0/2.0
A course in the programming of industrial
robotics, development of programming techniques,
and the diagnosis of faults in systems. The Robotics
course brings together aspects of modern electronic
processing methods and system design, to develop
automated systems that are applicable in many areas
including modern manufacturing, aerospace and
nuclear industries. A range of algorithms, tools and
development environments are covered, including
control systems, micro controller architecture, and
programmable digital systems, which enable
sophisticated systems to be developed, and
implemented in real world applications. The
Robotics course aims to provide graduates with a
broad and deep understanding of technology and
current practice in electronic engineering and its
applications in robotics including digital systems
and control systems.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
Western Tech Catalog | 123
1. Identify what a robot is and its
components.
2. Create a robotic script using a
coordinate system.
3. Develop software base programs
using different scenarios.
COURSE 16
ELMT 2333
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
32/64/4.0/4.0 This course will cover devices, circuits, and
systems primarily used in automated manufacturing
and/or process control. In-depth coverage of
transduction methods and the devices that perform
transduction will be covered. Also, computer
control and interfacing between mechanical,
electrical, electronic, and computer equipment will
be studied.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Describe how electronic input and output
circuits are used to control automated
manufacturing and/or process systems;
2. Identify basic elements used for input, output,
timing, and control;
3. Define how programmable electronic systems
use input data to alter output responses;
troubleshoot a representative system;
4. Demonstrate how system operation can be
altered with software programming
COURSE 17
PSYC 2301
GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student will be introduced to the basic
principles of psychology and apply those principles
to a particular field of knowledge or activity.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Understand human developmental
phases.
2. Explain the basic psychological
concepts.
3. Appreciate the theorists’ explanations
of human behavior.
4. Describe the therapeutic approaches.
5. Identify psychological disorders, their
causes and treatments.
6. Apply psychological principles to
understanding and working with co-
workers and clients.
COURSE 18
INTC 2230
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
16/32/2.0/2.0 This course will help the student learn
techniques for troubleshooting instrumentation
systems. Then, when and how to apply these
techniques to a process environment will be
examined. The student will learn how to
troubleshoot errors in industrial processes via the
software and hardware controls available.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Demonstrate various troubleshooting
techniques;
2. Troubleshoot startup problems either by
simulation or actual event;
3. Troubleshoot programming errors and correct
errors found in programs;
4. Troubleshoot various instrument faults and
process errors.
COURSE 19
CETT 1304
HIGH RELIABILITY SOLDERING
16/32/2.0/2.0 An explanation of the automated and hand
soldering processes plus J STD-001 Hand soldering
training including an understanding of the J STD-
001 criteria for acceptable solder connections as
well as component preparation, hand soldering,
repair, packaging, inspection, ESD control, and
process control with hands on experience and
critique for assembly and hand soldering of wires
and terminals, through-hole components and
surface mount components.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Full understanding of the J STD-001
Requirements for soldered electrical and
electronic components.
2. Hands on practice of assembly and hand
soldering of components
3. Experience of self-critique of work and
application of the standard.
4. Understanding of the causes, effects, and
contra electric-static Discharge as it applies to
electronic assemblies.
5. Familiarity with other material and process
standards related to the soldering standard.
6. Familiarity with Inspection techniques, repair
techniques
7. Familiarity with process control and statistical
process control.
8. Certification as an Application Specialist to
the J STD-001 Standard by IPC.
COURSE 20
EECT 2339
COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITS
32/64/4.0/4.0 Communications circuits and principles
including amplitude, frequency, and phase
modulation, transmitters, receiver, transmission
lines, antennas, and wave propagation. Lab
activities will include testing of modulators,
oscillators, use of spectrum analyzers, power
meters, signal generators, and service monitors.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. A thorough understanding of operating
principles, circuits, and test equipment used in
modern communication equipment.
Western Tech Catalog | 124
2. Ability to test, measure, and analyze various
communication circuits.
3. Ability to identify and assemble different
types of transmission lines and connectors
4. Ability to identify the basic types of antennas
and explain how arrays are used for directivity
and gain.
5. Learn to calculate various parameters
regarding system performance and apply them to
proper installation, maintenance, and repair of
Electronic Communication equipment.
COURSE 21
EECT 2435
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
32/64/4.0/4.0 During this course the student will be introduced
to Microwave, Satellite, Telephone, and cable-
based Communication systems. Waveguide theory,
Microwave vacuum tubes such as the Magnetron,
Klystron, and Traveling Wave Tube will be
covered. This course will also focus on Satellite
Communication systems including orbital
mechanics, the electronic components, and the
frequencies used. The second half of the course will
focus on Telephone systems and hardware with lab
exercises in punch-down and telephone circuits.
The student will learn how the telephone works, the
local loop and the central office, and how pulse and
DTMF dialing operate. Cordless and cellular
telephones, FAX, paging, WI-FI and Bluetooth
technologies will be discussed.
Upon completion of this course, the student will
be able to:
1. Describe the operation of the major
components of RF, microwave, Satellite, optical
and cable-based communications systems.
2. Learn to install, test, and maintain RF,
microwave, Satellite, optical and cable-based
communications systems.
3. Describe the components of the telephone
system and characteristics of the signals used.
4. Install and troubleshoot punchdown blocks for
Telephone and LAN systems
5. Prepare for professional technician
certification exams
COURSE 22
EECT 2288
INTERNSHIP- ELECTRONICS AND
COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY
0/0/160/3.5/3.0 The Internship Program will allow students to
experience situations that occur during the daily
operation of a working environment. Students will
be able to apply the knowledge and skills they have
learned in previous courses to the workplace
environment.
Each student will be placed in an approved
electronics repair, service, maintenance or
networking program without monetary
compensation to continue his/her training alongside
experienced technicians. The Internship Program
Coordinator will closely supervise each student’s
progress for a total of one hundred (100) clock
hours.
While at the extern site and upon completion of
this course, each student will have:
1. Demonstrated entry-level competency
of the Electronics Technician skills
identified as Graduate.
2. Warranty Skills in the repair, service,
maintenance and/or networking
environment.
3. Demonstrated social and
communication skills required
performing the duties of a technician.
4. Demonstrated the ability to work as a
team member.
5. Demonstrated the ability to understand
the responsibilities and complete the
duties assigned to them as a technician.
Western Tech Catalog | 125
ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN INFORMATION
SYSTEMS AND SECURITY Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or employees of Western Tech.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND SECURITY Computer support specialists held about 766,900 jobs in 2014. They work in many different industries, including
information technology (IT), education, finance, healthcare, and telecommunication. Employment of computer
support specialists is projected to grow 12 percent from 2014 to 2024, faster than the average for all occupations.
More support services will be needed as organizations upgrade their computer equipment and software. Computer
support staff will be needed to respond to the installation and repair requirements of increasingly complex computer
equipment and software. Most computer support specialists have full-time work schedules; however, many do not
work typical 9-to-5 jobs. Because computer support is important for businesses, support specialists must be available
24 hours a day (Source: D.O.L. Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2016-2017 Edition).
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 30,150 National Employment 2012: 366,400
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 36,620 Projected National Employment 2022: 409,400
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 6,640 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 42,900
Percent Change 2012-2022: 21.50% Percent Change 2012-2022: 11.70%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $40.12 Average Hourly Wage 2014: 38.35
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
475 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
645 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 126
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE INFORMATION
SYSTEMS AND SECURITY PROGRAM Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Associate of Applied Science in Information Systems and Security program will
receive training through a hybrid delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination of
classes being offered both on-ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 80% of the training and
education on-ground and 20% online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Information Systems and Security program is a hybrid program. It has established technical
standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and
essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program
satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that meets
the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with fellow
students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by Western
Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
5. The ability to see details at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
6. The ability to identify or detect a known pattern (a figure, object, word, or sound) that is hidden in other
distracting material.
7. The ability to imagine how something will look after it is moved around or when its parts are moved or
rearranged.
8. The ability to use computers and computer systems (including hardware and software) to program, set
up functions, enter data, or process information.
9. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as Word,
Outlook, and Excel.
10. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
Western Tech Catalog | 127
AAS DEGREE IN INFORMATION
SYSTEMS AND SECURITY
COURSES 1-20
1744 CLOCK HOURS
74.0 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
73.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The Graduate of the Associate of Applied Science
Degree in Information Systems and Security gains
knowledge and experience in the following areas:
Computer Hardware, Operating Systems, Local Area
Networking, Wide Area Networking, Cabling, Router
and Switch configurations, Microsoft Server and Client
administration, Network Security, sales and service.
Additional areas include Linux administration and an
emerging technologies component that entails wireless
applications and voice over IP, (VoIP). The skill set
presented in this program will prepare the graduate for
entry-level careers in PC service and repair, Network
Support, Desktop support and Network Security
administration. The graduate is prepared through the
program curricula to achieve CompTIA’s A+,
Network+, Security+, and Linux+ Certifications,
Microsoft’s Microsoft Certified Solutions Associate
(MCSA) Certification in Windows Server 2012,
Cisco’s Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA)
Certification, and Certified Ethical Hacker (CEH)
Certification.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0/3.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)/
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
NOTE: The sequential order of the classes may differ from
that included in the program outline below.
Western Tech Catalog | 128
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN INFORMATION
SYSTEMS AND SECURITY
# COURSE TITLE
CLOCK
HOURS
(LEC/LAB/
TOTAL)
PERCENTAGE
ON CAMPUS/
ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 MATH 1314 College Algebra and
Trigonometry 48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
2 CPMT 1405
IT Essentials: PC
Hardware and
Software
32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
3 PHYS 1301 College Physics I 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
4 CPMT 2445 Computer Systems
Troubleshooting 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
5 ENGL 1301 English Composition I 48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
6 SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of
Human
Communication
48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
7 ITNW 1358 Network+ 32/16/48 80%/20% 2.5 1.5
8 ITSY 2400 Operating System
Security 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
9* ITNW 1453 Supporting Network
Server Infrastructure 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
10* ITNW 2456
Designing a Network
Directory
Infrastructure
32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
11* ITNW 2405 Network
Administration 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
12 ITCC 1414 CCNA 1: Introduction
to Networks 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
13* ITCC 1440 CCNA 2: Routing and
Switching Essentials 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
14* ITCC 2412 CCNA 3: Scaling
Networks 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
15* ITCC 2413 CCNA 4: Connecting
Networks 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
16 PSYC 2301 General Psychology 48/0/48 80%/20% 3.0 3.0
17 ITSC 1416 Linux Installation and
Configuration 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
18 ITSY 2445 Network Defense and
Countermeasures 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
19 ITSY 2459 Security Assessment
and Auditing 32/64/96 80%/20% 4.0 4.0
20 CPMT 2488
Internship - Computer
Installation and Repair
Technology/
Technician
0/0/160 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours – AAS Degree in Information
Systems & Security
672/912/160/
1744 74.0 73.0
Note: Courses with prerequisites are denoted in the course outline with an asterisk (*).
All ISS/EET students pursuing the AAS Degree shall
be required to complete at least two (2) industry
certifications in their field of study prior to course
twenty (20).
COURSE 1
MATH 1314
COLLEGE ALGEBRA AND
TRIGONOMETRY
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student will study relations and functions,
including polynomial, rational, exponential,
logarithmic, and special functions. Other topics include
systems of equations, trigonometric functions and their
applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Use scientific notation.
2. Perform operations on and factor
polynomials.
3. Graph, solve and apply linear and
quadratic equations.
4. Perform operations on and solve rational
equations.
5. Calculate and define ratio and proportions.
Western Tech Catalog | 129
6. Solve systems of linear equations.
7. Analyze functions.
8. Graph and analyze trigonometric
functions.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 2
CPMT 1405
IT ESSENTIALS: PC HARDWARE AND
SOFTWARE
32/64/4.0/4.0 An introduction to the computer hardware and
software skills needed to help meet the growing demand
for entry-level information and communication
technology (ICT) professionals.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
7. Explain the internal components of a
computer.
8. Assemble a computer system.
9. Install an operating system.
10. Install/connect associated peripherals.
11. Troubleshoot using system tools and
diagnostic software.
12. Use simulation and virtual software to
investigate networking concepts and
analyze network behavior.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 3
PHYS 1301
COLLEGE PHYSICS I
32/64/4.0/4.0 The student will learn the science of matter and
energy and the interactions between them through
traditional fields such as mechanics and
electromagnetism. It will cover concepts and
applications of units and vectors; motion in one and two
dimensions; Newton’s laws; energy; and, basics of
electricity and electromagnetism. Includes Lab.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Understand units and conversions.
2. Explain one and two-dimensional motion.
3. Apply the principles of Newton’s Laws.
4. Analyze equations of force, work, and
energy and apply them.
5. Evaluate simple electric circuits using
Ohm’s Law.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 4
CPMT 2445
COMPUTER SYSTEMS
TROUBLESHOOTING
32/64/4.0/4.0 Principles and practices involved in computer
system troubleshooting techniques and repair
procedures including advanced diagnostic test
programs and the use of specialized test equipment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Develop hardware and software
troubleshooting techniques and perform
procedures used in troubleshooting.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 5
ENGL 1301
ENGLISH COMPOSITION I
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student, focusing on the academic essay, will
study the principles and techniques of expository and
persuasive composition, including drafting, revising,
and editing in paragraphs and essays and will produce a
resume.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
8. Use paragraphs as building blocks of
essays.
9. Explain the means of persuasion and
strategies for evaluating evidence.
10. Demonstrate technical writing skills and
concise written communication.
11. Distinguish among academic writing,
writing for work, and informal writing.
12. Evaluate what was read and make editorial
suggestions.
13. Write an expository and a persuasive
essay.
14. Prepare a personal resume.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 6
SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of Human Communication
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Study of human communication as a process.
Overview of the principals of interpersonal, small group
and presentation skills essential to effective social,
business, and professional interaction. Emphasis on
examining the role of self-concept, perception, culture,
verbal, nonverbal, and written communication.
Applying effective writing principles and strategies for
understanding and presenting information for various
purposes and audiences.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
8. Identify the components of
communication and its barriers.
9. Analyze the audience and describe the
criteria for choosing communication
media.
10. Communicate ethically and avoid potential
legal consequences of communication.
11. Plan the purpose, content and organization
of message.
12. Proofread message, revise for content,
style and correctness.
13. Prepare and deliver a presentation.
14. Apply the do’s and don’ts of a proper
interview.
Prerequisites: None
Western Tech Catalog | 130
COURSE 7
ITNW 1358
NETWORK+
32/16/2.5/1.5 Assists individuals in preparing for the Computing
Technology Industry Association (CompTIA)
Network+ certification exam and career as a network
professional.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to do the following:
6. Identify and define terminology, hardware,
and software components of computer
networks.
7. Utilize equipment, protocols, and
topologies to differentiate between various
network systems.
8. Demonstrate skills in installing network
hardware, software, and cable.
9. Troubleshoot network connectivity;
configure network protocol.
10. Install and configure network client
software.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 8
ITSY 2400
OPERATING SYSTEM SECURITY
32/64/4.0/4.0
Safeguard computer operating systems by
demonstrating server support skills and designing and
implementing a security system. Identify security
threats and monitor network security implementations.
Use the best practices to configure operating systems to
industry security standards.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify network security risks, security
design, and monitoring solutions.
2. Identify sources of computer threats,
evaluate potential practices, tools, and
technologies to protect individual network
systems.
3. Establish and sustain an operating system
security plan utilizing systems and
application security tools.
4. Implement procedures to secure and
monitor audit logs and set system
administrator alerts.
5. Develop an organizational operating
system security plan that provides for
periodic reviews of security policies,
procedures, authorized users list, and
software update patches.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 9
ITNW 1453
SUPPORTING NETWORK SERVER
INFRASTRUCTURE
32/64/4.0/4.0 Installing, configuring, managing, and supporting a
network infrastructure.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Install and configure DHCP, DNS, remote
access, network security using public key
infrastructure.
2. Integrate network services.
3. Deploy operating systems using remote
installation services.
Prerequisites: CPMT 2445 Computer
Systems Troubleshooting
COURSE 10
ITNW 2456
DESIGNING A NETWORK DIRECTORY
INFRASTRUCTURE
32/64/4.0/4.0 Design, implement, and support a network directory
infrastructure in a multi-domain environment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Describe the process for designing a
directory services infrastructure and a
network infrastructure that supports
directory services.
2. Design a site infrastructure that meets the
needs of an organization.
3. Design an administrative structure that
meets the needs of an organization.
4. Design a Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) structure that supports
directory services.
5. Design a name resolution strategy that
supports directory services.
Prerequisites: ITNW 1453 Supporting
Network Server Infrastructure
COURSE 11
ITNW 2405
NETWORK ADMINISTRATION
32/64/4.0/4.0 Topics include network components, user accounts
and groups, network file systems, file system security,
and network printing.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Describe the components of a local area
network and their relationship.
2. Create and administer user accounts and
groups.
3. Plan and set up network file systems.
4. Create effective file system security.
5. Implement and administer network
printing.
Prerequisites: ITNW 2456 Designing a
Network Directory Infrastructure
COURSE 12
ITCC 1414
CCNA 1: INTRODUCTION TO
NETWORKS
32/64/4.0/4.0 This course covers networking architecture,
structure, and functions; introduces the principles and
structure of IP addressing and the fundamentals of
Ethernet concepts, media, and operations to provide a
foundation for the curriculum.
Western Tech Catalog | 131
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Build simple LANs.
2. Perform basic configuration on routers and
switches.
3. Implement IP addressing schemes.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 13
ITCC 1440
CCNA 2: ROUTING AND SWITCHING
ESSENTIALS
32/64/4.0/4.0 Describes the architecture, components, and basic
operation of routers and explains the basic principles of
routing and routing protocols. It also provides an in-
depth understanding of how switches operate and are
implemented in the LAN environment for small and
large networks.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Configure and maintain routers and
switches.
2. Resolve common issues with routing
protocols, virtual LANs, and inter-VLAN
routing in both IPv4 and IPv6 networks.
Prerequisites: ITCC 1414 CCNA 1:
Introduction to Networks
COURSE 14
ITCC 2412
CCNA 3: SCALING NETWORKS
32/64/4.0/4.0 Covers the architecture, components, and operations
of routers and switches in larger and more complex
networks. Students learn how to configure routers and
switches using advanced protocols.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Configure advanced routing and
switching.
2. Resolve common issues with OSPF,
EIGRP, and STP in IP networks.
3. Implement a WLAN in a small-to-medium
network.
Prerequisites: ITCC 1440 CCNA 2: Routing
and Switching Essentials
COURSE 15
ITCC 2413
CCNA 4: CONNECTING NETWORKS
32/64/4.0/4.0 WAN technologies and network services required
by converged applications in a complex network;
enables students to understand the selection criteria of
network devices and WAN technologies to meet
network requirements.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Configure and troubleshoot network
devices Resolve common issues with data
link protocols.
2. Resolve common issues with OSPF,
EIGRP, and STP in both IPv4 and IPv6
networks.
3. Implement virtual private network (VPN)
operations in a complex network.
4. Implement security best practices.
Prerequisites: ITCC 2412 CCNA 3: Scaling
Networks
COURSE 16
PSYC 2301
GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student will be introduced to the basic principles
of psychology and apply those principles to a particular
field of knowledge or activity.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Understand human developmental phases.
2. Explain the basic psychological concepts.
3. Appreciate the theorists’ explanations of
human behavior.
4. Describe the therapeutic approaches.
5. Identify psychological disorders, their
causes and treatments.
6. Apply psychological principles to
understanding and working with co-
workers and clients.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 17
ITSC 1416
LINUX INSTALLATION AND
CONFIGURATION
32/64/4.0/4.0 Introduction to Linux operating system. Includes
Linux installation, basic administration, utilities and
commands, upgrading, networking, security, and
application installation. Emphasizes hands-on setup,
administration and management of Linux.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Install, administer, and manage a Linux
system.
2. Demonstrate proficiency with Linux
utilities, commands, and applications.
3. Identify and resolve security-based issues.
4. Integrate a Linux system into an existing
network.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 18
ITSC 2445
NETWORK DEFENSE AND
COUNTERMEASURES
32/64/4.0/4.0 This is a practical application and comprehensive
course that includes the planning, design, and
construction of defenses fora complex network that will
sustain an attack, document events, and mitigate the
effects of the attack.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Assemble network defense tools.
2. Differentiate between authorized and
unauthorized activity on a network.
Western Tech Catalog | 132
3. Respond to a breach in security through
the use of countermeasures designed to
minimize the impact of the breach on the
network.
4. Document network events.
5. Present an analysis of network breach and
plan for remediation.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 19
ITSY 2459
SECURITY ASSESSMENT AND
AUDITING
32/64/4.0/4.0 Comprehensive experience for the security
curriculum. Synthesizes technical material covered in
prior courses to monitor, audit, analyze, and revise
computer and network security systems that ensure
appropriate levels of protection are in place to assure
regulatory compliance.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Appraise security plan to ensure
appropriate level of protection.
2. Assess network security design.
3. Audit network system based on security
design.
4. Use relevant tools to assure security
requirements.
5. Review security policies and procedures
on a regular basis.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 20
CPMT 2488
INTERNSHIP – COMPUTER INSTALL
AND REPAIR TECHNOLOGY /
TECHNICIAN
0/0/160/3.5/3.5 The internship will allow the student to experience
situations that occur during the daily operation of an
Information Technology Department. The student will
be able to apply the knowledge and skills he/she has
learned in the previous courses to the workplace
environment. The student entering the internship
program must have satisfactorily completed all courses
of the Information Technology program before being
placed in a participating site.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Describe standard operating procedures
for the IT industry.
2. Add work experience of his/her internship.
Prerequisites: None
Western Tech Catalog | 133
ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL
THERAPIST ASSISTANT Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES
FOR PHYSICAL
THERAPIST ASSISTANTS Physical therapist assistants held
about 88,300 jobs in 2016, much
faster than the average for all
occupations. Employment of physical
therapist assistants is projected to
grow 31 percent from 2016 to 2026,
much faster than the average for all
occupations. Demand for physical
therapy services is expected to
increase in response to the health
needs of an aging population,
particularly the large baby-boom
generation. Physical therapist
assistants sometimes called PTAs
work under the direction and
supervision of physical therapists.
They help patients who are
recovering from injuries and illnesses
regain movement and manage pain.
Physical therapist assistants are
involved in the direct care of patients
(Source: D.O.L. Occupational
Outlook Handbook, 2017-2018
Edition).
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students,
graduates or employees of Western Tech.
Western Tech has developed its application process
for the PTA program in a manner that is intended to be
non-discriminatory and objective. The criteria noted in
the point summary sheet from which the applicants are
selected, is irrelevant of race, color, national origin, sex,
disability, age, veteran status, religion, or any other
protected status. In order to ensure optimal objectivity
with the interview process, the following measures are
taken: all interviewees will be interviewed utilizing the
same set of predetermined questions, a panel consisting
of three (3) members, (including a practicing clinician
not affiliated with Western Tech), along with a grading
system that is based on the “Generic Abilities”
developed by the Physical Therapy program, University
of Wisconsin-Madison, May et al, Journal of Physical
Therapy Education 9-1, Spring 1995.
Admission to the PTA program is a selective
process. It is a competitive process and all applicants
will be ranked based on a point system. Therefore,
application to the program does not guarantee
admission into the program. Enrollment of PTA
students is limited to a maximum of 24 students each
year. The “point system” will take into consideration:
1) Educational Credentials, 2) Grade Point Average, 3)
Wonderlic Scholastic Exam, 4)
Observation/Experience Hours (minimum of two
clinical settings), 5) Onsite Essay, 6) Letters of
Recommendation, and 7) Panel Interview.
Individuals portrayed in photos are actual students, graduates or
employees of Western Tech.
Western Tech Catalog | 134
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022 Projections)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 5,180 National Employment 2012: 71,400
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 7,150 Projected National Employment 2022: 100,700
Absolute Change 2012-2022: 1,970 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 29,300
Percent Change 2012-2022: 38.00% Percent Change 2012-2022: 41.00%
Average Hourly Wage 2013: $33.35 Average Hourly Wage 2013: $26.12
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
115 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
195 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE PHYSICAL
THERAPIST ASSISTANT PROGRAM Admissions
Admission to the PTA program begins with meeting with a Western Tech admissions representative. At that
time, the prospective student will be informed about the expectations and qualifications necessary for admission into
the PTA program, including the need for immunizations, volunteer hours, background check, physical examination
by a licensed health practitioner (M.D., D.O., P.A. or A.R.N.P.), CPR certification and admissions panel interview.
This information may also be found on our website. Students accepted into the program must be physically, mentally
and emotionally capable of completing the program.
The Western Tech PTA program applicant must have a minimum of a high school diploma or equivalency
certificate (GED) and be at least 18 years of age. The PTA program admission process will be completed as follows:
1. A minimum of 50 volunteer / observation hours meeting the following criteria: Total hours must include a
minimum of two different settings and may include: acute care, outpatient clinic, rehabilitation facility,
educational therapy setting, home health therapy and/or long-term care facility.
2. Two letters of recommendation from an appropriate source; i.e. previous employers, teachers, instructors /
mentors, etc. Not acceptable are family members, friends, colleagues, etc. A minimum of one letter of
recommendation from a clinical practitioner is required.
3. Official transcript (must be submitted DIRECTLY from the institution to Western Tech (see the actual
application for details)) that demonstrates a minimum of 2.75 GPA in secondary or post-secondary education
(or minimum score of 500 for those applying with a GED).
4. Applicants are to submit the completed application package by the deadline date. Incomplete and/or late
applications (post-marked or delivered in-person) after the deadline date must reapply for the next application
cycle.
5. Applications are screened and complete applications that meet the minimum requirements as above will be
invited for a panel interview and a short on-site essay. A letter of receipt will inform the applicant of any
missing documents and/or failure to meet any criteria and will be informed of the deadline date for completing
the application.
6. The PTA Selection Committee will summarize the final applications and choose the students for the incoming
class. The accepted students will be notified via mail and given a deadline to accept the position and will be
required to have all necessary immunizations, physical examination by a physician, healthcare provider, CPR
certification and completion of a criminal background check (necessary as the prospective students are
required to have an acceptable background check for future gainful employment and requirements by many
clinical affiliation sites) at the applicant’s expense. Alternate student and denial notifications will be sent by
mail. An up-to-date shot record, (to include TB test and Hepatitis vaccine); at least one of the series initiated
for the Hepatitis B series vaccine required prior to admission, and the completed series prior to the first clinical
rotation.
7. Applicants take Western Tech’s Success Initiative (WTSI) Assessment in accordance with WTSI’s Policy
(admission to the PTA program is not based on the results of this examination and in no way affects a
prospective student’s chances of acceptance; however it may prevent them from taking certain courses based
on the outcome of the WTSI Assessment).
Note: All prerequisites listed must be completed prior the start of the class. Even if a student is
enrolled; the individual cannot begin participating in class until all prerequisites are completed.
Western Tech Catalog | 135
Western Tech does not discriminate on the basis of disability in admissions or access to its programs or activities.
However, due to factors requiring a student’s ability to complete coursework, comply with safety standards and be
employable after graduation, disabled persons interested in the PTA program who may need special accommodations
should contact the campus director prior to applying.
Wonderlic Scholastic Exam
The Wonderlic Scholastic Exam is administered to applicants to the Physical Therapist Assistant Program.
If the applicant does not achieve the required score for the program, he/she may elect to re-take the Wonderlic exam.
Students who take the Wonderlic Scholastic Level Exam (SLE) may take the test and a re-test on the same day. Those
wishing to make a third attempt must do within one to two weeks after the second try. Those wishing to re-take the
exam after the third attempt must wait six months before their fourth attempt.
The applicant will also complete a student survey as part of the Wonderlic exam. The survey results are forwarded
to Program Director for information only.
WONDERLIC CUT-OFF SCORE: Physical Therapist Assistant 20
Immunization Requirement
In accordance with state law, the following immunizations are required for students enrolled in health-related
courses that will involve direct patient contact in medical or dental care facilities or who come in contact with human
biological fluids or tissue:
1. Measles: proof of two doses of measles vaccine administered on or after the first birthday and at least 30
days apart or proof of immunity.
2. Mumps: proof of one dose of mumps vaccine administered on or after the first birthday or proof of
immunity.
3. Rubella: proof of one dose administered on or after the first birthday or proof of immunity.
4. Tetanus/diphtheria: proof of one “booster” dose of tetanus/diphtheria (within 10 years).
5. Hepatitis B virus (HBV): proof of serologic immunity to HBV or certification of immunization with a
complete series of Hepatitis B vaccine. Students are required to present a letter or other suitable written
certification.
6. Proof of negative current Tuberculosis test (less than 1year).
For more information regarding the consequences of outdated immunizations visit:
www.dshs.state.tx.us/immunize/
Western Tech Success Initiative Program (WTSI)
Students entering the Physical Therapist Assistant Program at Western Tech are required to take a college-
readiness assessment (WTSI Assessment). This assessment is designed to measure a student’s skills in relation to a
standard of competence in math, reading and writing, and is offered during regular business hours.
All new and transfer students who have taken an assessment based on Texas Success Initiative (TSI) at another
institution, and have met the standard requirement from their previous post-secondary institution are exempt from
the WTSI. Those students that do not qualify for an exemption must take the WTSI Assessment. Any non-exempt
student enrolling or transferring into Western Tech is required to meet the standards of the WTSI in the areas of
reading, writing, and mathematics by the completion of the first three (3) courses of the PTA program. Students not
meeting the minimum standard requirements in reading, writing, and/or mathematics must complete developmental
education in order to meet the requirements of the WTSI Program. In addition, students will receive strengthening
in any areas of deficiency, in order to complete the necessary requirements for the WTSI. Any fees associated with
the WTSI process are included with the published tuition or fees at Western Tech. Note: If a student does not
successfully complete all aspects of the WTSI program initiative, the student cannot be awarded a degree, even if
the student successfully completes all coursework in his/her program of study.
POLICIES & STANDARDS SPECIFIC TO THE PHYSICAL THERAPIST ASSISTANT
PROGRAM Satisfactory Progress
The PTA program follows the Western Tech policy regarding “Satisfactory Progress” with the exception of the
following. Students must achieve and maintain a minimum CUMULATIVE grade point average and a minimum
COURSE GRADE of 2.5 (or a 74% numeric grade) in all core courses, and all course work must be satisfactorily
completed to be eligible for graduation.
Unsatisfactory Progress
The PTA program follows the Western Tech Policy regarding “Unsatisfactory Progress” with the following
exceptions. If a student’s cumulative course grade falls below 2.5 (74%) at the end of any course, the student will
be terminated from the PTA program. Any exceptions would be at the discretion of the PTA faculty and would be
based on the student’s ability to meet all of the required PTA objectives and skills for a particular course. Exceptions
for termination may include clinical affiliations, where there is a possibility of repeating a particular affiliation or
with general education courses where there are not specific PTA objectives or skills that need to be met. At that
point any probation would follow standard Western Tech policy.
Western Tech Catalog | 136
Student’s receiving below 74% (failing grade) on any core PTA course grade will be dismissed from the program.
Exceptions would be at the discretion of the PTA faculty and would be based on the student’s completion of all
required PTA objectives and skills for a particular course. Exceptions for termination may include clinical
affiliations, where there is a possibility of repeating a particular affiliation and these will be handled on a case-by-
case basis. There will be no probationary periods for failure to meet the minimum requirements of a core PTA
course.
A student whose enrollment was terminated for unsatisfactory progress may not re-enter school before the start
of the next PTA class of students. This may vary depending upon the time of dismissal and given the deadlines for
the next incoming class. This student must re-apply for admission into the PTA program and only if the factor(s)
contributing to the poor performance have been resolved to the school’s (and program director’s) satisfaction. In
addition to the WTC policy, the student must submit a letter to the PTA program director describing reasons for
failure and how the issues have been resolved. This student must follow the standard application procedures and
will be ranked with all other applicants. It is possible that upon reapplication, the student may not be accepted. A
student who was dismissed and was able to re-enter the program will be on academic probation for at least one phase.
Students whose enrollment was terminated from another PTA program will also be required to follow this same
policy.
Students receiving below 60% (failing grade) on any course grade may be dismissed from the program at the
discretion of the faculty. No make-up work will be allowed on missed or failed “pop quizzes” or open book tests.
The student will be required to demonstrate an entry-level degree of proficiency in each competency during the
phase in which it is taught. An inability to achieve the required level of competency in these skills, or in the theory
of these skills, will prevent the student from being able to advance into the next phase or to graduate even if the
overall grade for a course is “passing”. We felt that it is necessary for each student to demonstrate proficiency in
both skill application and theory for the student’s safety and the safety of the patients in with which they are in
contact. Example: If a student has an overall score of 78% in a course but falls below 74% in either their exam
average or laboratory practical, they may be considered as “unsuccessful” and may be terminated from the PTA
program.
All written exams must be completed with minimum performance standard of 74% on all written examinations
indicating competence in all core PTA courses. Written exams that do not meet this criterion will be allowed to be
retest for a maximum credit of 70% but still must meet the 74% on the retest to demonstrate minimum understanding.
Failure to meet the minimum requirement of 74% may result in termination from the PTA program.
Students who consistently score poorly on skills and examinations will be considered for dismissal from the PTA
program. A student receiving more than two “C” average grades in courses is considered having marginal
performance and will be considered for dismissal.
Health and Hygiene
Physical Therapist Assistant students are required, for health and hygiene reasons, to have clean, trimmed
fingernails, active length (no longer than ¼”).
Grievance Policy
For comments, complaints, suggestions or constructive criticisms from a WTC student, prospective student,
employee or clinician associated with WTC’s PTA program, they should be brought to the attention of the class
instructor. If that fails to resolve the problem, or is not associated with an instructor, then the grievance should be
taken to the PTA Program Director. If still unresolved, then the person should bring the grievance to the attention of
the Campus Director. Should the grievance still remain unresolved, the complaint should then be taken to the
President of Western Technical College. It is permissible for the student to take the grievance directly to a higher
authority without first bringing it to the attention to his/her immediate authority. A student can file a grievance
without fear of retaliation. These grievance/due process policies are found in the WTC catalog, WTC Student
Handbook, WTC PTA Addendum to the Student Handbook and the WTC PTA Clinical Manual.
For comments, complaints, suggestions or constructive criticisms regarding the WTC PTA program, from those that
are not affiliated with WTC the following method of conveying your message may be used.
1. This process is used only by those who fall outside of the grievance/due process policy of WTC.
2. Comments must be provided in writing and signed by the author. Anonymous submissions will
not be acknowledged.
3. Comments must be submitted and directed as follows:
Attn: PTA Program Director
Western Technical College
9451 Diana Drive
El Paso, TX 79924
4. The Program Director will respond within 10 business days of receipt to resolve and/or discuss
the issue. If satisfactory resolution is not reached, appeal may be made to the Campus Director of
WTCs - Diana Campus. The decision of the Campus Director will be final and not subject to
appeal.
Western Tech Catalog | 137
5. Complaints regarding the PTA Program Director may be directly addressed to the Campus
Director in the same manner described above in step three of this process.
6. Records of all correspondence will be confidential and maintained by the PTA Program director
(except in the case of a complaint about the PTA program director which will be maintained by
the Campus Director). These records will be kept for a period of five years and are not open to
the public.
If, through use of these channels, a satisfactory response to the grievance does not occur, then the student may
refer the complaint directly to the Accrediting Commission’s attention. Their information is listed below:
Schools accredited by the Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and Colleges of Technology must have a
procedure and operations plan for handling student complaints. If a student does not feel that the school has
adequately addressed a complaint or concern, the student may consider contacting the Accrediting Commission.
All complaints considered by the Commission must be in written form, with permission from the complainant(s)
for the Commission to forward a copy of the complaint to the school for a response. The complainant(s) will be
kept informed as to the status of the complaint as well as the final resolution by the Commission. Please direct all
inquiries to:
Accrediting Commission of Career Schools & Colleges of Technology
2101 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 302
Arlington, VA 22201
(703) 247-4212
A copy of the Commission’s Complaint Form is available at the school and may be obtained by contacting the
Campus Director.
All complaints involving the PTA program should be submitted in writing to the PTA Program Director.
Complaint forms are located at WTC’s Branch Campus located at 9451 Diana Drive, El Paso, TX, 79924.
Complaints by students, WTC employees, clinical affiliation sites, employers of graduates, public or any other
entities are not open to the public. The forms address the complaint, resolution and follow-up. Complaints will be
handled in a timely manner and as appropriate.
If you do not feel that your complaint has been dealt with appropriately or feel that further actions should be taken,
you may also submit a complaint in writing to the Commission on Accreditation in Physical Therapy Education
(CAPTE) of the American Physical Therapy Association. You may find their information to do so here:
http://www.apta.org/
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS PTA students are required to perform job duties specific to the profession. Specifically, a PTA student must
possess motor and visual skills that enable them to meet program objectives. The following is a list of skills necessary
for all PTA students:
1. Sufficient hearing ability is necessary to respond safely and appropriately during patient treatment, for
communication with other healthcare workers, and for patient assessment.
2. Students must have proficient communication in English both orally and written, to allow for effective
communication with patients, co-workers and other healthcare workers. Also, the ability to listen,
understand and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and sentences.
3. Students must have sufficient visual acuity for the reading and documentation of patient treatment,
reading the Physical Therapist’s plan of care, and for assessment of patients using a variety of measuring
devices.
4. Students must be physically able to transfer patients safely from a variety of surfaces, i.e.: wheelchairs,
mats, beds, etc. and to lift equipment needed for patient care. Students must also be able to tolerate
standing for extended periods of time without a break.
5. Students must have sufficient manual dexterity is needed to allow the student to perform fine motor
tasks such as; palpation, measurements, and demonstration of patient activities.
6. Students must be able to complete all written and practical exams and functional job tasks within the
required time limits in the classroom as well as clinics.
7. Students must demonstrate emotional health to assure good judgments and the critical thinking skills
necessary for safe and effective patient care and to maintain a professional demeanor.
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and clinical assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
Western Tech Catalog | 138
*Students who feel they may have difficulty meeting the above-mentioned technical standards or will require
accommodations to participate in the Physical Therapist Assistant Program must contact the PTA Program Director
prior to admission into the program to further discuss their individual concerns or needs.
AAS DEGREE IN PHYSICAL THERAPIST
ASSISTANT PROGRAM
COURSES 1-20
1782 CLOCK HOURS
74.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC &
THECB)
67.0 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The licensed Physical Therapist Assistant is a health
care professional who works under the supervision of a
licensed Physical Therapist. The Physical Therapist
Assistant will implement treatment based on the
established plan of care and treat a variety of patient
populations from pediatrics to geriatrics. The treatment
techniques that will be taught include: taking vital signs,
goniometry, manual muscle testing, activities of daily
living, functional training, use of assistive/adaptive
devices, balance and gait training, developmental
activities, electric current, hydrotherapy, therapeutic
use of heat and cold, patient and family education,
therapeutic exercise, therapeutic massage, traction,
ultrasound, universal precautions and wound care.
Knowledge and other skills gained include written/oral
communication, documentation, legal guidelines, and
ethical decision-making. Proficiency in communication
and interaction with the patient, family members and
other healthcare team members will be a vital
component of the program.
Upon satisfactory completion of the training of an
accredited program of physical therapist assistant
education, students may be qualified to take the PTA
National Physical Therapy Exam (NPTE) and apply for
state licensure. Licensure requirements vary by state.
Once license is granted, the individual will assume the
role of an entry-level licensed physical therapist
assistant providing safe and effective clinical treatment
in such working environments as home health care,
clinics, hospitals and nursing homes. Currently in
Texas, every two years, 20 hours of continuing
education (mandatory two hour credit ethics course) is
required to renew state license.
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
44/48/4.0/3.0
Theory hours per course /
Lab hours per course /
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)/
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
EXPECTED STUDENT OUTCOMES Western Technical College’s expected student
outcomes for the physical therapist assistant graduate
will be as follows. The graduate will:
1. Be prepared to practice in a variety of
healthcare settings.
2. Be able to practice within the laws and
regulations of the state of Texas.
3. Be eligible to take the state licensure exam.
4. Be able to apply knowledge and skills to
assist in treatment of patients under the
direct supervision of a physical therapist.
5. Be prepared to communicate (oral, written
and non-verbal communication skills) to
patients, colleagues, and other members of
the healthcare community.
6. Adhere to professional, legal and ethical
standards as set forth by the Texas
Physical Therapy Practice Act.
7. Be able to educate others (patients,
caregivers, staff, students and healthcare
professionals) using effective teaching
methods.
8. Be able to participate in activities that
address quality of service
9. Be able to practice in a safe manner to
minimize risk to patients, self and others.
10. Be able to deliver patient care that reflects
respect for individual and cultural
differences.
11. Be able to demonstrate a commitment to
professional and personal growth and
advocate the profession through
involvement.
12. Be able to document client treatment in a
timely and effective manner.
13. Be able to perform measurement and
assessment techniques within the
knowledge and limits of practice to assist
the supervising physical therapists in
monitoring and modifying the plan of care.
14. Be able to communicate with the
supervising physical therapist in a timely
manner to report patient progress or
concerns.
15. Be able to participate in discharge
planning and follow up care.
PROGRAMMATIC ACCREDITATION The Physical Therapist Assistant Program at
Western Tech is accredited by the Commission on
Accreditation in Physical Therapy Education (CAPTE)
of the American Physical Therapy Association, 1111
North Fairfax Street, Alexandria, Virginia 22314;
telephone: 703-706-3245; email:
accreditation@apta.org; website: www.capteonline.org
Western Tech Catalog | 139
MISSION AND PHILOSOPHY Mission Statement of the Physical Therapist Assistant
Program
The Western Tech Physical Therapist Assistant
program is dedicated to providing quality academic and
clinical training in a caring professional manner and in
a modern facility to optimize student learning and
experience. The Western Tech experience, in
conjunction with our community partners, will optimize
the student’s effectiveness in gaining state licensure and
successfully pursuing an ethical and productive career
as a physical therapist assistant.
Philosophy of the Physical Therapist Assistant
Program
We believe that the goal of education is to guide the
student in a direction of productive work and livelihood
in today’s dynamic medical society.
We believe that the role of the instructor is to provide
the student a positive environment that is rich in
experience, knowledge and critical thinking to allow for
professional and personal growth.
We believe that the student should be willing to
immerse him/herself into such an environment and
engross the full potential of what our school and
community have to offer.
We believe that family and community members are
key resources in the success of our program, profession
and the student.
We believe that consuming and utilizing apt
knowledge is strategic to the life-long success of the
student.
Western Tech feels that the mission and philosophy
of the PTA Program are consistent with that of the
institution.
We believe the PTA sequential curriculum design
will allow students to build on preceding material based
on skills acquired from prerequisite courses and
increasing the level of knowledge as well as the level of
performance of the SPTA to ultimately culminate into
an entry-level PTA that will behave and make decisions
in a professional manner.
We believe that Western Tech’s PTA Program will
provide students the educational guidance to become
knowledgeable through theory, competent through the
application of skills with hands-on training, in order to
produce an adaptable professional graduate with critical
thinking skills.
CLINICAL AFFILIATIONS Students will be placed in clinical settings for a total
three different affiliations consisting of a minimum of
520 hours throughout the course of the program. It is
our intention to attempt to place students locally when
possible; however, clinic sites may require the student
to travel locally and/or out of town. All expenses,
including travel, lodging, fees, etc., are the
responsibility of the student.
Although the student’s input is considered for
placement for clinical sites, requests on behalf of the
student are not guaranteed. Decisions are also based on
student need (clinically), site availability and ultimately
is at the discretion of the PTA faculty.
LICENSURE EXAMINATION Students successfully graduating from the PTA
Program will be awarded an Associate of Applied
Science (AAS degree) in Physical Therapist Assistant
and may be eligible to take the PTA National Physical
Therapy Exam (NPTE) and apply for state licensure.
Licensure requirements vary by state. Students must
pass the examination and meet the individual state
requirements to receive their license in order to practice
as a physical therapist assistant.
Western Tech Catalog | 140
PROGRAM OUTLINE: ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL THERAPIST
ASSISTANT
# COURSE TITLE
CLOCK HOURS
(LEC/LAB/CLINICAL
AFFILIATION/
TOTAL)
TWC/THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1* MATH 1314 College Algebra 48/0/0/48 3.0 3.0
2* HITT 1305 Medical Terminology I 48/0/0/48 3.0 2.0
3* PHYS 1401 College Physics I 52/40/0/92 4.0 4.5
4* PTHA 1409 Introduction to Physical
Therapy 52/44/0/96 4.0 4.0
5 BIOL 2401 Anatomy & Physiology I 52/44/0/96 4.0 4.0
6* ENGL 1301 Composition I 48/0/0/48 3.0 3.0
7* BIOL 2102 Anatomy & Physiology II 0/52/0/52 1.5 1.5
8 PTHA 1513 Functional Anatomy 70/48/0/118 6.0 5.0
9* SPCH 1315 Public Speaking 48/0/0/48 3.0 3.0
10* PTHA 1321 Pathophysiology 32/32/0/64 3.0 2.5
11* PSYC 2301 General Psychology 48/0/0/48 3.0 3.0
12* PTHA 1531 Physical Agents 66/46/0/112 5.5 4.5
13 PTHA 2509 Therapeutic Exercise 72/48/0/120 6.0 5.0
14 PTHA 1261 Clinical PTA I 0/0/140/140 3.0 3.0
15 PTHA 2305 Neurology 56/0/0/56 3.5 2.5
16 PTHA 2431 Management of
Neurologic Disorders 50/30/0/80 4.0 3.0
17 PTHA 1361 Clinical PTA II 0/0/135/135 3.0 3.0
18 PTHA 2435 Rehabilitation Techniques 50/38/0/88 4.0 3.5
19 PTHA 2339 Professional Issues 48/0/0/48 3.0 2.0
20 PTHA 1561 Clinical PTA III 0/0/245/245 5.0 5.0
Associate of Applied Science – Physical
Therapist Assistant
840/422/
520/1782 74.5 67.0
NOTE: Program courses for the PTA curriculum are designed in a sequential manner. Each course of the
curriculum is ordered such that the subsequent material is based on skills acquired from prerequisite courses.
Exceptions to this include courses denoted with an asterisk (*). These courses are offered in a concurrent manner
with a maximum of two courses at a time being concurrent. Course materials from each course are building blocks
of skill and knowledge that cumulatively lead to an entry-level physical therapist assistant competency. Students are
required to achieve competency in each course of the PTA program before they are allowed to progress to the next
course. Proficiency of treatment skills must be demonstrated by the student in the laboratory to receive a passing
grade. These measures ensure preparedness for clinical affiliations and patient treatment.
COURSE 1
MATH 1314
COLLEGE ALGEBRA
48/0/3.0/3.0 During the first several days of class, the students
will receive a general school and program orientation,
to include training on how to utilize the Learning
Resource Center. The student will study relations and
functions including polynomial, rational, exponential,
logarithmic, and special functions. Other topics include
complex numbers, systems of equations and
inequalities, theory of equations, progressions, the
binomial theorem, proofs and applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to do the following:
1. Solve problems using a graphing
calculator
2. Use scientific notation
Western Tech Catalog | 141
3. Utilize the learning Resource Center
4. Perform operations on and factor
polynomials.
5. Graph, solve and apply linear equations.
6. Solve and graph linear inequalities.
7. Perform operations on and solve rational
equations.
8. Solve systems of linear equalities and
inequalities.
9. Define graph functions.
10. Calculate and define ratios and
proportions.
11. Define and solve sequences and series,
binomial theorem and basic probability.
COURSE 2
HITT 1305
MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY I
48/0/3.0/2.0 The student will learn the study of word origin and
structure through the introduction of prefixes, suffixes,
root words, plurals, abbreviations and symbols, surgical
procedures, medical specialties, and diagnostic
procedures.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify and pronounce medical terms.
2. Demonstrate correct spelling and usage of
medical terms for documentation.
3. Use medical terms in proper context.
4. Build and analyze medical terms.
5. Use medical references as resource tools.
COURSE 3
PHYS 1401
COLLEGE PHYSICS I
52/40/4.0/4.5 The student will learn the science of matter and
energy and the interactions between them through
traditional fields such as electromagnetism, mechanics,
thermodynamics, optics, acoustics and atomic and
nuclear physics.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Measure and apply equations of force,
work, kinetic and potential energy.
2. Understand Ohm’s and Newton’s Laws.
3. Convert from standard to the metric
system.
4. Use a calculator to solve physics
equations.
COURSE 4
PTHA 1409
INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL
THERAPY
52/44/4.0/4.0 The student will learn the history and role of a
Physical Therapist Assistant in physical therapy.
Introduction to interaction between the healthcare
provider and the patient, the use of assistive devices and
methods of teaching to a patient, proper draping and
positioning, proper body mechanics, transfers,
documentation. Students will be instructed on
monitoring vital signs, correct therapeutic techniques
and communication. Clinical skills are assessed through
practical examination.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Define physical therapy and its role in
practical application.
2. Delineate differences between a Physical
Therapist and a Physical Therapist
Assistant.
3. Identify the rules and regulations of the
Physical Therapist Assistant’s scope of
practice.
4. Identify assistive devices utilized in
physical therapy and be able to adjust
equipment, including devices for
ambulation, wheelchair and special
equipment.
5. Demonstrate proper body positioning in
varying scenarios.
6. Demonstrate appropriate patient
interaction through proper communication
(verbal and non-verbal) taking into
consideration cultural and ethnic
differences.
7. Identify and demonstrate all transfers
using proper body mechanics.
8. Demonstrate proper medical terminology
in documentation.
9. Recognize the importance and legal issues
of documentation.
10. Demonstrate hands-on training of applied
clinical skills in a laboratory setting: vital
signs, transfers, body mechanics, draping,
positioning and use/adjustment of assistive
devices.
11. Instruct patients and/or caregivers on safe
and proper use of equipment.
12. Complete professional conduct self-
assessment and review PTA Standards of
Ethical Conduct.
13. Recognize individual and cultural
differences and respond appropriately in
all aspects of physical therapy services.
COURSE 5
BIOL 2401
ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY I
52/44/4.5/4.0 The student will develop a critical understanding of
anatomical terminology, anatomical structure and
function of the muscular, endocrine, cardiovascular,
immune & lymphatic, digestive, respiratory, urinary,
nervous, integumentary, reproduction and development
systems.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify and describe the anatomical terms,
directions, planes, axis and the cavities of
the human body.
2. Describe basic organization of the human
body and its structural levels.
3. Describe the atomic, molecular and
cellular structure of human organs.
4. Identify the organs of each system, define
function and describe their locations and
relationship of its parts.
Western Tech Catalog | 142
5. Describe human body homeostasis and
normal lab values.
COURSE 6
ENGL 1301
COMPOSITION I
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student, focusing on the academic essay, will
study the principles and techniques of expository and
persuasive composition, including drafting, revising,
and editing in paragraphs and essays and will produce a
resume.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Use paragraphs as building blocks of
essays
2. Write an expository essay
3. Explain the means of persuasion and
strategies for evaluating evidence
4. Write a persuasive essay
5. Demonstrate technical writing skills and
written concise communication.
6. Distinguish among academic writing,
writing for work, and informal writing
7. Read critically and make editorial
suggestions about what they have read
8. Produce a personal resume
9. Utilize the services of the Learning
Resource Center
COURSE 7
BIOL 2102
ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY II
0/52/1.5/1.5 The student will develop and apply skills in
identification and observation as related to the human
body and physiology on a cellular, molecular, organ and
systems level.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Describe the architecture of skeletal
muscle.
2. Demonstrate palpation of bony landmarks
in lab for upper and lower extremities.
3. Palpate skeletal muscle during relaxation
and active contraction.
4. Identify musculature of the upper
extremity and trunk: origin, insertion,
action and innervations.
5. Identify and label the structures of the
heart and cardiovascular system.
6. Identify and label the layers of the skin and
function of the glands.
7. Perform sensory testing with lab partners.
8. Identify and describe musculature of the
lower extremities: origin, insertion, action
and innervations.
9. Label the lymphatic structures of the body.
10. Label the structures of the lymph nodes.
11. Identify and label the respiratory
structures.
12. Record RR and HR as well as calculate
MHR and THR in laboratory setting.
COURSE 8
PTHA 1513
FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY
70/48/6.0/5.0 The student will learn the muscle origins, insertions,
actions and nerve innervations of the human body. This
course teaches manual muscle testing, goniometric
measurement, kinesiology, biomechanics, gait analysis
and basic impairments as it pertains to physical therapy
and clinical application.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Perform goniometric measurement and
identify normal/abnormal range of motion
of articulations.
2. Explain the basic principles of physics
during movement of the body.
3. Analyze biomechanics of the body with
regard to axes and planes.
4. Compare and contrast isometric, isotonic,
isokinetic, eccentric and concentric muscle
contractions.
5. Demonstrate proper manual muscle testing
and apply an appropriate grade.
6. Identify gait patterns and courses of the
gait cycle and differentiate between
normal and abnormal patterns.
7. Identify joint structure and function as it
relates to normal and abnormal
biomechanics and subsequent treatment.
8. Identify and assess joint range of motion
(active/active assistive/passive/resisted)
and accessory motion as it applies to
normal and abnormal function.
9. Demonstrate applied skills through
laboratory activities and practical
examinations.
COURSE 9
SPCH 1315
PUBLIC SPEAKING
48/0/3.0/3.0 This course develops the ability to speak before
audiences. Students will plan and deliver several types
of speeches appropriate to occasion and audience.
Clarity of purpose and organization will be emphasized.
Students will practice critical thinking and listening
skills and be able to identify the means of persuasion.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able
to do the following:
1. Identify the basic elements of the speech
process.
2. Design messages appropriate to topic,
audience, and setting.
3. Demonstrate research skills necessary to
preparing a speech, including selection of
material and determination of which, if
any, audio-visual and other resources will
be used to enhance audience
understanding.
4. Make best use of strategies, verbal and
non-verbal, to assure clear, accurate, and
engaging communication.
Western Tech Catalog | 143
5. Maximize use of language and body for
conveying information and convincing
argument.
6. Analyze speeches critically for both
content and delivery.
7. Identify and use critical listening
techniques.
8. Develop the voice for strength, control,
and tone.
COURSE 10
PTHA 1321
PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
32/32/3.0/2.5 The student will learn about the pathogenesis,
prognosis and therapeutic management of
diseases/conditions commonly encountered in physical
therapy.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify and explain the pathogenesis of
selected diseases relevant to physical
therapy intervention.
2. Determine aspects of pathophysiology that
affect physical therapy treatment.
3. Analyze and describe the current response
to acute physiological change in patients’
conditions.
4. Obtain and assess pertinent
pharmacological information and its
impact on patient care.
5. Identify orthopedic impairments of the
upper and lower extremities.
6. Identify orthopedic impairments of the
spine and pelvis.
COURSE 11
PSYC 2301
GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY
48/0/3.0/3.0 The student will be introduced to the basic principles
of psychology and apply those principles to a particular
field of knowledge or activity.
Upon completion of this course the student will be
able to explain the following:
1. Human developmental phases
2. Basic psychological concepts
3. Theorists’ explanations of human behavior
4. Therapeutic approaches
5. Psychological disorders and their causes
and treatments
6. The application of psychological
principles to understanding and working
with co-workers and clients
COURSE 12
PTHA 1531
PHYSICAL AGENTS
66/46/5.5/4.5 The student will learn biophysical principles and
application of therapeutic physical agents with specific
emphasis on indications, contraindications, medical
efficacy, and physiological effects. The students will
also learn theory and methods of wound care and tissue
healing. The theory of the pain cycle and appropriate
intervention will be reviewed.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Describe the pain theory, neurophysiology
and behavioral responses to pain and pain
management.
2. Demonstrate appropriate draping and
positioning of a patient for the application
of modalities.
3. Identify the indications, contraindications
and precautions for all therapeutic
modalities, including massage.
4. Demonstrate appropriate and safe
application of physical agents.
5. Discuss biophysical principles as they
relate to the application of physical agents.
6. Demonstrate proper techniques and
identify proper indications of therapeutic
massage.
7. Demonstrate universal precautions with
application of all modalities, wound care
and massage.
8. Identify the stages of tissue healing and
demonstrate proper documentation of
wound care.
9. Complete professional conduct self-
assessment.
COURSE 13
PTHA 2509
THERAPEUTIC EXERCISE
72/48/6.0/5.0 The student will learn concepts, principles and
application of techniques related to therapeutic exercise
and functional training.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify and utilize the theory, principles
and techniques of therapeutic exercise.
2. Identify and utilize therapeutic exercise for
particular diagnoses.
3. Identify and utilize therapeutic exercise for
various patient populations.
4. Discuss the rationale for the application
and modification of therapeutic exercise.
5. Identify signs, symptoms and
contraindications to particular exercises or
activity.
6. Compare and contrast the difference
between aerobic and anaerobic exercises
and implementation of each through
therapeutic exercise.
7. Demonstrate progression of patients
following particular given protocols for
specific injury/post-surgical rehabilitation
including orthopedic and neurologic
impairments.
8. Design and implement an appropriate
aquatic therapy exercise.
9. Demonstrate accurate documentation of
therapeutic exercise.
Western Tech Catalog | 144
COURSE 14
PTHA 1261
CLINICAL PTA I
0/0/140/3.0/3.0 Students will be supervised by a licensed clinical
instructor (a Physical Therapist or Physical Therapist
Assistant) and will receive hands-on clinical training to
demonstrate proficient patient care, critical problem
solving and thinking, use of modalities, developing and
instructing home exercise programs, documenting and
developing and administering a presentation on an
appropriate topic. A minimum of one clinical affiliation
must be completed in an acute care setting. The student
must have a current CPR card, malpractice insurance,
health insurance, updated immunization record, and
criminal background check in order to begin their
clinical affiliation. Some affiliations may
Require additional items such as drug screen or
influenza immunization.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Demonstrate all of the available skills at
their clinical affiliation site. The student is
not yet expected to neither operate at full
autonomy nor perform skills at a pace of
an entry-level PTA for each individual
skill according to PTA MACS other than
those noted as all objectives being required
to be met.
2. Complete a minimum of 140 hours
working under a clinical instructor.
3. Present a topic of the student’s or clinical
instructor’s choice at the clinical site of the
affiliation.
4. Obtain pertinent patient information and
utilize it to appropriately treat and
document the treatment in the patient’s
official record.
5. PTA Manual for the Assessment of
Clinical Skills (MACS) (a method for
evaluating clinical performance and a tool
to promote teaching and learning) will be
completed by the student and clinical
instructor during the clinical affiliation.
6. Master “professional behaviors” and
“patient history and chart review” skills
from the PTA MACS by receiving “Entry
level or Excellent” grade from Clinical
Instructor (minimum requirement for
successful completion of PTHA 2564).
7. The PTA MACS accounts for 60% of the
total grade.
COURSE 15
PTHA 2305
NEUROLOGY
56/0/3.5/2.5 The student will learn the neuroanatomy and
neurophysiology of the human body as it relates to
commonly encountered neurological conditions.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Identify and explain the components of
neuroanatomy as related to physical
therapy.
2. Describe the pathogenesis, prognosis, and
management of neurological disorders
commonly treated in physical therapy.
3. Compare and contrast motor and sensory
pathways of the nervous system as they
pertain to physical therapy impairments
and treatment.
COURSE 16
PTHA 2431
MANAGEMENT OF NEUROLOGICAL
DISORDERS
50/30/4.0/3.0 The student will utilize knowledge of neuroanatomy
and neurophysiology to learn new skills/techniques for
comprehensive rehabilitation of selected neurological
disorders.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Distinguish and critically examine the
concepts and principles of comprehensive
management of neurological disorders.
2. Develop, implement, and revise
comprehensive treatment approaches for
neurological disorders.
3. Appropriately implement neuromuscular
rehabilitation techniques in accordance
with a prescribed physical therapy plan of
care.
COURSE 17
PTHA 1361
CLINICAL PTA II
0/0/135/3.0/3.0 Students will be supervised by a licensed clinical
instructor (a Physical Therapist or Physical Therapist
Assistant) and will receive hands-on clinical training to
demonstrate proficient patient care, critical problem
solving and thinking, use of modalities, developing and
instructing home exercise programs, documenting and
developing and administering a presentation on an
appropriate topic. The area of practice will vary from
that of the first clinical affiliation. A minimum of one
clinical affiliation must be completed in an acute care
setting. The student must have a current CPR card,
malpractice insurance, health insurance and an updated
immunization record, and criminal background check in
order to begin their clinical affiliation. Some
affiliations may require additional items such as drug
screen or influenza immunization.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Demonstrate all of the available skills at
their clinical affiliation site at entry-level
for each individual skill according to PTA
MACS.
2. The student is expected to operate at full
autonomy but not a pace of entry-level
PTA.
3. Complete a minimum of 135 hours
working under a clinical instructor.
4. Present a topic of the student’s or clinical
instructor’s choice at the clinical site of the
affiliation.Obtain pertinent patient
information and utilize it to appropriately
Western Tech Catalog | 145
treat and document the treatment in the
patient’s official record.
5. PTA MACS (a method for evaluating
clinical performance and a tool to promote
teaching and learning) will be completed
by the student and clinical instructor
during the clinical affiliation.
6. Master “professional behaviors,” skills 1-
12 from the PTA MACS, and “patient
history and chart review” skills from the
PTA MACS by receiving “Entry level or
Excellent” grade from Clinical Instructor
(minimum requirement for successful
completion of PTHA 2566).
7. Complete 70% of additional site skills, in
addition to the required skills in Clinical
PTA I, on the master skills list.
8. The PTA MACS accounts for 60% of the
total grade.
COURSE 18
PTHA 2435
REHABILITATION TECHNIQUES
50/38/4.0/3.5 In this advanced course, the student will learn to
integrate previously learned and new skills/techniques
into the comprehensive rehabilitation of selected long-
term pathologies.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Appropriately discuss, promote and
compose wellness and preventative
programs to promote public health.
2. Distinguish and critically examine the
concepts and principles of comprehensive
management of long-term pathologies.
3. Develop, implement, and revise a
comprehensive treatment approach for
various long-term pathologies.
COURSE 19
PTHA 2339
PROFESSIONAL ISSUES
48/0/3.0/2.0 This is a capstone course which engages the student
in the discussion of professional issues and behaviors
related to clinical practice and which prepares the
students for transition into the workforce.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Discuss licensure and job acquisition
skills.
2. Discriminate appropriate behaviors in
response to various legal, ethical, and
professional interactions.
3. Debate socioeconomic influences related
to the field of physical therapy.
4. Compose a professional résumé.
COURSE 20
PTHA 1561
CLINICAL PTA III
0/0/245/5.0/5.0 Students will be supervised by a licensed clinical
instructor (a Physical Therapist or Physical Therapist
Assistant) and will receive hands-on clinical training to
demonstrate proficient patient care, critical problem
solving and thinking, use of modalities, developing and
instructing home exercise programs, documenting and
developing and administering a presentation on an
appropriate topic. The area of practice will vary from
that of the previous clinical affiliations. A minimum of
one clinical affiliation must be completed in an acute
care setting. The student must have a current CPR card,
malpractice insurance, health insurance and an updated
immunization record, and criminal background check in
order to begin their clinical affiliation. Some
affiliations may
Require additional items such as drug screen or
influenza immunization.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be
able to:
1. Demonstrate all of the available skills at
their clinical affiliation site at entry-level
for each individual skill according to PTA
MACS.
2. The student is expected to operate at full
autonomy and at a pace of entry-level PTA
3. Complete a minimum of 245 hours
working under a clinical instructor.
4. Present a topic of the student’s or clinical
instructor’s choice at the clinical site of the
affiliation.
5. Obtain pertinent patient information and
utilize it to appropriately treat and
document the treatment in the patient’s
official record.
6. PTA MACS (a method for evaluating
clinical performance and a tool to promote
teaching and learning) will be completed
by the student and clinical instructor
during the clinical affiliation.
7. Master “professional behaviors” and
“patient history and chart review” skills
from the PTA MACS by receiving “Entry
level or Excellent” grade from Clinical
Instructor (minimum requirement for
successful completion of PTHA 2568).
8. Demonstrate entry-level physical therapist
assistant skills in accordance with the PTA
MACS.
9. Complete 80% of additional site skills, in
addition to the required skills in Clinical
PTA I, on the master skills list.
10. The PTA MACS accounts for 70% of the
total grade.
Western Tech Catalog | 146
BACHELOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Available at 9451 Diana Drive Campus & 9624 Plaza Circle Campus
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
The Bachelor in Business Administration will help students learn to cultivate a variety of skills and assets needed
by businesses. Supervisors directly oversee and coordinate the activities of clerical and administrative support
workers. Supervisors of Office and Administrative Support Workers held about 119,490 jobs in 2010. There was
above average growth rate in colleges and universities, office administrative services, and an average growth rate in
business support services. Employment growth is projected to increase by 53.90% in Texas and 14.30% nationally.
Labor Market Information (2012 thru 2022)
Texas Labor Market Information National Labor Market Information Texas Employment 2012: 115,420 National Employment 2012: 1,424,450
Projected Texas Employment 2022: 139,670 Projected National Employment 2022: 1,589,600 Absolute
Change 2012-2022: 24,250 Absolute Change 2012-2022: 171,500
Percent Change 2012-2022: 21.00% Percent Change 2012-2022: 12.10%
Average Hourly Wage 2014: $26.96 Average Hourly Wage 2013: $27.01
Average Openings per year due to Replacement: Average Openings per year due to Replacement:
2,745 Not Available
Average Openings per year due to Growth: Average Openings per year due to Growth:
2,425 Not Available
Source: The Labor Market & Career Information Department (LMCI) of the Texas Workforce Commission
www.lmci.state.tx.us
Western Tech Catalog | 147
ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICANTS PURSUING THE BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION PROGRAM Pearson “My Foundations” Exam
Prospective students will take the Pearson “My Foundations” exam prior to starting the program. Students do not
have to pass a threshold to be admitted to the program. However, students that fall below the established benchmark
will be required to complete the Pearson “My Foundations” modules for strengthening. Students can begin the online
modules before the first day of class, but will have up to the end of the 1st term to complete the prescribed modules.
Students who do not complete the Pearson “My Foundations” modules will not be allowed to continue in the program
until they are completed.
Hybrid Program/Courses
Students who enroll in the Bachelor in Business Administration program will receive training through a hybrid
delivery system, that is, a portion of their training is provided in a combination of classes being offered both on-
ground and online. Specifically, this program will provide 50% of the training and education on-ground and 50%
online.
Hybrid courses are web-based and delivered over the Internet using Western Tech’s Learning Management
System (Canvas). The system provides both synchronous and asynchronous tools used for on-line delivery. The on-
line content of the course is covered by using a variety of on-line educational activities such as discussion boards,
chat sessions, conference sessions, case studies, lab simulations, and quizzes. In a hybrid program, the face to face
schedule is set on specific dates and times of the week, while the on-line portion of the class is organized for the
student to have the flexibility to complete the on-line classroom activities based on their personal/work schedules.
Regardless of the mode of delivery, students entering this program can expect the same level of support as on-
ground students to include tutoring services, technical support, employment preparation and assistance with job
leads, and access to the school’s library.
Participation in online classes is vital to successful program completion. Students are provided with a
computer that meets the requirements of the hybrid program. Students must have Internet access from
somewhere outside the school in order to fulfill course requirements and succeed in their classes. In addition,
students must have a minimum level of comfort with technology, as they may find themselves needing to access
course work online for as much as half of the time the class is in session.
For that reason, all prospective students considering enrollment in any of the hybrid programs are required to take
a short “Suitability for Distance Education” survey before they enroll in school. The survey is designed to identify
the prospective student’s level of proficiency in the use of technology. Students can expect support in the form of
training tailored to their identified needs so that they can handle the demands of the Learning Management System
that houses much of their work.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS Western Tech’s Bachelor in Business Administration program is a hybrid program. It has established technical
standards and essential functions for the program as more fully listed below. The ability to meet these standards and
essential functions, with or without reasonable accommodation, is required in order to complete the program
satisfactorily. Please review the following technical standards and essential functions carefully.
1. The ability to understand course materials and maintain a certain grade/performance level that
meets the set academic requirements.
2. The ability to maintain a professional demeanor at all times and interact professionally with
fellow students, internship site employees and clientele, administration and faculty.
3. The ability to adhere to a professional dress code acceptable to the profession and as set by
Western Tech.
4. The ability to listen, understand, and communicate ideas presented through spoken words and
sentences.
5. The ability to see details at close range (within a few feet of the observer).
6. The ability to match or detect differences between colors, including shades of color and
brightness.
7. The ability to work with others in a team environment.
8. The ability to respect instructor, classmates, and internship staff and customers.
9. The ability to utilize computers and perform basic computer functions with programs such as
Word, Outlook, and Excel.
10. Must be able to utilize E-Books.
Western Tech Catalog | 148
Western Tech does not discriminate in admission or access to programs on the basis of any characteristic protected
by law, including disability. Persons with disabilities are eligible for admission, as long as, they can carry out
classroom, laboratory and internship assignments; pass written, oral and practical examinations; and meet all of the
requirements of the program and generally accepted requirements of the profession, with or without reasonable
accommodation. Western Tech will make reasonable accommodations for disabilities. Applicants and students who
require accommodation should contact the Campus Director and submit a written request for accommodation.
BACHELOR IN BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION
COURSES 1-41
2416 CLOCK HOURS
132.5 SEMESTER CREDIT UNITS (TWC
& THECB)
132.5 SEMESTER CREDIT HOURS
(ACCSC)
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES The Bachelor in Business Administration program
will help students learn to cultivate a variety of skills
and assets needed by businesses. The program will
provide students with the knowledge and technical
skills needed for positions in business and may also
provide students with opportunities for career
advancement. The program provides training in a
variety of courses to include: Intermediate Accounting,
Organizational Behavior, Lean Six Sigma, Project
Management, Advertising, among others. It will also
provide hands-on experience in Microsoft Word and
Excel. This program provides General Education,
technical, and specialized courses that will prepare the
graduate for careers in private, public, and government
sectors. Students may find employment as financial
analyst, business managers, general manager, public
relations specialist, retail manager, operation
coordinator, logistics clerk, accounting clerk, project
coordinator, project manager, advertising rep,
marketing manager, sales manager HR assistant among
other business positions
TIME CODES The following time code is used on all courses to
illustrate the amount of time students will spend in class
or lab per course and the subsequent number of credit
hours awarded.
48/48/160/4.0
Theory hours per course/
Lab hours per course/
Internship hours per course/
Semester Credit Hours
NOTE: The sequential order of the classes may differ from
that included in the program outline.
Western Tech Catalog | 149
PROGRAM OUTLINE: BACHELOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
# COURSE TITLE HRS. THEORY/
LAB
PERCENTAGE
ON CAMPUS/
ONLINE
TWC/
THECB
SCU
ACCSC
SCH
1 BMGT 1327 Principles of
Management 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
2 ITSC 1209 MS Office
Applications I 48 32/16 50%/50% 2.5 2.5
3 ITSC 2221 MS Office
Applications II 48 32/16 50%/50% 2.5 2.5
4 ENGL 1301 Composition I 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
5 HRPO 2301 Human Resource
Management 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
6 MATH 1312 Algebra 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
7 ACNT 1525 Accounting
Principles I 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
8 BMGT 1341 Business Ethics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
9 SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of
Human
Communication
48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
10* ACNT 1526 Accounting
Principles II 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
11 MRKG 1311 Principles of
Marketing 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
12 ECON 2301 Principles of
Macroeconomics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
13 GEOL 1301 Geology 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
14 BUSG 2317 Business Law 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
15* ACNT 1229 Payroll
Accounting 48 38/10 50%/50% 2.5 2.5
16* MATH 1324
Mathematics for
Business & Social
Sciences
48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
17* ACNT 1213
Computerized
Accounting
(QuickBooks)
96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
18 PSYC 2301 General
Psychology 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
19 BMGT 2210 Professionalism 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
20 HIST 1301 United States
History I 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
21* ECON 2302 Principles of
Microeconomics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
22* HIST 1302 United States
History II 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
23 BUSG 2311 Entrepreneurship
and Innovation 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
24 ENGL 1302 Research Analysis 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
25 LSSY 3310 Principles of Lean
Six Sigma 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
26 PHIL 1301 Introduction to
Philosophy 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
27 BMGT 3301 Project
Management 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
28 IBUS 3300 Logistics
Management 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
29*
MATH 1342 Statistics 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
30*
LSSG 3311
Applied Lean Six
Sigma 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
31 BMGT 4333
Non-Profit
Organization
Management
48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
Western Tech Catalog | 150
32 FINA 3315 Business Finance 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
33* BMGT 4301 Advanced Project
Management 96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
34 BMGT 4325
International
Business
Management
48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
35 BMGT 3321
Production/
Operation
Management
96 48/48 50%/50% 4.5 4.5
36 BMGT 4020 E-Business 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
37* BMGT 4302 HR Management
Development 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
38* ACNT 4312 Tax Accounting 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
39* ADVT 4336
Advertising
Creative Strategy
& Execution
48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
40 BMGT 4300 Capstone 48 48/0 50%/50% 3.0 3.0
41 BMGT 4388
Business
Administration &
Management
Internship
160 0/0/160 00/00 3.5 3.5
Total Hours - Bachelor in Business
Administration 2416
1878/378/
160 132.5 132.5
Note: Courses with prerequisites are denoted in the course outline with an asterisk (*).
Students in the Bachelor in Business Administration degree program will have the opportunity to test for the
following certifications: Word, Excel, Payroll, Bookkeeping, QuickBooks, Lean Six Sigma (Yellow), Lean Six
Sigma (Green) [depending on years of paid work experience], and Advanced Project Management. Note: These
certifications are not required for graduation.
Students can earn digital badges in selective courses. Badges will create a learning pathway throughout their
program. A digital badge is a representation of a skill a student has learned. Badges verify their skills and
achievements that may be industry-specific or internally prepared badges and can be displayed digitally on their
resumes. Western Technical College offers 15 digital badges: Principles of Management, Word, Excel, Payroll,
Principles of Marketing, Human Resource Management, Business Ethics, Lean Six Sigma-Yellow Belt, Project
Management, Advanced Project Management, Lean Six Sigma – Green Belt, Non-Profit Organization Management,
Tax Accounting, E-Business, and Advertising.
COURSE 1
BMGT 1327
Principles of Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course explores the rich concepts and applications of management. Students will learn to apply management
concepts about decision making, foundations of planning, managing change, effective communication, operations
management, and team building.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Define management and Operations management
2. Understand globalization and how it affects organizations
3. Become acquainted with the foundation of decision making
4. Understand organizational structure and design
5. Be able to apply principles of Human Resource Management
6. Understand the foundations of human behavior and motivating and rewarding employees
7. Understand managing change, innovation, groups, managing work teams, leadership and trust
8. Know how to manage communication and information
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 2
ITSC 1209
MS Office Applications I
32/16/0/2.5/2.5 Students will be introduced to Word. The course will concentrate on hands-on experience with the features of
Microsoft Office. Students will learn to format text, compress files, create new documents, insert and format
graphics, create tables, insert footnotes, create columns, use mail merge, create charts, and insert hyperlinks.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Save files in new folders, print, save, use comments and track changes in a document
Western Tech Catalog | 151
2. Format text and paragraphs
3. Create a document using tables and templates to create resumes and cover letters
4. Create research papers, newsletters, and merged mailing labels
5. Create a blog post, web content, insert hyperlinks and use advanced editing tools
6. Create mass mailings
7. Embed and link objects and use macros
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 3
ITSC 2221
MS Office Applications II
32/16/0/2.5/2.5 Students will be introduced to Microsoft Excel. The course will concentrate on hands-on experience with the
features of Microsoft Office. Students will learn to create worksheets and charting data, tables, pie-charts, diagrams,
templates, pivot tables and pivot charts, formulas, format worksheets, and evaluate complex formulas.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Create and manage worksheets and workbooks.
2. Manage data cells and ranges
3. Create tables
4. Perform Operations with formulas & functions
5. Create Charts and objects.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 4
ENGL 1301
Composition I
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The student, focusing on the academic essay, will study the principles and techniques of expository and persuasive
composition, including drafting, revising, and editing in paragraphs and essays and will produce a resume.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Use paragraphs as building blocks of essays.
2. Explain the means of persuasion and strategies for evaluating evidence.
3. Demonstrate technical writing skills and concise written communication.
4. Distinguish among academic writing, writing for work, and informal writing.
5. Evaluate what was read and make editorial suggestions.
6. Write an expository and a persuasive essay.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 5
HRPO 2301
Human Resources Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course provides an in-depth study and practice of personnel management or human resource management.
It includes the process of acquiring, training, appraising, and compensating employees, and of attending to their labor
relations, health and safety, and fairness concerns.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain why human resource management is important to all managers and describe the trends that are
influencing it.
2. Summarize the basic equal employment opportunity laws and how each impacts HR functions such as
recruitment and selection
3. Explain the basic defenses against discrimination allegations and provide examples of what employers
can and cannot legally do with respect to recruitment, selection, and promotion and layoff practices
4. Describe three important strategic human resource management tools
5. Write job descriptions, including summaries and job functions, using the Internet and traditional
methods
6. Explain and give examples of the need for branding in effective recruiting and how to do a background
check on job candidates
7. List and explain the five steps in the training process and the pros and cons of at least eight performance
appraisal methods
8. Define employee relations and discuss at least four methods for managing
Prerequisites: None
Western Tech Catalog | 152
COURSE 6
MATH 1312
Algebra
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The student will study relations and functions, including polynomial, rational, exponential, logarithmic, and
special functions. Other topics include systems of equations and its applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Use scientific notation.
2. Perform operations on and factor polynomials.
3. Graph, solve and apply linear and quadratic equations.
4. Perform operations on and solve rational equations.
5. Calculate and define ratio and proportions.
6. Solve systems of linear equations.
7. Analyze functions.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 7
ACNT 1525
Accounting Principles I
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course will develop an understanding of accounting principles relating to business operations. The course
will concentrate on generally accepted principles, the accounting process, assets and liabilities, journalizing, and
posting adjusting entries. Students will be able to record transactions and adjusting entries, post to the ledger, close
periods, and see the effects in the ledger accounts.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Examine and prepare Income Statements, Statement of Retained Earnings, and Balance Sheets
2. Understand assets, liabilities, owner’s equity, and the importance of financial statements
3. Use revenue and expense accounts
4. Define the drawing account
5. List the rules of debit and credit
6. Understand permanent and temporary accounts and the general journal
7. Correct journal and ledger errors
8. Understand journalizing, posting adjusting entries, and the closing process
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 8
BMGT 1341
Business Ethics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The course will focus on the moral and ethical issues of businesses. This course will focus on business decision
making, ethics, economics and law, ethical organizational decision making, market ethics, whistle-blowing, trade
secrets and conflict of interest, discrimination and affirmative action, marketing, advertising, product safety,
employment rights and ethics in finance.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand ethical management and ethics in organizations and describe the two realms that law and
ethics govern
2. Describe breaches and fraud
3. Identify the rules of business ethics and describe ethical requirement specific to professionals
4. Describe the Kantian Ethics
5. Identify employee rights and describe the justification of whistle-blowing and the meaning of loyalty
6. Describe trade secrets, conflict of interest, the challenges of privacy, and the meaning of discrimination
and harassment
7. Understand the distinction between safety and health
8. Describe the relationship between ethics and economics and describe business decisions that are
unethical even if legal
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 9
SCOM 1211
Fundamentals of Human Communication
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Study of human communication as a process. Overview of the principals of interpersonal, small group and
presentation skills essential to effective social, business, and professional interaction. Emphasis on examining the
Western Tech Catalog | 153
role of self-concept, perception, culture, verbal, nonverbal, and written communication. Applying effective writing
principles and strategies for understanding and presenting information for various purposes and audiences.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify the components of communication and its barriers.
2. Analyze the audience and describe the criteria for choosing communication media.
3. Communicate ethically and avoid potential legal consequences of communication.
4. Plan the purpose, content and organization of message.
5. Proofread message, revise for content, style and correctness.
6. Prepare and deliver a presentation.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 10
ACNT 1526
Accounting Principles II
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course is a continuation of Accounting I. Students apply concepts related to Accounts Receivable, long-
term liabilities, fixed assets, inventory valuation, Partnerships, Corporations, process costing, cost-volume analysis,
cost allocation and responsibility accounting. Students will be able to launch Connect for practice purposes and lab.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Journalize transactions for Accounts Receivable, long-term notes payable and mortgage payable
2. Describe bonds payable and report liabilities on the balance sheet
3. Use commonly used depreciation methods
4. Describe and illustrate how debt and equity securities are reported
5. Explain different inventory valuations such as FIFO, LIFO, Average cost method
6. Explain how financial statements are used to analyze a business and perform a horizontal and vertical
analysis of financial statements
7. Record materials and labor costs in a job order costing system
8. Prepare a production cost report using the weighted-average method and use cost-volume profit analysis
for profit planning
Prerequisites: ACNT 1525 Accounting Principles I
COURSE 11
MRKG 1311
Principles of Marketing
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course involves the systematic planning, implementation and control of a mix of business activities intended
to bring together buyers and sellers for the mutually advantageous exchange or transfer of products.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the marketplace and customers and identify the fire core marketplace concepts
2. Describe customer relationship management, identify strategies for creating value for customers, create
business portfolios and develop growth strategies
3. Describe how changes in the demographic and economic environments affect marketing decisions
4. Describe how companies analyze and use marketing information and how companies find and develop
new-product ideas
5. List and define the major types of buying decision behavior and the stages in the buyer decision process
6. Define the major steps in designing a customer-driven marketing strategy: market segmentation,
targeting, differentiation, and positioning
7. Identify the three major pricing strategies and discuss the importance of understanding customer-value
perceptions, company costs, and competitor strategies when setting prices
8. Define the need to understand competitors as well as customers through competitor analysis
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 12
ECON 2301
Principles of Macroeconomics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 An analysis of the economy as a whole including measurement and determination of Aggregate Demand and
Aggregate Supply, national income, inflation, and unemployment. Other topics include international trade, economic
growth, business cycles, and fiscal policy and monetary policy.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the role of scarcity, specialization, opportunity cost and cost/benefit analysis in economic
decision-making.
2. Identify the determinants of supply and demand; demonstrate the impact of shifts in both market supply
and demand curves on equilibrium price and output.
Western Tech Catalog | 154
3. Define and measure national income and rates of unemployment and inflation.
4. Identify the phases of the business cycle and the problems caused by cyclical fluctuations in the market
economy.
5. Define money and the money supply; describe the process of money creation by the banking system
and the role of the central bank.
6. Construct the aggregate demand and aggregate supply model of the macro economy and use it to
illustrate macroeconomic problems and potential monetary and fiscal policy solutions.
7. Explain the mechanics and institutions of international trade and their impact on the macro economy.
8. Define economic growth and identify sources of economic growth.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 13
GEOL 1301
Geology
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course introduces students to the study of the materials and processes that have modified and shaped the
surface and interior of Earth over time. These processes are described by theories based on experimental data and
geologic data gathered from field observations.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to do the following:
1. Describe how the scientific method has led to our current understanding of Earth’s structure and
processes.
2. Interpret the origin and distribution of minerals, rocks and geologic resources.
3. Explain the theory of plate tectonics and its relationship to the formation and distribution of Earth’s
crustal features.
4. Quantify the rates of physical and chemical processes acting on Earth and how these processes fit into
the context of geologic time.
5. Associate how surface processes are driven by interactions among Earth’s systems (e.g., the geosphere,
hydrosphere, biosphere, and atmosphere).
6. Identify and describe the internal structure and dynamics of Earth.
7. Appreciate the interactions of humans with Earth (e.g., resource development or hazard assessment).
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 14
BUSG 2317
Business Law
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course provides an overview of business law and introduces fundamental principles encountered in the
business environment. Some of the topics include courts and jurisdiction, judicial, bankruptcy and organization,
torts, crimes and intellectual property, contracts and e-commerce, liability, equal opportunity limited partnership and
special partnership, employment, and e-filing.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand constitutional law for business and e-commerce
2. Understand criminal law and cyber crimes
3. Define third-party rights and discharge
4. Understand key terms and concepts of the formation of sales and lease contracts
5. Identify credit, mortgages, and debtor’s rights
6. Become acquainted with employment, worker protection, and immigration law
7. Identify and describe the different types of business entities such as: sole proprietorship, partnerships,
corporations etc.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 15
ACNT 1229
Payroll Accounting
38/10/0/2.5/2.5 Students will be introduced to payroll laws and regulations, determine gross earnings, payroll deductions, federal
and state payroll taxes, and tax reports. A comprehensive practice set requires students to perform payroll functions
for a small business. This practice set will conclude with the end-of-quarter and end-of-year activities that all
businesses must go through.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Define and explain the terms represented by these abbreviations: IRS, OASDI, FICA, FUTA, SUTA,
ERISA
2. Describe the general types of withholding allowances to which an employee will be entitled
Western Tech Catalog | 155
3. Define the common payroll periods: weekly, biweekly semimonthly, and monthly and the difference
between temporary and contract workers
4. Compute gross earning based on regular and overtime hours worked and describe how an EFT payroll
system works
5. Name several common “pretax” items that lessen the amount of income tax for employees
6. Use federal and state wage-bracket tables to determine income taxes due on employee earnings
7. Calculate social security and Medicare taxes on employee earnings
8. Compute the earnings from tips of an employee, explain how taxes on these earnings are recorded, and
complete an annual state report of wages paid and tax owed
Prerequisites: ACNT 1525 Accounting Principles I
COURSE 16
MATH 1324
Mathematics for Business & Social Sciences
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course explores the rich concepts and applications for students in business, management, natural and social
sciences. Students will learn to apply mathematics concepts involving linear equations, quadratic equations,
functions and graphs, inequalities, simple and compound interest, annuities, matrices, and probabilities.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Set up and solve systems of equations using matrix methods
2. Perform operations with matrices
3. Set up and solve linear programming applications using geometric and simplex methods
4. Compute probabilities using principles of sets and counting
5. Analyze data using basic principles of statistics
6. Solve financial applications involving simple and compound interest and annuities
Prerequisites: MATH 1312 Algebra
COURSE 17 ACNT 1213
Computerized Accounting (QuickBooks)
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course is designed to present accounting concepts and their relationship to QuickBooks. Students will learn
the underlying accounting concepts and receive hands-on training on how to implement them in QuickBooks. The
course introduces students to QuickBooks accounting for a service business, a merchandising business, payroll, and
a company setup for QuickBooks. Students will record business transactions using an up-to-date commercial
software program designed for and used by businesses and accountants.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Recognize QuickBooks forms and understand the use of lists and registers in QuickBooks
2. Prepare QuickBooks graphs and use QuickReport within graphs
3. Create invoices, record sales transactions on account, and create payroll checks
4. Understand the concepts for computerized accounting for payables
5. Record depreciation and enter the adjusting entries required for accrual-basis accounting.
6. Use the Customer Center to obtain information regarding credit customers
7. Customize a purchase order template
8. Set up a company using the EasyStep Interview and QuickBooks Setup
Prerequisites: ACNT 1525 Accounting Principles I
COURSE 18
PSYC 2301
General Psychology
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The student will be introduced to the basic principles of psychology and apply those principles to a particular
field of knowledge or activity.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand human developmental phases.
2. Explain the basic psychological concepts.
3. Appreciate the theorists’ explanations of human behavior.
4. Describe the therapeutic approaches
5. Identify psychological disorders, their causes and treatments
6. Apply psychological principles to understanding and working with co-workers and clients.
Prerequisites: None
Western Tech Catalog | 156
COURSE 19
BMGT 2210
Professionalism
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course focuses on career preparation, job search tools and resources, and professionalism. In addition,
students will be assigned a project that will allow them to use the skills learned in the program. Students will
demonstrate the practical application of skills learned in other courses. Student will also perform in a mock interview
with a real-world employer that will grade them on their interviewing skills. The mock interview will also prepare
the students for interviews in their job seeking endeavors Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Conduct a targeted job search, including a realistic job preview
2. Create a job search portfolio
3. Identify references to be used in your job search and sources for job lead
4. Identify the steps for building a resume package and create a resume and cover letter
5. Demonstrate strategies to implement when invited to an interview
6. Discuss salary negotiation strategies
7. Define a team and its functions
8. Conduct collaborative work in the community
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 20
HIST 1301
United States History I
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 A survey of the social, political, economic, cultural, and intellectual history of the United States from the pre-
Columbian era to the Civil War/Reconstruction period. United States History I includes the study of pre-Columbian,
colonial, revolutionary, early national, slavery and sectionalism, and the Civil War/Reconstruction eras. Themes that
may be addressed in United States History I include: American settlement and diversity, American culture, religion,
civil and human rights, technological change, economic change, immigration and migration, and creation of the
federal government.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Create an argument through the use of historical evidence.
2. Analyze and interpret primary and secondary sources.
3. Analyze the effects of historical, social, political, economic, cultural, and global forces on this period
of United States history.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 21
ECON 2302
Principles of Microeconomics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Analysis of the behavior of individual economic agents, including consumer behavior and demand, producer
behavior and supply, price and output decisions by firms under various market structures, factor markets, market
failures, and international trade.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the role of scarcity, specialization, opportunity cost and cost/benefit analysis in economic
decision-making.
2. Identify the determinants of supply and demand; demonstrate the impact of shifts in both market supply
and demand curves on equilibrium price and output.
3. Summarize the law of diminishing marginal utility; describe the process of utility maximization.
4. Calculate supply and demand elasticities, identify the determinants of price elasticity of demand and
supply, and demonstrate the relationship between elasticity and total revenue.
5. Describe the production function and the Law of Diminishing Marginal Productivity; calculate and
graph short-run and long-run costs of production.
6. Identify the four market structures by characteristics; calculate and graph the profit maximizing price
and quantity in the output markets by use of marginal analysis.
7. Determine the profit maximizing price and quantity of resources in factor markets under perfect and
imperfect competition by use of marginal analysis.
8. Describe governmental efforts to address market failure such as monopoly power, externalities, and
public goods.
9. Identify the benefits of free trade using the concept of comparative advantage.
Prerequisites: ECON 2301 Principles of Macroeconomics
Western Tech Catalog | 157
COURSE 22
HIST 1302
United States History II
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 A survey of the social, political, economic, cultural, and intellectual history of the United States from the Civil
War/Reconstruction era to the present. United States History II examines industrialization, immigration, world wars,
the Great Depression, Cold War and post-Cold War eras. Themes that may be addressed in United States History II
include: American culture, religion, civil and human rights, technological change, economic change, immigration
and migration, urbanization and suburbanization, the expansion of the federal government, and the study of U.S.
foreign policy.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Create an argument through the use of historical evidence.
2. Analyze and interpret primary and secondary sources.
3. Analyze the effects of historical, social, political, economic, cultural, and global forces on this period
of United States history.
Prerequisites: HIST 1301 United States History I
COURSE 23
BUSG 2311
Entrepreneurship and Innovation
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course is an introduction to Entrepreneurship and Innovation. Students will develop successful business
ideas, learn how to manage and grow an entrepreneurial firm, learn how to conduct a feasibility analysis, how to
write and present a business plan, how to develop a business model, and the ethical and legal issues facing new firms.
Prepares students to become creative, thoughtful, and determined professionals who are able to apply their analytical
skills in developing well-planned and socially responsible ventures and innovations which they can persuasively
present to executive audiences.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Define the characteristics of successful entrepreneurs
2. Recognize opportunities and generate ideas
3. Conduct a feasibility analysis
4. Write and present a business plan
5. Understand industry and competitor analysis
6. Develop an effective business model
7. Describe ethical and legal issues facing new firms
8. Describe how to obtain business licenses and permits
9. Understand an introduction to financial management
10. Create a new-venture team
11. Understand the importance of getting financing or funding
12. Understand how to select a market and establish a position
13. Define intellectual property and patents
14. Describe franchising and how it works
15. Brainstorm, create and utilize new ideas.
16. Understand how innovation changes the world.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 24
ENGL 1302
Research Analysis
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Intensive study of and practice in the strategies and techniques for developing research-based expository and
persuasive texts. Emphasis on effective and ethical rhetorical inquiry, including primary and secondary research
methods; critical reading of verbal, visual, and multimedia texts; systematic evaluation, synthesis, and documentation
of information sources; and critical thinking about evidence and conclusions.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Demonstrate knowledge of individual and collaborative research processes.
2. Develop ideas and synthesize primary and secondary sources within focused academic arguments,
including one or more research-based essays.
3. Analyze, interpret, and evaluate a variety of texts for the ethical and logical uses of evidence.
4. Write in a style that clearly communicates meaning, builds credibility, and inspires belief or action.
5. Apply the conventions of style manuals for specific academic disciplines (e.g., APA, CMS, MLA, etc.)
Prerequisites: None
Western Tech Catalog | 158
COURSE 25
LSSY 3310
Principles of Lean Six Sigma
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The course is designed to introduce the student to the world of Lean Six Sigma. Lean Six Sigma is a method that
provides organizations tools to improve the capability of their business processes. The increase in performance and
decrease in process variation lead to defect reduction and improvement in profits, employee morale, and quality of
products or services. It adopts the approach of advancing the concept and potential of using Six Sigma tools and
methodologies within an organization. Also, students will develop skills necessary to identify, monitor and control
“profit-eating” practices in a process.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify the role of a Lean Six Sigma Yellow Belt within the organization.
2. Participate as a project team member.
3. Review process improvements that support the project.
4. Understand Process Concepts and Variation
5. Understand Six Sigma Metrics.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 26
PHIL 1301
Introduction to Philosophy
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 A study of major issues in philosophy and/or the work of major philosophical figures in philosophy. Topics in
philosophy may include theories of reality, theories of knowledge, theories of value, and their practical applications.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Read, analyze, and critique philosophical texts.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of key concepts, major arguments, problems, and terminology in philosophy.
3. Present logically persuasive arguments both orally and in writing.
4. Demonstrate critical thinking skills in evaluation and application of philosophical concepts to various
aspects of life.
5. Evaluate the personal and social responsibilities of living in a diverse world.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 27
BMGT 3301
Project Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 The goal of this course is to provide concepts and skills that are used by managers to propose, plan, secure
resources, budget, and lead project teams to successful completions of their projects. Students will understand why
organizations have developed a formal project management process to gain a competitive advantage.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand why project management is becoming such a powerful and popular practice in business
2. Recognize the key motivators that are pushing companies to adopt project management practices
3. Understand how effective project management contributes to achieving strategic objectives
4. Understand how to employ checklists and simple scoring models to select projects
5. Employ financial analysis and options analysis to evaluate the potential for new project investments
6. Distinguish between the role of a manager and the characteristics of a leader
7. Describe the roles of changes and configuration management in assessing project scope
8. Understand the steps involved in project team building
9. Describe how to achieve cross-functional cooperation in teams
10. Recognize the appropriateness of applying contingency funds for cost estimation
11. Calculate the probability of a project finishing on time under PERT estimates
12. Construct and comprehend Gantt charts
13. Apply critical chain project management to project portfolios
Prerequisites: None
Western Tech Catalog | 159
COURSE 28
IBUS 3300
Logistics Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course explores the rich concepts and applications of Contemporary Logistics and all its components. It will
include Financial Logistics, Inventory Management Logistics, Warehouse Management Logistics, Packing and
Materials Handling Logistics, and Transportation Logistics. It will also address how today’s technology affects the
overall environment of Logistics, organizational and managerial issues in Logistics, the importance of facility
location, and transportation infrastructures.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Define management and its functions
2. Understand globalization and how it affects organizations
3. Become acquainted with the foundation of decision making
4. Understand organization structure and design
5. Be able to apply principles of Human Resource Management
6. Understand the foundations of human behavior
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 29
MATH 1342
Statistics
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Collection, analysis, presentation and interpretation of data, and probability. Analysis includes descriptive
statistics, correlation and regression, confidence intervals and hypothesis testing. Use of appropriate technology is
recommended.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the use of data collection and statistics as tools to reach reasonable conclusions.
2. Recognize, examine and interpret the basic principles of describing and presenting data.
3. Compute and interpret empirical and theoretical probabilities using the rules of probabilities and
combinatorics.
4. Explain the role of probability in statistics.
5. Examine, analyze and compare various sampling distributions for both discrete and continuous random
variables.
6. Describe and compute confidence intervals.
7. Solve linear regression and correlation problems.
8. Perform hypothesis testing using statistical methods.
Prerequisites: MATH 1324 Mathematics for Business & Social Sciences
COURSE 30
LSSG 3311
Applied Lean Six Sigma
48/0/48/4.5/4.5 The Lean Six Sigma Green Belt course is designed to present the role of a Green Belt who operates in support of
or under the supervision of a Six Sigma Black Belt, analyzes and solves quality problems and is involved in quality
improvement projects. The course teaches the student define-measure-analyze-improve-control methodology using
case studies from several industries. Also, students will learn to define improvement projects to satisfy the customer
and reduce variation Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Analyze and solve quality problems.
2. Get involved in quality or continuous improvement projects.
3. Demonstrate knowledge in Six Sigma tools and processes.
4. Understand the DMAIC methodology (Define, Measure, Analyze, Improve, and Control).
Prerequisites: LSSY 3310 Principles of Lean Six Sigma
COURSE 31
BMGT 4333
Non-Profit Organization Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course examines management principles and practice for nonprofit organizations. Consideration is given to
leadership in a nonprofit environment, the motivation of staff and volunteers, the role of the founder and the board,
and types and structures of nonprofit organizations.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Discuss nonprofit structure.
2. Describe nonprofit governance and the relationship between the board and executive director.
3. Describe nonprofit servant leadership.
Western Tech Catalog | 160
4. Outline key ethical issues for managers, staff and volunteers.
5. Outline the key financial and legal issues for nonprofit organizations.
6. Discuss the importance of marketing and communication and social media.
7. Explain the basics of nonprofit fundraising and grant writing process.
8. Outline methods of nonprofit performance assessment.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 32
FINA 3315
Business Finance
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course provides an overview of business financial management. Emphasis is on financial statement analysis,
time value of money, management of cash flow, risk and return, and sources of financing. Upon completion, students
should be able to interpret and apply the principles of financial management.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Fulfill the roles, responsibilities and expectations required of the position.
2. Comprehend and apply the principles of the communication process, both as a sender and receiver
of messages.
3. Demonstrate the ability to express oneself in clear and concise ways.
4. Determine the most appropriate form of communication to satisfy the intent of the message.
5. Demonstrate the ability to objectively identify and assess resources that can provide accurate
information.
6. Apply planning techniques and monitor progress toward achievement.
7. Apply problem-solving techniques applicable to business decision making.
8. Recognize and comprehend the organization’s goals and objectives.
9. Model and promote behavior and work habits that the organization strives to attain.
10. Apply the principles of business finance which support the overall financial strategy of the
organization.
11. Apply the standard and accepted accounting principles when reporting, recording, and projecting
financial information/
12. Understand the structure of financial statements.
13. Demonstrate an understanding of the basic principles of taxation relevant to business activities.
14. Effectively utilize the time value of money, and financial return and risk concepts to conduct
professional financial analyzes.
15. Identify the primary determinants of market interest rates and describe the responses to changes to
those rates in terms of supply and demand for loanable funds.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 33
BMGT 4301
Advanced Project Management
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 The course covers the five process groups of project management: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring,
and Controlling, and Closing. The course focuses on the concepts and skills required or project managers to
successfully manage a project.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Recognize the appropriateness of applying contingency funds for cost estimation
2. Calculate the probability of a project finishing on time under PERT estimates
3. Construct and comprehend Gantt charts
4. Incorporate various life cycles and methodologies.
5. Identify program/portfolio management.
6. Apply critical chain project management to project portfolios
Prerequisites: BMGT 3301 Project Management
COURSE 34
BMGT 4325
International Business Management
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course provides an overview of the international organizations and the effects of the foreign environment
on international business. The course will focus on cultural differences; theories of international trade and economic
development; international finance; marketing internationally and practical applications of starting and maintaining
international business relationships.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Assess the environment: Political, Economic, Legal, and technological.
Western Tech Catalog | 161
2. Understand the role of culture, communicating, cross-cultural negotiation and decision making.
3. Formulate strategy: Strategic Alliances, Small Business, Emerging Economy firms
4. Identify Organization Structure and Control Systems.
5. Apply staffing, training, and compensation for global operations.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 35
BMGT 3321
Production/Operation Management
48/48/0/4.5/4.5 This course examines the functional area of production and operations management in the manufacturing industry.
Topics include decision-making, capacity planning, aggregate planning, forecasting, and inventory management,
distribution planning, materials requirements planning (MRP), project management and quality control.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Recognize the importance of quality control.
2. Identify product and process designs.
3. Implement productivity improvement.
4. Understand Quality Management
5. Understand new product development
6. Apply forecasting methods
7. Apply capacity planning measures
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 36
BMGT 4020
E-Business
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 E-business focuses on the opportunities that IT can provide when private and public organizations interact with
their customers, clients or stakeholders. You will learn to understand and develop IT-based concepts that match the
needs of the users, but also how to implement and commercialize them. This allows you to create services, apps and
other solutions that support the strategy and desired goal for both companies and society at large. Whether you're
already working in e-commerce/e-business or hoping to launch or grow an online business, this course will help you
become better equipped. Get the skills and knowledge you need for e-commerce (buying and selling over the Internet)
and e-business (conducting business using Internet technology). You'll explore best practices and learn to take on a
more meaningful role as a practitioner, manager or leader.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify and explain the variety of e-business models, i.e., business to business, business to customer,
consumer to consumer;
2. Determine an appropriate e-business model and apply it to a specific business;
3. Explain the benefits and limitations to using e-business models in relation to traditional models;
4. Identify and describe the four P’s for a specific product;
5. Explain the implementation of the 4P’s to a specific target market;
6. Identify the location of a specific product within the life-cycle;
7. Determine the product’s level of competition, profit/loss, marketing approach, etc. that are
characteristic of that stage.
8. Define and describe the term “Internet economy”.
9. Define and describe characteristics of a traditional market economy;
10. Apply the laws of supply and demand to economic transactions between producers and consumers;
. Identify a company’s position in the channel and explain the relationship the company has with
other channel members.
11. Articulate the scope of the overall channel.
12. Describe the characteristic of each form of business ownership.
13. Identify and justify the appropriate business format for a specific business.
14. Identify the severity of down-turns in the business cycle on traditional vs. Internet businesses
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 37
BMGT 4302
HR Management Development
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course is concerned with the development of knowledge and skills needed for productive and satisfying work
in which in turn is critical to organizational success. As a key to human resource specialty area, it provides a vital
service for today’s employees, employers, corporations and society.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Western Tech Catalog | 162
1. Introduction to Human Resource Development (HRD).
2. Influences on employee behavior
3. Learning and HRD.
4. Assessing HRD needs.
5. Designing effective HRD programs.
6. Implementing HRD programs and evaluating HRD programs.
7. Onboarding employee socialization and orientation.
8. Skills and technical training.
9. Coaching and performance management.
10. Employee counseling, well-being, and wellness.
11. Career management and development.
12. Management and development.
13. Organization development and change.
Prerequisites: HRPO 2301 Human Resources Management
COURSE 38
ACNT 4312
Tax Accounting
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 This course covers the fundamentals of Federal income tax and how it influences taxpayer decisions. The course
is designed to acquaint the student with the working and concepts of the federal tax law specifically to individuals
and business entities. The course explains principles and concepts of federal income tax for individuals, corporations,
and partnerships; underlying rationale; advance planning to minimize tax impact.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the primary objectives of the federal income tax law.
2. Use components of the tax formula to calculate an individual’s federal income tax liability.
3. Differentiate which sources of income are considered inclusions in gross income and those which
are considered exclusions from gross income.
4. Determine which sources of expenses incurred or paid are deductible for federal income tax
purposes.
5. Categorize allowable deductions between business and non-business deductions.
6. Calculate depreciation and cost recovery deductions.
7. Identify and calculate the various tax credits allowed by law.
8. Determine the tax basis of property.
9. Differentiate between realization and recognition of gain or loss in property transactions.
10. Calculate the realized and recognized gain or loss in property transactions.
11. Define capital assets.
12. Explain and apply the tax rules for calculating and reporting an individual taxpayer’s capital gains
and losses.
13. Demonstrate the ability to conduct basic research using online data bases.
Prerequisites: ACNT 1525 Accounting Principles I
COURSE 39
ADVT 4336
Advertising Creative Strategy & Execution
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Development of effective creative campaigns. Students will design advertisements for print, broadcast,
interactive, and specialty media that meet specific campaign objectives. Students will cover advertising as an
institution, strategy development, and creative execution in the advertising media. The coursework provides a basic
understanding of the advertising process, advertising's role in society, its procedures and practices
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. What are unexpected but relevant selling messages
2. What identity and image strategy does to products
3. The basis for effective creative work
4. Strategy for reaching out to an ever-changing marketplace
5. Define Strategy and its components
6. How to stay up with the 21st century market
7. How to connect to the consumer’s heart and mind
8. How to design and create
9. The power of radio, television, and social media
10. Define Direct Marketing and its new technology
11. Government regulations on advertising
Prerequisites: MRKG 1311 Principles of Marketing
Western Tech Catalog | 163
COURSE 40
BMGT 4300
Capstone
48/0/0/3.0/3.0 Students will complete a variety of projects and written assignments designed to encourage self-analysis of career
and intellectual interests in the student’s chosen career field based on the three minors selected. This information
will be used to develop a detailed project proposal and complete a final capstone project linking the three minor areas
of study of the student’s personalized BS degree plan with career and intellectual interests. The final written project
will consist of research, reviews, and analysis targeted towards a specified audience. A presentation of the project
is required. Writing Enhanced.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. The Strategy Making Process.
2. Stakeholders, the Mission, Governance, and Business Ethics.
3. External Analysis: The identification of opportunities and threats.
4. Building competitive advantage.
5. Business-Level Strategy and Competitive Positioning.
6. Strategy in the Global Environment.
7. Corporate-Level Strategy and Long-Run Profitability.
8. Strategic Change: Implementing Strategies to Build and Develop a Company.
9. Implementing Strategy through Organization Design.
Prerequisites: None
COURSE 41
BMGT 4388
Business Administration & Management Internship
0/0/160/3.5/3.5 Internship will integrate the knowledge and skills students learned in the program. Working under the direction
and supervision of business owners, managers, supervisors, or industry experts, students maintain ethical and
professional work standards while applying classroom learning. Students will receive actual hands-on application
in a workplace environment.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Recognize individual and cultural differences and respond appropriately
2. Demonstrate initiative and interest in performing the duties assigned
3. Maintain good attendance and punctuality
4. Maintain a professional appearance and ethical behavior
5. Demonstrate competency in Word, Excel, Human Resource Management, Marketing, Advertising,
Accounting, and Payroll.
6. Recognize ethical decision making
7. Use organizational skills and complete projects assigned on a timely basis
8. Demonstrate ability to work in a team, meet deadlines and keeping work area clean and organized
Prerequisites: None
Note: While every effort will be made to schedule internship experiences for students in the evening program
to coincide with their school schedule, most companies in the business field operate during regular business
hours, which is 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Therefore, evening students need to be prepared to attend their
internships during morning and/or afternoon hours in order to successfully complete this program
requirement.
Western Tech Catalog | 164
WESTERN TECH
POLICIES AND STANDARDS
Awards
Honor Student Awards are given at the end of each
grading period to outstanding student(s) in each
department. Selections are based on those performance
characteristics that employers frequently look for in a
graduate: shop/lab grades, exam grades, attendance,
shop safety, dependability, cooperation, and initiative.
Students who achieve at least a 95% grade average and
a 98% attendance will be eligible for Honor Student
Awards.
Directors Honor Roll Certificates are awarded at the
end of each grading period to students who achieve at
least a 90% grade average and a 98% attendance record.
Perfect Attendance Awards are presented to those
students who complete each grading period with 100%
attendance.
Attendance Policies
In order to better prepare students for employment,
by developing good habits, it is essential that
absenteeism and tardiness be kept to an absolute
minimum. Western Tech strives to enforce attendance
policies which require students to regularly and
punctually attend class. All absences and tardiness are
recorded regardless of the reason.
The College will evaluate each student’s attendance
at the end of each course. In cases of excessive
absenteeism or tardiness, the College may take
disciplinary action prior to the end of a course. Students
who exceed 15% of the first course of their program
may be dropped due to not meeting the cumulative
attendance percentage requirements. Students who miss
more than 15% of their scheduled classes after the first
course will be placed on attendance probation for the
following course. A student missing over 15% of
scheduled class days during the probationary course
may be terminated from the College. Student is at risk
of being terminated when his/her absences exceed 15%
of the total cumulative hours in the program.
Authorized Leaves of Absence (LOA) will not be
included in the attendance percentage of a course.
As mandated by the Texas Workforce Commission,
the school’s regulating body, consecutive absences
(without an approved leave of absence) cannot exceed
ten (10) consecutive days. To do so will result in an
automatic drop from the program. Any student who is
terminated for unsatisfactory attendance may not re-
enter college before the start of the next grading period,
and will only be readmitted if the factor(s) contributing
to the poor attendance has been resolved to the
College’s satisfaction. A student who was terminated
for violating the attendance policy and that is readmitted
will be placed on attendance probation for at least one
course.
College holidays and scheduled annual breaks are
not considered days of absence. However, the Veterans
Administration regulations require that all scheduled
school breaks be reported.
Tardy Policy
Students will be deducted time to the nearest quarter
for coming in late to class and from breaks and for
leaving early for the day. If a student arrives any time
after 8:00 a.m., but before 8:15 a.m., the student will be
charged 15 minutes. If the student arrives after 8:15
a.m. but before 8:30 a.m., the student will be charged
for 30 minutes, and so on. The same applies when a
student leaves class for any reason.
All tardies are reported by the instructor to the
registrar and will be used as part of the overall
attendance percentage. A student can end up on
attendance probation without having missed a day of
school if the tardies accumulate. Furthermore,
instructors have the authority to request work at the start
of class, and students arriving late may end up with a
lesser grade or a zero for a grade, depending on the
policy laid out by the instructor. Instructors can further
schedule quizzes and exams at the start of class.
Students arriving late may also be subject to receiving a
lesser grade or a zero, depending on the class policy.
Students missing 30% of an entire course may be
required to retake the course in its entirety. It’s
important to arrive to school on time, and not leave class
early.
Make-up Work & Hours
At its discretion, the College may allow a student,
who for reasons acceptable to the College, is
experiencing non-repetitive, extreme attendance
problems, to make up essential coursework previously
missed due to absenteeism. It is the student’s
responsibility to contact his/her department program
director and instructor to arrange for any make-up work
& hours. No more than 5% of the total program
clock hours can be made up. In the event that a
student misses a significant amount of hours in a course,
the instructor may determine that’s in the best interest
of the student to repeat the entire course.
All make-up work & hours must:
1. Be approved by the Instructor and
department Program Director.
2. Be supervised by an instructor approved to
teach the subject matter being made up.
3. Require the student to demonstrate the
same level of knowledge and competence
expected of a student who attended the
scheduled class session.
4. Be completed within two weeks following
the date of the absence or the date in which
the student returns to college.
5. Be documented by the instructor as being
completed. The documentation should
include the date, time, duration of the
make-up session, as well as the name of the
supervising instructor.
6. Be signed and dated by the student and the
instructor to acknowledge the make-up
session.
Western Tech Catalog | 165
7. Be documented using a make-up time
form.
Leaves of Absence (LOA)
A leave of absence (LOA) is a temporary
interruption in a student’s program of study and should
only be requested in emergencies and extenuating
circumstances including but not limited to: medical
reasons, military service, or jury duty. In order to
request an LOA, the student must submit a signed,
written request to the registrar. The written request
should include the reason for the LOA and the amount
of time needed. All LOAs must have prior approval by
the students’ program director and campus director.
Leaves of absence shall be reasonable in duration,
preferably not to exceed 45 calendar days. Western
Tech highly discourages any requests for an additional
leave of absence; however, Western Tech may grant
more than one LOA in the event that an unforeseen
circumstance arises, such as medical reasons, military
service, or jury duty. The LOA, together with any
additional leaves of absence, must not exceed a total of
120 days in any 12-month period. However, Western
Tech may grant only one (1) more additional LOA
within a 12-month period, in the event that an
unforeseen circumstance arises. Anything over 120
days, will require approval from the Program
Director, Campus Director, and Financial Aid
Director before the student is due to return back to
school. Students who fail to contact any of the above
to request an extension, will be dropped immediately
for failure to return from their LOA on their
prescribed due date.
It will be left to the discretion of the program director
and instructor whether the student may attempt to
complete the required make-up work and challenge the
course exam for credit. If not approved, the student will
be required to retake the course in its entirety. Due to
the sequential nature and prerequisites of many of the
courses in each respective program, students may be
required to return to the same point in their studies in
which they began their LOA. If approved, contingent on
course scheduling and availability, the student may be
required to: (1) audit classes until they can return to the
point of study in which they began their LOA, (2) attend
a different schedule, or (3) double class loads by
attending multiple schedules.
All Students:
• Retaking a course may affect the
student’s graduation date and depending
on course schedules and availability, may
require the student to change class
schedules for the remainder of their
training.
• Students on an LOA remain in Active
Status; therefore, they are still obligated
to maintain payments due to Western
Tech.
• Students must return on or before the
day they are required to from their
Leave of Absence. Failure to do so will
result in being dropped from the
program.
In order to graduate, a student’s cumulative absences
(not including Leave of Absence) must not exceed 15%
of the total program hours.
Refer to the Active Military and Veterans section for
the veteran leave of absence policy.
Drop/Withdrawal
If a student should elect to withdraw from his/her
program for any reason before the completion of his/her
training, the student is required to inform Western Tech
in writing. Notification must be delivered to the
college director prior to withdrawing.
Upon withdrawing or being dropped from a
program, any scholarship(s) or exemption credit(s) for
courses not taken, may be charged back to the
student. Any credits to the students’ account will
follow the Return to Title IV policy, located in the
Student Financial Services section and any unused VA
benefits will be returned to the VA. The students will
be charged a restocking fee for programs that issue
tools, and any other administrative fees attached to the
drop process.
Readmittance
Students who have dropped from the college or have
been terminated for violation of the College policies and
standards, attendance or academic issues may request
consideration for re-admittance by writing a letter to the
Campus Director specifically explaining the following:
1. What variables prevented them from
maintaining satisfactory attendance, academic
requirements or adhering to the Western Tech
policies and standards.
2. What has been done to correct the issue(s).
3. What can the college expect from the
individual if allowed to return.
Students that are dropped for attendance or
academics, and have earned an “F” for the course, may
be allowed to retake the course at no cost to them. If the
student fails the course again, the student will be
required to pay for the course at a 50% reduced cost.
Students will only be allowed to restart once in
the same program. The student must also be able to
demonstrate that he/she has the financial resources to
complete the program.
NOTE: If a program changes from the time the student
dropped to the time he/she re-enters, the student will be
required to retake all courses that have revised
objectives, regardless of the course code.
STUDENT ACADEMIC PROGRESS (SAP) Attendance Symbols Used by Faculty
Below is a list of symbols used by the College to
document attendance for students. Attendance is
recorded by the instructor and posted on a daily basis. P – Present
A – Absent
P Number of Hours Present
Example: P3 = Student was present for 3 hours.
W – Withdrawn
LOA – Leave of Absence
LDA – Last Day of Attendance
I – Incomplete
M – Make Up
S – Class Audit (Sit-In)
Western Tech Catalog | 166
Academic Grading Scale
Numeric Scale Letter
98 – 100 4.0 A+
94 – 97.9 4.0 A
90 – 93.9 4.0 A-
88 – 89.9 3.75 B+
84 – 87.9 3.5 B
80 – 83.9 3.0 B-
78 – 79.9 2.75 C+
74 – 77.9 2.5 C
70 – 73.9 2.0 C-
68 – 69.9 1.75 D+
64 – 67.9 1.5 D
60 – 63.9 1.0 D-
BELOW 60 0.0 F
Satisfactory Progress
Upon completion of each course, all students will be
able to access their progress report through the student
portal. Students must achieve and maintain a
CUMULATIVE grade point average (GPA) of 2.0 in all
courses, and all course work must be satisfactorily
completed to be eligible for graduation.
Unsatisfactory Progress
If a student’s GPA falls below 2.0 at the end of the
first course, the student may be dropped from the
program for not meeting the GPA requirements. If a
student’s GPA falls below a 2.0 at the end of any course
after the first, the student will be placed on academic
probation for the following term. If a student fails to
achieve the required GPA of 2.0 while on probation, it
may be extended for a second course during which the
student’s CUMULATIVE GPA must be a 2.0 or higher.
A student failing to achieve the required GPA during
this time will be terminated.
Students on academic probation are given written
notification that if the unsatisfactory progress
continues, it will result in their termination from the
College.
A student whose enrollment was terminated for
unsatisfactory progress may be re-entered after a
minimum of one (1) grading period. A student who
returns after the enrollment was terminated for
unsatisfactory progress shall be placed on academic
probation for the next grading period.
Students who miss their final for the course are
required to prove (or demonstrate) that an emergency
occurred preventing them from being present at the
exam, otherwise students will receive a ZERO.
Students who miss an exam for a death in the family,
jury duty or while on an authorized leave of absence
(LOA) will be allowed to take a make-up exam for full
credit.
Students receiving an “F” grade must repeat the
failed course in order to receive credit. It is at the
discretion of the Program Director to allow the student
to continue until the course becomes available.
Students who are required to repeat a failed course
will not be charged for their first retake within their
program of study. If a student is required to repeat any
additional course(s) beyond the first retake, the student
will be charged 50% of the cost of tuition for that
course.
No make-up work will be allowed on missed or
failed “pop quizzes” or open book tests.
The student will be required to demonstrate an entry-
level degree of proficiency in each competency which
has been warranted during the course it is taught. An
inability to achieve the required level of competency in
the warranted skills will prevent the student from being
able to advance into the next course or graduate.
Refer to the Physical Therapy Assistant and
Massage Therapy program pages for more information
on their specific academic policies.
STUDENT CODE OF CONDUCT Any violation of Western Tech policies & standards,
including safety violations, abusive language, drinking
or illegal use of drugs (on or off campus) may result in
suspension or termination. Improper conduct off
campus may also result in suspension or termination.
Students are required to follow college policies and
standards while attending Western Tech. It is the
student’s responsibility to conduct them-selves in a
proper and respectable manner while attending the
College.
Any student who fails to comply with the conduct
standards and policies as published on the Western Tech
website, (www.westerntech.edu), may be subject to
verbal or written reprimand, probation, suspension, or
termination from Western Tech depending on the nature
and severity of the violation. Re-admittance following
such termination is at the discretion of the College and
relative to the nature and severity of the conduct
violation. Students should immediately report any
conduct violations to their instructor or other school
official.
A detailed list of infractions against WTC’s conduct
policies can be located in the student handbook and on
WTC’s website, www.westerntech.edu.
Suspension
A student may be suspended due to a violation of
any Western Tech policies or standards. All
suspensions are determined by the campus director,
instructor, and program director. There is a maximum
time frame of three (3) days per suspension.
SUPPORT SERVICES Student Services
The purpose of the Student Services is to provide
assistance to students that may be experiencing difficult
life situations while enrolled at Western Tech.
Available resources to students include:
• Federal Work Study Job Opportunities
• Transportation
• Off Campus Housing Information
• Local Health Clinics
Student Services partners with individual
organizations, agencies and companies throughout the
region to provide employment opportunities,
community resources and volunteer activities that will
assist students in their educational process.
Learning Resource Center
The Learning Resource Center (LRC) is available to
both current students and graduates of Western Tech.
The LRC provides instruction, services and materials to
help enhance academic growth and personal enrichment
to help support the college’s mission. The center
Western Tech Catalog | 167
provides a range of services for faculty as well as for
students and alumni including but not limited to the
following:
• Book borrowing and searching
capabilities
• Online catalog
• Online databases
The LRC hours of operation are found in the student
handbook, posted in the library, and on WTC’s
website (www.westerntech.edu).
Tutoring
Tutoring services are offered for students
experiencing difficulty with their studies or wanting
additional academic assistance. Students on academic
probation should attend tutoring sessions. This tutoring
is offered as a free service for the benefit of students.
Advising
Academic, attendance, career, professional
development, and continuing education advising is
provided by faculty, program directors, registrars, dean
of general education, applied general education
coordinator, and campus directors.
Advising services are provided on an individual or
small group basis to help students deal with concerns or
problems so that he/she may maximize his/her college
experience.
Western Tech does not offer counseling services.
However, a resource directory is available for students
seeking professional counseling, health, financial, legal,
and other services. Copies of the directory are located
throughout the campus and are available upon request.
Testing Center
Western Tech offers testing facilities for our
students and the community alike. We are authorized to
provide certification and professional licensure
examinations through GED and Pearson Vue testing
partners. Main hours of operation are from 8:00 am until
5:00 pm, Monday through Thursday, and 8:00 am
through 12:30 pm on Fridays. For more information,
please contact a test administrator at 1-800-225-5984.
STUDENT COMPLAINT/GRIEVANCE
PROCEDURE If a student feels that he or she has an issue or
grievance which needs to be addressed, the student must
first take the issue to an instructor, program director.
If the complaint cannot be adequately resolved there,
the student must then address it, in writing, to the
Campus Director and if not resolved at that level then
the complaint should then be addressed to the CEO.
Schools accredited by the Accrediting Commission
of Career Schools and Colleges must have a procedure
and operational plan for handling student complaints. If
a student does not feel that the College has adequately
addressed a complaint or concern, the student may
consider contacting the Accrediting Commission. All
complaints considered by the Commission must be in
written form, with permission from the complainant(s)
for the Commission to forward a copy of the complaint
to the school for a response. The complainant(s) will be
kept informed as to the status of the complaint as well
as the final resolution by the Commission.
Please direct all inquiries to:
Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and
Colleges
2101 Wilson Blvd., Suite 302
Arlington, VA 22201
(703)247-4212
www.accsc.org
A copy of the Commission Complaint form is
available at the College and may be obtained by
contacting the registrar or campus director.
The following is the TWC Complaint Procedure:
Dear Students:
This school has a Certificate of Approval from the
Texas Workforce Commission (TWC).
The TWC-assigned school number is: S0117 (Diana)
and S0118 (Plaza).
The school’s programs are approved by the following
entities: TWC, Career Colleges & Schools of
Texas, Texas Higher Education Coordinating Board,
and the Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and
Colleges. For school S0017 (Diana), the Texas
Department of State Health Services approves Massage
Therapy Program, and the Commission on
Accreditation in Physical Therapy Education approves
the Physical Therapist Assistant Program.
Students must address their concerns about this school
or any of its educational programs by following the
grievance process outlined in the school’s catalog.
Schools are responsible for ensuring and documenting
that all students have received a copy of the school’s
grievance procedures and for describing these
procedures in the school’s published catalog. If, as a
student, you were not provided with this information,
please inform school management.
Students dissatisfied with this school’s response to their
complaint or who are not able to file a complaint with
the school, can file a formal complaint with TWC, as
well as with other relevant agencies or accreditors, if
applicable.
Information on filing a complaint with TWC can be
found on TWC’s Career Schools and Colleges Website
at http://csc.twc.state.tx.us/.
If a student does not feel that the College has adequately
addressed a grievance or concern, students may contact
the state licensing in writing at:
The Texas Workforce Commission,
Career Schools and Colleges Section,
101 East 15th St., Austin, TX 78778-0001
Contact information for filling student complaints
with the Texas Higher Education Coordinating
Board including:
How to submit a Student Complaint: After
exhausting the institution's grievance/complaint
process, current, former, and prospective students may
Western Tech Catalog | 168
initiate a complaint with THECB by sending the
required forms either by electronic mail to
StudentComplaints@thecb.state.tx.us, or by mail to
the Texas Higher Education Coordinating Board, Office
of General Counsel, P.O. Box 12788, Austin, Texas
78711-2788. Facsimile transmissions of the forms are
not accepted.
The web address for the Texas Higher Education
Coordinating Board’s Student Complaints page with
forms and a description of the complaint procedure:
http://www.thecb.state.tx.us/index.cfm?objectid=051F
93F5-03D4-9CCE-40FA9F46F2CD3C9D
The web address for the rules governing student
complaints – Title 19 of the Texas Administrative Code,
Sections 1.110-1.120:
http://info.sos.state.tx.us/pls/pub/readtac$ext.ViewTA
C?tac_view=5&ti=19&pt=1&ch=1&sch=E&rl=Y
Massage Therapy: Contacting the Texas
Department of State Health Services
Standard Western Tech protocol will be followed in
regard to the grievance policy however, with some
variations that are specific to the Massage Therapy
program. Those variations can be found in the
individual program section of this catalog and on the
Western Tech website, www.westerntech.edu.
Physical Therapist Assistant
Standard Western Tech protocol will be followed in
regard to the grievance policy however, with some
variations that are specific to the Physical Therapist
Assistant program. Those variations can be found in the
individual program section of this catalog and on the
Western Tech website, www.westerntech.edu.
Appeals
A student has the right to appeal depending on the
nature and severity of the situation, as noted in the
Student Handbook Code of Conduct. The student will
be required to do the following:
1. Submit a letter to the attention of the
Campus Director, detailing the issues that
surrounded the dismissal.
2. Request an appeal of the decision
rendered, with reasons stating why WTC
should reconsider
3. The letter can be mailed or presented in
person, and MUST be signed by the
student. Letters sent by email WILL
NOT be accepted.
4. Letters must be sent within 10 days from
the day of dismissal in order to be
considered.
Upon the Campus Director receiving the letter, the
student will be notified within 48 hours by the Campus
Director who will determine if the violation merits
further action or not.
In most cases, a panel will be assembled.
NOTE: If student is allowed back in school, the student
may or may not end up in the same classroom, and may
have to consider a different schedule, or a different start
date for the following class. This decision is at the
discretion of the Program Director and Campus
Director.
INTERNSHIP/CLINICAL
REQUIREMENTS Students must complete all program requirements
before going on internship; to include obtaining
required certifications, competency testing, and term
papers due. Failure to fulfill this requirement will result
in a delayed internship start until the requirement is met.
Internships provide students the opportunity to apply
their knowledge and skills learned in school at an actual
employer job site prior to graduation. They will
improve their new skills by working alongside
experienced professionals in the field. During
internship students must attend the same work schedule
and hours as regular employees at their intern site.
During their internship, students may be required to
work up to eight (8) hours per day and will need to
adjust their schedules accordingly. Any exceptions
must be approved by the internship coordinator.
Each student will be placed into an approved
business location relative to his/her field of study.
Normally, internships are unpaid.
The internship coordinator will supervise each
student’s progress. Supervision will consist of
reviewing student evaluations provided by the sponsor
site and regular intern site visits. The intern site
manager or supervisor will complete weekly student
evaluations. During this review, any deficiencies
indicated will be addressed with the student. The
student will work with the internship program
coordinator to establish an individual study program
designed to address and correct the areas that may need
improvement.
Clinical and internship sites may require drug testing
and or background checks prior to the student's
scheduled internship/clinical experience. The cost(s) of
testing is the responsibility of the student, and the
student will be required to make payments in full
directly to the college. Drug screens are $30.00, and
background checks are $32.75.
In the event a student tests positive for illegal drugs,
the student will be automatically suspended from
his/her program of study for a period of no less than
thirty (30) days. At the completion of thirty (30) days,
the student will be required to re-take a drug test at their
cost. If the drug screen returns negative, the intern
coordinator or Academic Coordinator of Clinical
Education (ACCE) will be allowed to work with the
student to place them at a site. If it returns positive, the
student will be dropped from the program. Students will
be provided with a resource directory and Western Tech
will advise the student to seek counseling. If the
student chooses to go through drug counseling, the
student may re-apply for their respective program thirty
(30) days after termination, given the student can
provide proof of having successfully completed drug
counseling.
Students from all disciplines are encouraged to be
truthful and honest about their backgrounds. In the
event the background check reveals any misdemeanor
Western Tech Catalog | 169
or felony convictions in which the student did not make
Western Tech aware of before the check was
administered, Western Tech reserves the right to take
action against the student, to include, but not limited to
suspension or termination from the program. This
depends upon the severity of the infraction, and will be
determined by the program director, academic dean,
and campus director.
The student must successfully complete the
internship program before he/she will be allowed to
graduate.
Internship Dress Code
The Employer /Internship sites may have dress
code policies which students are required to abide by.
Failure to comply may result in termination of student
internship opportunity, which may affect the student’s
status in his/her educational program. Students may be
required to remove any piercings, adjust attire/uniform
or cover tattoos/body art to start and complete their
internship.
Note: While every effort will be made to schedule
internship experiences for students in the evening
program to coincide with their school schedule, most
companies in the business field operate during regular
business hours, which is 8:00 a.m. to 5:00
p.m. Therefore, evening students need to be prepared
to attend their internship during morning, afternoon,
and/or weekends hours in order to successfully
complete this program requirement.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Program Changes
Any changes to a student’s program must be made
through the registrar at each campus. Changes affecting
the length or attendance schedule of a student’s program
may have a significant effect on the student’s financial
arrangements with Western Tech. All program changes
are subject to review by the campus director, financial
services, student accounts, and program director.
In addition, any student who requests a transfer to a
different schedule must receive prior approval from the
program director and all changes must be processed
through the registrar of that campus. Students are
allowed to transfer to a different schedule twice during
the length of their program
Curricula Revisions
The College reserves the right to vary the sequence
of courses and revise and/or update curriculum content,
textbooks and tool sets as needed, with or without
notification.
Grade Levels
Students attending Western Tech should consider
themselves as having advanced beyond post-secondary
freshman grade level upon successful completion of a
minimum of twenty-four (24) semester hours and thirty
(30) weeks of training. Each additional twenty-four
(24) semester hours and thirty (30) weeks of successful
training represent advancement beyond the next grade
level.
Semester Credit Units (TWC & THECB)
A semester credit unit (SCU) earned is defined as the
successful completion of fifteen (15) clock hours of
theory instruction, thirty (30) clock hours of laboratory
instruction, or forty-five (45) clock hours of internship.
Each clock hour is at least fifty (50) minutes in length.
At least one hour of study time is recommended for each
hour of lecture.
All conversions for Semester Credit Units are
defined by state regulators; namely Texas Workforce
Commission (TWC) and Texas Higher Education
Coordinating Board (THECB).
Semester Credit Hours (ACCSC)
Semester Credit Hours are defined by Western
Tech’s Accreditor, the Accrediting Commission of
Career Schools and Colleges (ACCSC), and are
approved by the US Department of Education. ACCSC
approved SCHs are used Title IV Financial Aid
disbursement.
Credit units and credit hours are discussed in detail
in the College catalog. We use multiple sources to
ensure that that the assignment of credit hours
conforms to commonly accepted practice in higher
education. We use the state’s inventory of courses, the
Higher Education Coordinating Board's Workforce
Education Course Manual that provides guidance for
technical courses throughout the state for our AAS
degree programs and the Academic Course Guide
Manual as a guide for our general education courses.
These manuals provide to both public and private
institutions accepted thresholds on course length,
content, and objectives that are used statewide. We
also rely heavily on input from our Program Advisory
Committees, who twice a year influence the direction
of our offerings by recommending deletions and
additions to our program listings. Finally, we rely on
employers who hire our graduates. These employers
keep us most current because they describe the
immediate needs of the workplace.
Physical Therapist Assistant Specific Requirements
Standard Western Tech protocol will be followed in
regard to earning semester credit hours however, with
some variations that are specific to the Physical
Therapist Assistant program. Those variations can be
found in the Physical Therapist Assistant program
section of this catalog and on the Western Tech website,
www.westerntech.edu.
Program Advisory Committee (PAC)
Every program taught at Western Tech has a
Program Advisory Committee (PAC). The members of
the Committee are employers who hire Western Tech
graduates and who are leaders in their technical fields.
All Programs Advisory Committees meet twice a year.
The Advisory Committees are designed to help keep
Western Tech curricula up-to-date with ever-changing
procedures and equipment improvements in the
technical industry. By keeping in touch with and
seeking the advice of those companies that employ
Western Tech graduates, the college is able to better
train its students to successfully compete in today’s
global economy.
Western Tech Catalog | 170
Dress Code
All students at Western Technical College are
required to wear specific uniforms each day. Variations
of the dress code may occur for your program under the
direction of your program director and/or instructors.
The Western Tech student dress code is as follows:
a. All students must wear their student
issued uniforms or scrubs while they are
attending school.
b. All students must wear closed toe shoes
with socks. All welding students must
wear leather boots.
c. Where applicable, personal protective
equipment must be worn as directed by
each department.
d. Shorts, tank tops, sweat pants or other
clothing or headwear considered
inappropriate by the school, may not be
worn at school.
e. Excessively long hair and beards may
create a safety hazard and must be tied or
braided during shop/laboratory.
f. Sunglasses are not to be worn anywhere
inside the building.
NOTE: Program Directors and Instructors have
the authority not to allow baseball caps or other
headgear to be worn in the classroom, shop areas
or lab areas.
Books & Tools Buy-Back Policy
Western Tech will, on a case-by-case basis, consider
a buy-back of books, supplies, and tools that are, in the
College’s sole discretion, in a good condition such that
they could be re-issued. The student’s program director
will take an inventory of all tools and supplies,
determine their condition, and either approve or deny
the buy-back.
Due to the used nature of the books, tools, and
supplies; all buy-backs will be at a reduced price of the
original cost to the student and carry an associated
restocking fee and administration fee.
Buy-backs are not a cash transaction. When a buy-
back is approved, the associated amount will be credited
to the student’s ledger to offset a balance due.
Western Tech does not guarantee the buy-back of
any item.
Official Communication Policy
Any official correspondence from Western Tech to
students will be made:
• In Writing: at the permanent postal
mailing address, or via personal delivery
within the school premises; and/or
• Via Email: at the Western Tech email
address provided to all students.
Students are responsible for reading and responding
appropriately to any official correspondence upon
receipt from Western Tech staff or faculty.
Change in Scheduled Operations
A change in scheduled operations including
weather-related closing announcements, class
cancelations, early dismissal, emergency evacuation,
etc. will be made:
• Through the Western Tech text message
alert system;
• On-site at both campuses via signage;
• Via the Western Tech email address
provided to students, instructors and staff;
• www.westerntech.edu – Western Tech
homepage; and/or via local broadcast
media.
Class Size
The number of students per class or per instructor
varies depending on the course of study. Generally,
lecture class limits the maximum number of students to
30 per instructor. The maximum ratio for lab/shop
instruction is set at 20 students per instructor.
For students enrolled in the Massage Therapy
program, no more than 3 students can work from 1 table
during lab time.
Class size for Massage Therapy: A maximum of 24
students per class.
Class size for Physical Therapist Assistant: A
maximum of 24 students per class and a maximum of
12:1 student instructor ratio for laboratory.
Comparable Program Information
Students who desire to compare program
information related to tuition and program length may
do so by writing or calling the following agencies:
Texas Workforce Commission
Proprietary Schools Section
101 East 15th Street
Austin, Texas 78778-0001
The Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and
Colleges
2101 Wilson Blvd., Suite 302
Arlington, VA 22201
Telephone: (703) 247-4212
Western Tech Catalog | 171
FAMILY EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS AND PRIVACY ACT (FERPA)
The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA), of 1974, is a federal law that pertains to the release of
and access to student educational records. FERPA rights apply to students and guardians of a dependent minor
student; a student is a person who is, or has been, in attendance at the College, regardless of the person’s age. Under
FERPA, a student has a right to:
• Inspect and review his or her educational records
• Request to amend his or her educational records
• Have some control over the disclosure of information from his or her educational records
The directory information made available by the School is:
• Name (maiden, other, preferred, primary)
• Address (all known)
• Telephone (all known)
• Date of Birth
• Birth Location
• Course
• Dates of Attendance
• Degrees & Awards Received
• Most Recent Previous Educational Institution Attended
The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act also authorizes disclosure of this information without the
student’s consent under certain circumstances. Directory information will be provided to the public upon request
unless the student files a request with the College asking to be excluded from the directory or from any other requests
for open directory information from outside entities. A student may update access to their information by contacting
a school employee and filing a request to be excluded from the directory or from any other requests for open directory
information.
According to FERPA, some non-directory student records may not be released without prior written consent from
the student. A record is any information recorded in any way, including but not limited to handwriting, print, tape,
film, microfilm, microfiche, and digital image. Educational records are all records that contain information that is
directly related to a student and that are maintained by an educational agency or institution or by a party acting on
its behalf. Educational records do not include the following:
• Sole possession records (those records kept in the sole possession of the maker which are used only as
a personal memory aid and are not accessible or reviewed by any other person except a temporary
substitute for the maker of the record
• Medical or psychological treatment records that include but are not limited to records maintained by
physicians, psychiatrists, and psychologists
• Employment records, provided that employment is not contingent upon being a student
• Law enforcement records
The College will disclose information from a student’s education record without the written consent of the student
to staff members who require access to educational records in order to perform their legitimate educational duties;
officials of other schools in which the student seeks or intends to enroll; and in connection with a student’s application
for, or receipt of, financial aid; and state, federal, and accrediting agencies as required.
Under FERPA, students have a right to see, inspect and request changes to their educational records. Upon
request, the College shall provide a student access to his or her educational records except for financial records of
the student’s parents or guardian; and confidential letters of recommendation where the student has signed a waiver
of right of access. Educational records covered by FERPA normally will be made available within ten (10) days of
the request. All records are to be reviewed by students in the presence of a staff member. The contents of a student’s
educational records may be challenged by the student on the grounds that they are inaccurate, misleading, or
otherwise in violation of the privacy rights of the student by submitting a written statement to the school.
It is the policy of the College that it will maintain the FERPA disclosure code in effect at the time of a student’s
last term of enrollment for former students. Furthermore, the College will honor a request from a former student, not
re-enrolled, to add or delete a non-disclosure request.
Rights under FERPA cease upon death. However, it is the policy of the College that no records of deceased
students be released for a period of five (5) years after the date of the student’s death, unless specifically authorized
by the executor of the deceased’s estate or by next of kin.
If students believe that their FERPA rights have been violated, they may contact the Family Policy Compliance
Office at the Department of Education, 400 Maryland Ave. SW, Washington DC 2002-4605. Additional information
is available at www.ed.gov/policy/gen/guid/fpco/
Parents Rights under FERPA
At the post-secondary level, parents have no inherent right to access or inspect their son’s or daughter’s
educational records, including final grades, grades on exams, and other information about academic progress. This
information is protected under FERPA and parents do not have access to it unless the student has provided express,
written authorization, or unless the student is a dependent as defined in Section 152 of the Internal Revenue code of
1954.
Western Tech Catalog | 172
Students can give express written permission of access to their educational record by completing the FERPA
Release Form and remitting it to the school.
In emergency or crisis situations, the school may release non-directory information if the institution determines
that the information is necessary to protect the health or safety of the student or other individuals.
General Policy
Under the authority of the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as amended, students have the
right to examine certain files, records, or documents maintained by the school, which pertain to them. The College
will permit students to examine such records within forty-five (45) days after submission of a written request, and to
obtain copies of such records upon payment of a reproduction fee.
Students may request that the College amend their education records on the grounds that they are inaccurate,
misleading, or in violation of their right to privacy. In the event that the College refuses to so amend the records,
students may request a hearing. If the outcome of a hearing is unsatisfactory, the student may submit an explanatory
statement for inclusion in the education record.
Students have the right to file complaints with the U.S. Department of Education concerning the school’s alleged
failure to comply with the Act.
Education Records
Education records are files, records, or documents maintained by the school, which contain information directly
related to the students. Examples of education records are student education files, placement files, and financial aid
files. The only persons permitted access to such records are those who have legitimate administrative or educational
interest.
Exemptions
The following items are exempt from the Act:
a) Parents’ Confidential Statements and the Financial Need Analysis Report.
b) Confidential letters of recommendation received by the school prior to January 1, 1975. The Act
permits students to waive their right of access to letters received after 1974 if the letters are related
to admissions, employment, or honors.
c) Records about students made by teachers or administrators which are maintained by and accessible
only to teachers or administrators.
d) School security records.
e) Employment records for school employees who are also current or former students.
f) Records compiled or maintained by a physician, psychiatrist, psychologist, or other recognized
professional or paraprofessional acting or assisting in such capacities, for treatment purposes, which
are available only to persons providing the treatment.
Review of Records
The College monitors educational records to insure that they do not contain information that is inaccurate,
misleading, or otherwise inappropriate. Western Tech may destroy records that are no longer useful or pertinent to
the students’ circumstance.
Western Tech Catalog | 173
Western Tech is proud of the success of our graduates in their
field of study. Listed below are a few words of achievements.
“I am satisfied that I made the right choice, and that choice
was Western Tech. Everyone in the school cares about all the
students so much that you don’t have a choice but to be
successful in your future endeavors once you graduate. All you
need is for one person to care about you, here, the whole
Western Tech team cares.”
Jose Coffie, Intel, Manufacturing Technician
Community College Ambassador
“Western Tech offered me very good training in all the skills I needed to work in the medical field. It was a fast
transition from graduation to working. Thanks goes to the help of Career Services.”
Sara Angelica Terrazas, Southwest Urgent Care Center, Medical Assistant
“My Training/Education at Western Tech was the best thing that ever happened to me .Western Tech gave me the
confidence that never in my mind, I thought I would have. With the help from the Instructors, I would not be as
successful. I am glad to be part of the Western Tech FAMILY; I wouldn’t change it for anything.”
Ruben Bernal, Plant Operations Director
East El Paso Physicians Medical Center, LLC
“Western Tech was a great experience and I learned a lot from my instructors. Internship also provided real world,
hands-on training that I enjoyed. Western Tech opened up an opportunity where I am now employed.”
Christopher Oliva, Welder
Rig Works, Inc.
“The training I received at Western Tech fully prepared me to embrace a career in the Massage Therapy field and
open my own successful business.”
Gregory Keith Roseman, LMT, AMTA
Massage Therapy
Southwest Wellness Clinic
“Western Tech provided me with the right skills and techniques to satisfy my clients in my workplace.”
Stephanie Ruiz, Massage Therapist
Grace Therapeutic Massage
“I strongly believe Western Tech provided me all of the resources needed to obtain employment in my field of study.
The experience and knowledge of each instructor brings positive and all around training to the students. The sky is
the limit. I am successfully employed in the automotive industry”.
Danny Montes, Technician
Audi of El Paso
Western Tech Catalog | 174
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS AND
SERVICES In order to graduate from Western Tech, all students
must obtain a minimum of 2.0 cumulative GPA, meet
attendance and other college requirements, and pass all
required courses, including undergoing a mock
interview with an actual employer and submit an
updated resume to Career Services.
Students seeking an Associate of Occupational
Studies Degree, Associate of Applied Science Degree,
or a Bachelor’s Degree must earn at least fifty percent
(50%) of the semester credit units of the degree program
at Western Tech.
The college reserves the right to withhold official
transcripts to a student until all financial obligations to
the college have been fulfilled or satisfactory
arrangements have been made. They must also attend
and complete a financial aid exit interview.
The student will be required to demonstrate an entry-
level degree of proficiency in each competency,
outlined in each course throughout the programs. An
inability to achieve the required level of competency
will prevent the student from being able to graduate
from Western Tech.
In addition, all graduating students must attend a
graduation clearance and complete a final clearance
sheet before graduating. Students who fail to attend the
graduation clearance must reschedule the clearance
with the Registrar(s) in order to be processed for
graduation. Students will be allowed to pick up their
degree/certificate of completion within approximately 4
weeks after their final completion date from the
Registrar.
Automotive Technology, Light Duty Diesel,
Performance Tuning and Diesel Mechanics:
Students graduating from these programs are
required to achieve at a minimum one (1) ASE
certification in the following subjects: Automotive and
Performance Tuner students must pass the ASE G1
exam; Light Duty Diesel students must pass the ASE
A9 exam; and Diesel Mechanics students must pass the
ASE T8 exam prior to their scheduled graduation dates.
Refrigeration & HVAC Technology:
Students graduating from this program are required
to achieve the EPA 608 certification (minimum TYPE
II certification) prior to their scheduled graduation
dates.
Advanced Welding Technology:
The Advanced Welding program requires that all
“Structural” certification tests be passed as a
prerequisite for the “Pipe” welding portion of the
program. WTC Welding certifications will only be
awarded upon completion of the program in its entirety.
Medical/Clinical Assistant with X-Ray Technology
and Medical Billing & Coding:
Students graduating from these programs are
required to achieve one (1) relative industry
certification of their choice prior to the completion of
the scheduled graduation date.
Information Systems and Security:
Students graduating from these programs are
required to achieve two (2) relative industry
certifications of their choice prior to the completion of
the scheduled graduation date.
Electronics Engineering Technology:
Students graduating from these programs are
required to achieve two (2) relative industry
certifications of their choice prior to the completion of
the scheduled graduation date.
GRADUATION CEREMONIES Western Tech graduation ceremonies represent the
culmination of a student’s academic achievement. It is
a time of celebration and reflection for students,
families, friends, faculty and staff.
In addition to celebrating each student’s
accomplishments, graduates with exemplary academics
and/or attendance are recognized during the ceremony.
Graduates who achieved a CGPA of 4.0 are provided a
gold cord; graduates with an overall program
attendance of 98% or above are provided a red cord.
Graduates meeting both criteria will be provided both a
gold and red cord to wear throughout the
commencement ceremony.
Western Tech commencement ceremonies are held
twice a year, once in the summer and again during the
winter and are conducted in the Don Haskins center
located at the University of Texas at El Paso. All family
members and friends are invited and welcome to attend
to help celebrate the achievements of the graduates.
In order to ensure that all graduates are prepared and
have all necessary requirements completed prior to
graduation, each student will receive a graduation
packet one (1) month prior to the commencement
ceremonies.
In this packet, students will receive:
• A congratulatory letter detailing the events
for the day of graduation (time, date)
• Graduation photography information
• Do’s and Don’ts of graduation
• Directions to and map of the venue
The commencement ceremony is a special
celebration and at this time your degree/certification
will be officially conferred upon you.
CERTIFICATES / DIPLOMAS Certificate
A certificate indicates satisfactory completion of a
Diploma Program covering the fundamentals of a
particular subject(s).
Associate of Occupational Studies Degree/ Associate
of Applied Science Degree
A diploma indicates the satisfactory completion of
a comprehensive study of a particular subject(s). This
Western Tech Catalog | 175
degree is of limited transferability since it is not
designed as being automatically transferable to a
college or university. Its outcome is, as it says,
“Occupational” or “Applied,” and is designed to
prepare a person for entry-level employment in a
particular occupation. It may also be an appropriate
qualification for future advancement or promotion
within a company.
Bachelor Degree
The bachelor degree is an undergraduate academic
degree awarded upon completion of the program of
study and is designed to be completed in 30 months (2.5
years) for students attending full-time. This degree is
designed to develop students’ skills in management and
may also lead to future advancement or promotion
within a company.
CONTINUING EDUCATION Articulation Agreements
For graduates wishing to continue their education elsewhere, Western Tech has structured articulation agreements
with the University of Phoenix, Western Governors and Grand Canyon University. For further information,
graduates should contact these institutions for particulars regarding course exemptions and credits.
For Students/Graduates Who Want to Transfer Their Western Tech Credits to Another Institution
Other than specific colleges/universities that have formal articulation agreements with Western Tech, it is unlikely
that credits earned at Western Tech will transfer to another postsecondary institution. It is the student’s responsibility
to confirm whether or not credits from Western Tech are accepted by another college. Western Tech does not imply,
promise, or guarantee transferability of its credits to any other institution. In the United States Higher Education
system, transferability of credit is always determined by the receiving institution, taking into account such factors as
course content, grades, accreditation and licensing.
Refresher Training
In order to stay current with ever-changing technological developments in their industry, graduates may return to
Western Tech and retake any courses of the program from which they graduated according to the following
conditions:
1. Refresher training will be allowed on a “space available” basis only and requires the approval of both
the program director and campus director.
2. Graduates may repeat up to three courses in the same program from which they graduated at no tuition
charge. Any additional courses may be taken at a charge of 25% of the current tuition rate.
3. To take a new course in the same program from which they graduated, the graduate will pay 50% of
the current tuition rate.
4. Graduates must pay the current cost of any and all books, tools, supplies, lab fees, certification test
fees, student insurance fee, or any other fees or charges associated with the course or program they are
refreshing.
5. Graduates must be in satisfactory standing with Western Tech. For the purposes of this policy,
satisfactory standing is defined as a graduate:
a. Is current in all their financial obligations to Western Tech and any student loans.
b. Has NOT been discharged from a job due to misconduct such as stealing, sexual harassment,
substance abuse, etc.
c. Has NOT failed nor refused to take an employment related physical due to illegal drug use.
d. Did not have any instances of misconduct, suspension, or other significant issues while they
were a student at Western Tech.
6. Graduates will be given a transcript indicating a grade for the refresher training completed.
7. Graduates taking refresher training must comply with all Western Tech policies and regulations.
Note: WTC is not required to provide refresher training. As a result, WTC exercises the right in using
discretionary measures to determine who is eligible for updates. Specifically, WTC will not allow graduates
to return for update training if there is a conflict of interest, i.e. graduate is working for a competitor school.
Western Tech Catalog | 176
CAREER SERVICES
GRADUATE EMPLOYMENT ASSISTANCE Western Tech places great importance in assisting graduates starting their careers! The Career Services team at
WTC, together with faculty, Program Directors, and Internship Coordinators, work closely to place students (soon
to be graduates) and graduates alike, into career related jobs. Employment assistance services are provided to students
from the time they enter school up until the time they graduate, and thereafter (provided they are in good standing*).
Students receive the training and skills needed to conduct their own employment opportunity research, résumé
writing, interview skills, and networking skills. The success of our graduates is the success of the school!
Students will be required to undergo a mock interview with an employer in their field of study before going to
internship or clinicals (depending on the program). The mock interview may be recorded and then critiqued with
the student. In addition, The Career Services staff offers workshops for students to provide valuable training in
successful interviewing techniques, tips on completing successful online applications, writing effective cover
letters and thank you letters.
Western Tech works diligently to assist new and previous graduates to obtain employment in their field of study.
We wish to make it clear however, that due to the vastly different personalities, characteristics, and backgrounds of
each individual graduate, the college does not guarantee employment. The college does accept the responsibility of
making every reasonable effort to assist each graduate in finding employment in his/her field. Graduates may need
to consider relocating to areas where the greatest career opportunities exist. Graduate employment results are greatly
influenced by student’s attendance, overall attitude, academic performance, driving record and background.
(*good standing requires that the graduate has not been fired due to misconduct, failing or refusing a drug screen,
or defaulting on his student loans)
EMPLOYER EXPECTATIONS
Western Tech strives to ensure that every graduate is
given every opportunity to interview and secure a job in
his/her field of study. Education on what employers
expect is crucial to becoming gainfully employed in
your field of study. Requirements vary from business to
business, and many will require one or more of the
items listed below:
1. Clean Driving Record: Some organizations
have multiple locations, and may require the
employee to use his/her own vehicle to travel
between the different locations, or may require
the employee to travel to a customer site (i.e.
service tech). For all transportation programs for
example, there are companies that require their
employees to drive company vehicles, pick-up
and drop off customers. For these scenarios, a
clean driving record becomes a hiring
requirement in order to be insurable by the
employer’s insurance carrier. Furthermore, the
hiring requirement is a means to maintain the
position.
2. A Current Driver’s License: Failure to produce
a current driver’s license at the time of interview
may prevent the graduate from getting hired.
Without a license, how will the graduate get to
work? An employer has the right to ask.
3. A Criminal Background Check: Most
Background checks not only reveal
misdemeanors and/or felonies in one’s
background, but also any pending arrests. The
criminal check can go as far back as the employer
wants to go. Failure to report any criminal
conviction may result in being disqualified for
hire, or terminated from employment if the
information surfaces after hire.
4. Drug Testing: More than 90% of employers in
the US drug test new hires before making a bona-
fide offer of employment, contingent upon the
results of the background check and drug testing.
The most common is urinalysis testing, but
follicle testing is much more accurate and is
becoming much more affordable to employers.
Drug and/or alcohol use, impairs memory,
alertness and achievement. Their use erodes the
capacity to perform, think and act responsibly.
5. Credit Checks: Businesses of all types and sizes
are turning to credit checks in an effort to help
determine an applicant’s integrity and ability to
handle money. In the cyber world we live in,
employers are required to be more diligent in
protecting their customers personal information
from theft. All employees that handle
government contracts or the government entities
themselves, (i.e. FBI, CIA, Border Patrol, etc.),
will require government security clearances. In
order to qualify for a government security
clearance, the applicant will need to have a good
credit rating score. Applicants that have claimed
bankruptcy or have had to undergo credit
counseling will find that this may prevent them
from being considered for employment.
Applicants that possess a poor credit score rating
are considered “high-risk” and may not be trusted
to handle and maintain security information.
GRADUATE EMPLOYMENT SEVERANCE
Employment assistance is an ongoing service
available to all graduates in satisfactory standing. To
protect the college’s reputation as well as the
employment opportunities of future graduates, a
graduate is considered to be in unsatisfactory standing
and may forfeit their graduate employment assistance
privilege under the following conditions:
1. Have failed or refused to take an employee
physical relative to drug or substance testing.
2. Have defaulted on a student loan.
3. Have been discharged from a job since
graduating from the college, for misconduct such
as stealing, substance abuse, sexual harassment,
etc.
4. Are in violation of any of the items listed under
Employer Expectations.
Western Tech Catalog | 177
WHERE ARE WTC GRADUATES WORKING
WESTERN TECHNICAL COLLEGE BOASTS OVER HUNDREDS OF EMPLOYERS THAT HAVE
SUCCESSFULLY RECRUITED GRADUATES FROM ALL THE PROGRAMS OFFERED AND MORE
ARE RECRUITING STUDENTS YEAR AFTER YEAR. WTC IS PROUD TO SAY THAT RECORDS
HAVE BEEN SET IN EMPLOYER PARTICIPATION IN OUR ANNUAL CAREER FAIRS (DAY AND
EVENING) AT BOTH CAMPUSES. HERE ARE SOME OF THE EMPLOYERS THAT HAVE HELPED
OUR GRADUATES OVER THE LAST FOUR YEARS:
INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND
SECURITY • ADVANCED SECURITY CONTRACTORS, INC.
• ALASKA COMMUNICATIONS
• ALTEP INC.
• ANTHONY ISD
• BMW MAZDA OF EL PASO
• BEST BUY GEEK SQUAD
• CENTRO DE SALUD LA FE
• CACI
• CASH REGISTER SYSTEMS OF EL PASO
• CITY OF EL PASO
• CLINT INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
• COMPUTER NET SOLUTIONS
• CONCENTRIX
• CSC (COMPUTER SCIENCE CORPS)
• CURREY@ADKINS
• DAHILL EL PASO
• DATAMARK
• DELL
• DESERT COMMUNICATIONS
• DM DICKASON
• DISH NETWORK
• DIVERSE MOBILE TECHNOLOGIES
• DORNEY SECURITY
• DYONYX
• EL PASO AREA TEACHERS FEDERAL CREDIT
UNION
• EL PASO COUNTY
• EL PASO ELECTRIC COMPANY
• EL PASO INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
• EL PASO LIMOUSINE EXPRESS
• EL PASO TIMES CORPORATION
• EL PASO WATER UTILITIES
• ENTRAVISION COMMUNICATIONS
• EPIAA
• EPCOM
• ERACOM PC
• ESEI, INC.
• FIELD NATION
• DISH NETWORK
• DOC INVESTMENTS LLC
• FRED LOYA INSURANCE
• GAMWELL TECH
• GARCOM
• GENERAL DYNAMICS
• GENESYS COMPUTERS
• GLACIER TECHNOLOGY
• HALLIBURTON
• HELEN OF TROY
• HONEYWELL
• HUNTLEIGH TECHNOLOGY GROUP
• INTEGRATED HUMAN CAPITAL
• INTEL CORPORATION
• KERI KUSTOM METAL ART
• LAUTERBACH BORSHOW AND COMPANY
• LEAR CORPORATION
• LOCKHEED MARTIN
• LONESTAR TITLE
• LNF DISTRIBUTION
• MAKIOS
• MANPOWER
• MASSER TECHNOLOGIES
• MIRATEK
• MOUYAN SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
• NEW MEXICO STATE UNIVERSITY
• PC TECHNOLOGIES
• PIZZA PROPERTIES, LTD.
• PRETTY IN PINK DAYCARE
• RAYTHEON TECHNICAL SERVICES
COMPANY
• SANDIA LABS
• SIERRA PROVIDENCE HEALTH NETWORK
• SOCORRO INDEPENDENT SCHOOL
DISTRICT
• SOUTHWEST WIRELESS
• SPECPRO
• SPECTRUM TECHOLOGY GROUP
• SPEAKING ROCK ENTERTAINMENT
• SPRINT
• STORMWIND STUDIOS
• SYNETRA
• TANDAM HR
• TEK SYSTEMS
• TELERX
• TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL
QUALITY
• TIME WARNER COMMUNICATIONS
• UNITED STATES ARMY
• VARAY SYSTEMS
• VIVINT
• YSLETA INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
TECHNOLOGY • AECOM
• AEROTEK
• ALLEGIANCE STAFFING
• B&N MACHINERY COMPANY
• BEST BUY
• BRADY INDUSTRIES
• DALTILE
• DAVE & BUSTER
• DM DICKASON
• DESERT COMMUNICATIONS
• DORNEY SECURITY
• EL PASO WATER UTILITIES
• FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
• FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION
• GARCOM
• GEORGIA PACIFIC
• GENERAL DYNAMICS
• GREENBAY PACKAGING
• DISH NETWORK
Western Tech Catalog | 178
• HALLIBURTON
• HELEN OF TROY
• HITACHI
• HOMELAND SECURITY
• HONEYWELL
• HUNTLEIGH TELECOM
• INTEGRATED HUMAN CAPITAL
• INTEL CORPORATION
• LOCKHEED MARTIN
• MAILING & SHIPPING
• MANPOWER
• NASA
• PROTECH GLOBAL SOLUTIONS
• RAYTHEON TECHNICAL SERVICES
COMPANY
• RELIANT LABELS AND PRINTING
• RTC COMMUNICATIONS
• SIEMENS
• SOUTHWESTERN WIRELESS
• SOUTHWIRE
• SUNCITY CABLING
• SUNCITY COMMUNICATION
• SCHNEIDER
• SCHLUMBERGER
• SUNLAND PARK CASINO
• SYNETRA
• TEXAS GAS SERVICE
• TEXZAK ELECTRIC
• TIME WARNER COMMUNICATIONS
• TRAX
• TRI STATE ELECTRIC
• TRUTEMPS
• V-GROUP
• VERIZON WIRELESS
• VINTON STEEL
• WEBATRON
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY /
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY WITH A
SUBSPECIALTY IN LIGHT DUTY
DIESEL • ACURA- INFINITI
• ALAMO AUTO GLASS
• AUDI OF EL PASO
• AUTOZONE
• BMW OF EL PASO
• BORMAN HONDA/HYUNDAI
• BRAKE MASTERS
• BRAVO CADILLAC/OLDSMOBILE
• CAMPING WORLD
• CARMAX
• CASA FORD
• CASA NISSAN
• CHARLIE CLARK NISSAN
• CITY OF EL PASO
• CLINT TRANSPORTATION
• CORONADO CAR CARE
• CRAWFORD BUICK GMC
• DICK POE CHRYSLER
• DICK POE DODGE
• DISCOUNT TIRE
• EL PASO HONDA
• EL PASO KIA & MITSUBISHI
• FIRESTONE
• FMH MATERIAL HANDLING
• HOY FAMILY AUTO
• FOX TOYOTA LEXUS OF EL PASO
• HYUNDAI OF EL PASO
• JACK KEY CHRYSLER, JEEP, DODGE
• JAY’S AUTOMOTIVE
• LUBE N GO
• MARTIN TIRE
• MERCEDES BENZ OF EL PASO
• MISSION CHEVROLET
• NAPA AUTOMOTIVE
• OREILLY AUTO PARTS
• PEP BOYS
• PIT STOP LUBE CENTER
• POE TOYOTA
• RAM, INC
• RAYTHEON AEROSPACE
• RESLER AUTOMOTIVE
• RUDOLPH CHEVROLET
• RUDOLPH VOLKSWAGON
• RUDOLPH MAZDA EAST & WEST
• RUDOLPH HONDA
• SEARS AUTO CENTER
• SHAMALEY FORD
• SHAMALEY PONTIAC, BUICK, GMC
• SISBARRO DEALERSHIPS
• SUN METRO
• TIRE CLUB
• TIRE XPRESS
• U.S. ARMY
• U.S. BORDER PATROL
• U-HAUL
• VIVA CHEVROLET
• VIVA DODGE
• VIVA FORD
• VIVA KIA/ MITSUBISHI
• VIVA NISSAN
• WALMART QUICK LUBE
• WINGFOOT
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY WITH A
SUBSPECIALTY IN PERFORMANCE
TUNING • 4-WHEEL CENTER
• 4 WHEEL PARTS
• AUTOZONE
• CARS PLUS
• DEL MOTORSPORTS
• DICK POE CHRYSLER
• DICK POE DODGE
• DISCOUNT TIRE
• DON SCHUMACHER RACING
• EL PASO HONDA
• GARCIA SUBARU
• JOHN FORCE RACING
• LITHIA DODGE
• NAPA AUTO PARTS
• NISSAN OF LAS CRUCES
• OASIS TIRES AND WHEELS
• PATTERSON PERFORMANCE
• PEP BOYS
• RESLER AUTOMOTIVE
• THE AUTO CLINIC
• VINTAGE STEEL AND CUSTOM
• VIVA CHEVROLET
• VIVA KIA/MITSUBISHI
• VIVA NISSAN
• VIVA DODGE
Western Tech Catalog | 179
• WALMART TIRE & LUBE EXPRESS
DIESEL MECHANICS • 4 RIVERS
• AM TRUCK REPAIR
• AD TOWING
• BCD DIESEL
• BORDER INTERNATIONAL TRUCKS
• CASA FORD
• CEMEX
• CENTRAL TRANSPORT
• CITY OF EL PASO
• COCA-COLA
• CUDD ENERGY
• CUMMINS ROCKY MOUNTAIN
• DOGGET FREIGHTLINER
• DONA ANA COUNTY OF NEW MEXICO
• ELITE MEDICAL TRANSPORT
• EL PASO DISPOSAL
• EL PASO COUNTY WATER IMPROVEMENT
DISTRICT
• El Paso ISD
• FAR WEST SERVICES, INC.
• FLYING J TRUCK STOP
• HALLIBURTON
• JOBE CONCRETE
• LOVES TRUCK TIRE SHOP
• MALIN
• MARK’S MOBILE SERVICES
• MESILLA VALLEY TRANSPORTATION
• MHC KENWORTH
• PENSKE
• PETRO LUBE CENTER
• PETRO TRUCK CENTER
• PILOT TRUCK CARE CENTER
• PRANA MACHINERY
• RAM, INC.
• RAYTHEON
• RUSH TRUCK CENTERS
• RWC INTERNATIONAL
• RYDER
• SCHLUMBERGER
• SIERRA MACHINERY
• SKY TRANSPORTATION
• SOCORRO ISD
• SOUTH PLAINS IMPLEMENTS
• SOUTHWEST FREIGHTLINER
• STEWART & STEVENSON
• SUN STATE EQUIPMENT
• SUN METRO
• SWIFT TRANSPORTATION
• TECH FLEET SERVICES
• TECHNICA
• TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
• TRUCK ENTERPRISE INC.
• UNION PACIFIC RAILROAD
• UNITED RENTALS
• US RENTALS
• WAGNER CAT
• WARREN CAT
• WESTERN DAIRY TRANSPORT
• YSLETA ISD
ADVANCED WELDING • AC CUSTUM WELDING
• ADECCO EMPLOYMENT
• AREA IRON & STEEL
• ARMOR METAL
• B DANIELS CONSTRUCTION
• BORDER MECHANICAL
• BOWEN INDUSTRIAL CONTRACTORS
• CASEEM STAFFING
• CITY OF ALPINE GAS DEPARTMENT
• DICKSON PROCESS SYSTEMS
• EL PASO INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
• EL PASO COUNTY WATER IMPROVEMENT
DISTRICT #1
• EL PASO DISPOSAL
• EL PASO TRAILERS
• FOAM APPLICATIONS
• GARCIA’S WELDING
• KALISCH STEEL
• KIEWIT
• LABOR FORCE
• LONE STAR WELDING
• MODERN IRON WORKS
• RAYTHEON
• RED BEARD FABRICATIONS
• REYCON CONSTRUCTION SOLUTIONS
• RIVERBEND CRANE & RIGGING
• ROBERT’S IRONWORKS
• RULY’S MOBILE WELDING
• STEEL SPECIALTIES
• STRUCTURAL STEEL SERVICES
• TEXAS GAS
• TJ FABRICATIONS
• U.S. NAVY
• WESTERN REFINING
• WYLER INDUSTRIAL WORKS
• Z TEX CONSTRUCTION
REFRIGERATION & HVAC
TECHNOLOGY • 7-11 STORES
• AC REFRIGERATION
• AIR FLOW HEATING & COOLING
• AIR WORKS
• AM REFRIGERATION
• ANTHONY ISD
• BALFOUR BEATTY COMMUNITIES, FORT
BLISS
• B&G AIR CONDITIONING
• BLUE ORIGIN
• BOHANNON DEVELOPMENT CORP
• BORDER MECHANICAL
• BOWEN INDUSTRIAL CONTRACTORS
• BUNGALOWS AT NORTH HILLS
• CALDARELLA’S RESTAURANT SUPPLY
• CITY OF ODESSA
• COCA-COLA
• COEFFIECIENT MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
• COMFORT EXPERTS
• DEL SOL HOSPITAL
• DIAZ SERVICES
• DOMINGUEZ SHEET METAL
• DOSHER REFRIGERATION
• DYNAMIC HEATING & COOLING
• EL PASO COUNTY SHERIFF’S DEPT.
• EL PASO HOUSING AUTHORITY
Western Tech Catalog | 180
• EL PASO ISD
• EL PASO SHEET METAL
• EPI CENTER
• EXPERT REFRIGERATION
• FABENS ISD
• FOUR SEASONS HEATING & COOLING
• GADSDEN INDEPENDENT SCHOOL
DISTRICT
• GRAY REFRIGERATION
• HAMPTON INN & SUITES
• HILTON GADEN INN
• HIGH TECH REPAIRS
• HI-TECH SOUTHWEST
• KING’S AIRE
• MARRIOTT HOTEL
• MECHANICAL TECHNOLOGIES
• NATIVE ENERGY
• ONE HOUR SERVICE
• PATRIOT AIR CONDITIONING
• PC AUTOMATED
• PINION TRAIL APARTMENTS
• PIZZA HUT
• PRIDE INDUSTRIES
• PROVIDENCE HOSPITAL
• RADISSON SUITE HOTEL
• RAYTHEON
• SAENZ REFRIGERATION
• SAN ELIZARIO INDEPENDENT SCHOOL
DISTRICT
• SMART TECH
• SPEAKING ROCK
• SOCORRO INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
• SOUTHWEST CHIMNEY
• SUN CITY A/C
• TEXAS GAS
• TEXAS TECH
• THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPANY
• THE HOSPITALS OF PROVIDENCE
• THE JOB CONNECTION
• THE POINTE APARTMENTS
• THERMO KING
• TIMES REFRIGERATION
• TORNILLO INDEPENDENT SCHOOL
DISTRICT
• TRANE
• UNION SHEET METAL
• WEIDNER APARTMENTS
• WISCO SUPPLY
• YSLETA INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
MEDICAL BILLING & CODING • ACCESS ADMINISTRATORS
• ACTION CARE PEDIATRIC THERAPY
• ACCOUNT TEMPS
• ATLANTIS MEDICAL SERVICES
• ALLEGIANCE STAFFING
• ALLIANCE BEHAVIORAL
• ANESTHESIA CONSULTANTS
• BIENVIVIR HEALTH SERVICES CENTER
• CARDIOLOGY CARE CONSULTANTS
• CENTER FOR INTEGRATIVE CANCER
MEDICINE
• CENTRO SAN VICENTE
• CENTRO DE SALUD LA FE
• DEL SOL MEDICAL CENTER
• DM DICKASON
• DR. ABEDIN
• DR. PITRE
• EL PASO INTERGRATED PHYSICIAN GROUP
• EL PASO 1ST CHOICE
• EL PASO CANCER TREATMENT CENTER
• EL PASO CARDIAC
• EL PASO EAR NOSE AND THROAT
• EL PASO OB-GYN
• EL PASO ORTHOPEDIC
• EL PASO PEDIATRICS
• EL PASO PHYSICAL THERAPY
• EL PASO PREMIER
• EL PASO PULMONARY
• EL PASO RADIOLOGY BILLING
• EL PASO SPECIALTY HOSPITAL
• EMERGENCE HEALTH NETWORK
• FRANKLIN MEDICAL CENTER
• GK DREAMS
• GONZALEZ CHIROPRACTIC CLINIC
• HGS
• KELLY SERVICES
• LAS NUBES WOMEN’S HEALTHCARE
• LAS PALMAS MEDICAL
• LIFE AMBULANCE SERVICE
• MEDICAL BILLING UNLIMITED (MBU)
• MEMORIAL MEDICAL CENTER
• MILLENIUM CHIROPRACTIC
• MT. WEST FAMILY HEALTH CENTER
• MONTE CRISTO HEALTHCARE
• NORTHEAST CORNERSTONE PEDIATRIC
• PAIN MANAGEMENT ASSOCIATION
• PASOS HOME HEALTHCARE
• PROVIDENCE MEMORIAL HOSPITAL
• QUEST HEALTHCARE
• RADIOLOGY & ASSOCIATES
• RIO GRANDE HEALTH CLINIC
• RIO GRANDE UROLOGY
• RM PERSONNEL
• SIERRA MEDICAL CENTER
• SOUTHWEST EYE INSTITUTE
• SOUTHWEST HOME HEALTH
• SUN CITY FAMILY PHYSICIANS
• SUNWEST ANESTHESIA
• TEXAS TECH UNIVERSITY
• UNIVERSITY MEDICAL CENTER
• WELLCARE INC.
• WILLIAM BEAUMONT ARMY MEDICAL
CENTER
MEDICAL/CLINICAL ASSISTANT WITH
X-RAY TECHNOLOGY • AL-NAJJAR, MOHAMMED MD
• ALTERNATIVES CENTRE
• ARMENDARIZ, RAFAEL MD
• AULURI, SPRINIVASA MD
• CANALES, ROBERTO MD
• CARDIOLOGY CARE
• CASTILLO, GREGORIO MD
• CENTER FOR HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY
• CENTRO DE SALUD LA FE
• CENTRO SAN VICENTE
• CLINICAL PATHOLOGY LABORATORIES
• COMPLETE INJURY CARE CONSULTANTS
• CONCENTRA
• COORDINATED CARE
• DAVITA CORPORATION
Western Tech Catalog | 181
• DEL SOL MEDICAL CENTER
• DEL SOL SLEEP DISORDER CENTER
• DESERT MOUNTAIN OB/GYN
• DESERT WEST SURGERY
• DIGESTIVE HEALTH CLINIC OF EL PASO
• DM DICKASON
• DOCTORS OF SANTA TERESA
• DOKA, DAVID MD
• EAST SIDE MEDICAL CLINIC
• EAST SIDE TOTAL HEALTH CARE
• EL PASO CARDIOLOGY
• EL PASO EYE CENTER
• EL PASO FIRST CARE CLINIC
• EL PASO HAND REHABILITATION CENTER
• EL PASO OB/GYN
• EL PASO ONCOLOGY
• EL PASO ORTHOPEDIC GROUP
• EL PASO PEDIATRICS
• EL PASO PHYSICAL THERAPY
• EL PASO PULMONARY
• EL PASO REGAIONAL CANCER CENTER
• EL PASO SLEEP CENTER
• ELEJE, AUGUSTINE MD
• FIERRO, RODOLFO MD
• GEORGE, THOMAS MD
• GRIFOLS
• HILL TOP WOMEN’S REPRODUCTIVE
CLINIC
• INJURY MEDICAL CLINIC
• INTERNAL MEDICINE
• INVOGUE TOTAL WOMANS HEALTHCARE
• JIMENEZ, MAURICIO MD
• KAIM, BORIS MD
• KELLY SERVICES
• LAB CORP
• LAS PALMAS MEDICAL CENTER
• LAZAR, GABRIEL MD
• LIFE CARE CENTER
• MARQUEZ-SMITH, TERESA MD
• MEMORIAL MEDICAL CENTER
• MONTWOOD MEDICAL CLINI
• MOUNTAIN STAR INJURY CLINIC
• NDUKA, CHINWE MD
• NEW HORIZONS PEDIATRICS
• NORTHEAST CORNER STONE PEDIATRICS
• NORTH PARK MEDICAL CENTER
• OPEN MRI
• OREGON IMAGING CENTER
• PHYSICIANS HEALTH CARE
• QUEST HEALTH CARE
• RIO GRANDE HEALTH
• RIO VISTA REHABILITATION
• RM PERSONNEL
• SALUD Y VIDA
• SONNO SLEEP DISORDER CENTER
• SOUTHWEST X-RAY
• SIERRA PROVIDENCE MEDICAL CENTER
• SUMMIT URGENT CARE
• THE DR’S INN
• UNITED BLOOD SERVICES
• UNIVERSITY MEDICAL CENTER
• UPPER VALLEY URGENT CARE
• VILLALOBOS, VICTOR MD
• WELLMED
• WILLIAM BEAUMONT MEDICAL CENTER
MASSAGE THERAPY • AKTIVE INTEGRATIVE CHIROPRACTIC AND
PERFORMANCE
• ATLAS CHIROPRACTIC
• APERION MASSAGE
• AXIS CHIROPRACTIC
• BALANCE FOR LIFE
• BALI BODY WORKS
• BARRAGANS HAIR SALON
• BARKER CHIROPRACTIC
• BIEN ESTAR MASSAGE
• BODY CREATIONS
• DEL NORTE CHIROPRACTIC
• DR. CAMPBELL
• DR. UNTERSEE
• DR WEBB
• DR. WILSON
• DYNAMISM MANUAL THERAPY
• EASTSIDE REHAB
• EL PASO DOCTORS OF CHIROPRACTORS
• FAMILY CHIROPRACTIC CLINIC
• FOLIAGE
• INJURY MEDICAL CLINIC
• GRACE THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE
• LAS PALMAS LIFE CARE CLINIC
• LIFE CARE CHIROPRACTIC &
REHABILITATION CENTER
• LIFE CHIROPRACTOR
• MASSAGE ENVY
• MY LIFE CHIROPRACTIC
• “N” DULGE
• NATURES TOUCH
• NORTHEAST CHIROPRACTIC HEALTH
CENTER
• REJUVENATE WELLNESS CENTER PLLC
• THE BODY BAR
• TRUE CARE CHIROPRACTIC
• SOUTHWEST CHIROPRACTIC
• SOUTHWEST WELLNESS CLINIC
• SYME CHIROPRACTIC
• VISION CHIROPRACTIC
• VISTA HILLS CHIROPRACTIC CLINIC
• VITAL HEALTH AND WELLNESS
• VITALITY MEDSPA
PHYSICAL THERAPIST ASSISTANT • ACTION CARE PEDIATRIC THERAPY
• ATRIUM PHYSICAL THERAPY
• BORDER THERAPY
• CARE FOR KIDS
• EL PASO REHABILITATION
• ERNEST HEALTH
• 800 CARE/REHAB
• HOSPICE EL PASO
• LAS CRUCES ORTHOPEDIC
• MILLENUIM PHYSICAL THERAPY
• MOUNTAIN VIEW
• PALOMA WELLNESS AND REHAB
• PASITOS HEALTH CLINIC
• PRS (PROGRESSIVE RESIDENTIAL
SERVICES)
• PHYSICIANS HEALTHCARE ASSOCIATION
HOSPITAL
• REACTION PHYSICAL THERAPY
• REHAB CARE
Western Tech Catalog | 182
• REHAB HOSPITAL OF SOUTHERN NEW
MEXICO
• SENIOR REHAB SOLUTIONS
• SPECTRUM REHAB SERVICES
• SPINE AND REHAB SPECIALIST
• UNIVERSITY MEDICAL CENTER
• CENTER FOR THERAPUTIC SERVICES
• LAS PALMAS/DEL SOL HOSPITALS
• SYMMETRY REHAB
• TIER 1 THERAPY
• TRESCO
• TRIUMPH LONG-TERM CARE HOSPITAL
• REGENT CARE CENTER
• URGENT CARE HOMEHEALTH
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
MANAGEMENT • ACADEMY SPORTS AND OUTDOOR
• ALORICA
• BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
• CARMAX
• CENTRO DE SALUD LA FE
• CROWN HERITAGE
• DISH NETWORK
• DM DICKASON
• FEDEX EXPRESS
• FEDERAL MOGUL
• GRAND CANYON UNIVERSITY
• H&H TAX SERVICE
• HOBBY LOBBY
• HOME INSURANCE AGENCY
• INFINITO INC.
• INTEGRATED HUMAN CAPITAL
• MAZZO AUTO
• MESILLA VALLEY TRANSPORTION
• MONTANA BARBER INSTITUTE
• PAPA JOHN’S
• OLIVAS MUSIC
• ONCE UPON A CHILD
• RJ REMODELING
• SPEAKING ROCK
• SUPREME GLASS
• TAXES 4 TIPS
• THE DIESEL PIT
• TORNILLO ISD
• TRIMCO
• TORNILLO ISD
• UNIVERSITY MEDICAL CENTER
Western Tech Catalog | 183
CANCELLATION & REFUNDS POLICY
CANCELLATION POLICY A full refund will be made to any student who cancels the enrollment contract within 72 hours (until midnight of
the third day excluding Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays) after the enrollment contract is signed. A full refund
will also be made to any student who cancels enrollment within the student’s first three scheduled class days, except
that the school may retain not more than $100 in any administrative fees charged and items of extra expense that are
necessary for the portion of the program attended and stated separately on the enrollment agreement.
COLLEGE CANCELLATION POLICY Students who decide to leave their program within the first 14 school days of starting their program will be entitled
to a full tuition refund, less administrative fees not to exceed $100, and will be eligible for a full refund of books,
tools, and supplies (including uniforms) if returned to Western Tech in good condition. Any books and supplies that
are distributed and are not returned back to WTC will be billed to the student. Any balances that remain for non-
returned items will be billed to the student, and any balance owed needs to be paid within 3 months to avoid the
account from being sent to collections. Written notice of cancellation must be addressed to the registrar of Western
Tech at the address on the enrollment agreement by certified or registered mail or hand delivered.
REFUND POLICY
1. Refund computations will be based on scheduled clock hours of class attendance through the last date
of attendance. Leaves of absence, suspensions, and school holidays will not be counted as part of the
scheduled class attendance.
2. The effective date of termination for refund purposes will be the earliest of the following:
a) The last day of attendance, if the student is terminated by the school;
b) The date of receipt of written notice from the student; or
c) Ten school days following the last date of attendance.
3. If tuition and fees are collected in advance of entrance, and if after expiration of the 72 hour cancellation
privilege the student does not enter school, not more than $100 in nonrefundable administrative fees
shall be retained by the school for the entire residence program or synchronous distance education
course.
4. In the event that a student account has a credit balance, it is the policy of the College to refund the
amount according to the completed Student Account Closeout form on file with the Financial Aid office.
Refunds are only issued in the event of a credit balance.
5. If a student enters a residence or synchronous distance education program and withdraws or is otherwise
terminated, the school or college may retain not more than $100 in nonrefundable administrative fees
for the entire program. The minimum refund of the remaining tuition and fees will be the pro rata portion
of tuition, fees, and other charges that the number of hours remaining in the portion of the course or
program for which the student has been charged after the effective date of termination bears to the total
number of hours in the portion of the course or program for which the student has been charged, except
that a student may not collect a refund if the student has completed 75 percent or more of the total
number of hours in the portion of the program for which the student has been charged on the effective
date of termination.
6. Refunds for books, tools, or other supplies should be handled separately from refund of tuition and other
academic fees. The student will not be required to purchase instructional supplies, books and tools until
such time as these materials are required. Once these materials are purchased, no refund will be made.
7. A student who withdraws for a reason unrelated to the student’s academic status after the 75 percent
completion mark and requests a grade at the time of withdrawal shall be given a grade of “incomplete”
and permitted to re-enroll in the course or program during the 12-month period following the date the
student withdrew without payment of additional tuition for that portion of the course or program.
8. A full refund of all tuition and fees is due and refundable in each of the following cases:
a) An enrollee is not accepted by the school;
b) If the course of instruction is discontinued by the school and this prevents the student from
completing the course; or
c) If the student's enrollment was procured as a result of any misrepresentation in advertising,
promotional materials of the school, or representations by the owner or representatives of the
school.
Western Tech Catalog | 184
A full or partial refund may also be due in other circumstances of program deficiencies or violations of requirements
for career schools and colleges.
9. If during the program of training, the school determines that a student is not adapted for this field, the
school reserves the right to terminate the student’s training. Unused prepaid tuition will be refunded in
accordance with the refund policy.
REFUND POLICY FOR STUDENTS CALLED TO ACTIVE MILITARY SERVICE.
10. A student of the school or college who withdraws from the school or college as a result of the student
being called to active duty in a military service of the United States or the Texas National Guard may
elect one of the following options for each program in which the student is enrolled:
a) if tuition and fees are collected in advance of the withdrawal, a pro rata refund of any tuition,
fees, or other charges paid by the student for the program and a cancellation of any unpaid tuition,
fees, or other charges owed by the student for the portion of the program the student does not
complete following withdrawal;
b) a grade of incomplete with the designation "withdrawn-military" for the courses in the program,
other than courses for which the student has previously received a grade on the student's
transcript, and the right to re-enroll in the program, or a substantially equivalent program if that
program is no longer available, not later than the first anniversary of the date the student is
discharged from active military duty without payment of additional tuition, fees, or other charges
for the program other than any previously unpaid balance of the original tuition, fees, and charges
for books for the program; or
c) the assignment of an appropriate final grade or credit for the courses in the program, but only if
the instructor or instructors of the program determine that the student has:
1. Satisfactorily completed at least 90 percent of the required coursework for the program;
and
2. Demonstrated sufficient mastery of the program material to receive credit for completing
the program.
11. The payment of refunds will be totally completed such that the refund instrument has been negotiated
or credited into the proper account(s), within 60 days after the effective date of termination.
*In all cases, refunds will meet or exceed the requirements of TEC, §§132.061 and 0611.
Recommended